Apache Hvac

ApacheHVACUserGuide
IESVirtualEnvironment6.3
ApacheHVACUserGuide6.3revA

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 1

Contents
1 Introduction.................................................................................................................................0H7
1.1 WhatisApacheHVACandwheredoesitfitwithintheVirtualEnvironment?.......................1H7
1.2 ApacheHVACInterfaceOverview..........................................................................................2H8
1.2.1 VirtualEnvironmentMenuBar...................................................................................................................3H8
1.2.2 ApacheHVACMenuBar..............................................................................................................................4H8
1.2.3 ApacheHVACToolbars................................................................................................................................5H8
1.2.4 ModelWorkspace.......................................................................................................................................6H8
1.2.5 Mousecontrols...........................................................................................................................................7H9
1.2.6 ViewToolbar...............................................................................................................................................8H9
1.2.7 Componentbrowser...................................................................................................................................9H9
1.3 AComponentbasedApproachtoSystemSimulation.........................................................10H11
1.4 SystemModelingFundamentals.........................................................................................11H12
1.4.1 Preparation...............................................................................................................................................12H12
1.4.2 ConstructingSystems...............................................................................................................................13H13
1.4.3 Roomcomponents....................................................................................................................................14H14
2 HVACSystemComponents........................................................................................................15H16
2.1.1 Watersideplantequipmentandwaterloops...........................................................................................16H16
2.1.2 Airsideplantequipmentandsystemcomponents...................................................................................17H16
2.1.3 RoomunitszoneequipmentincludedonlywithinRoomcomponents.................................................18H16
2.2 HeatSources.......................................................................................................................19H18
2.3 PartLoadHeatSource........................................................................................................20H19
2.3.1 Partloadheatsourcedefinition...............................................................................................................21H20
2.3.2 CombinedHeat,Cooling,&Power...........................................................................................................22H21
2.3.3 Condenserheatrecovery..........................................................................................................................23H21
2.3.4 Pumppower.............................................................................................................................................24H22
2.3.5 PartloadPerformance.............................................................................................................................25H22
2.4 HotWaterBoilers...............................................................................................................26H23
2.4.1 Hotwaterboilerdefinition.......................................................................................................................27H24
2.4.2 CombinedHeat,Cooling,&Power...........................................................................................................28H25
2.4.3 Condenserheatrecovery..........................................................................................................................29H25
2.4.4 BoilerPerformance...................................................................................................................................30H26
2.4.5 RatedCondition........................................................................................................................................31H31
2.4.6 DesignCondition.......................................................................................................................................32H34
2.4.7 OperatingParameters..............................................................................................................................33H35
2.4.8 Pumps.......................................................................................................................................................34H38
2.4.9 Pumpheatgaintohotwaterloop(fraction)............................................................................................35H39
2.5 Airsourceheatpump.........................................................................................................36H42
2.5.1 Heatpumpsettings...................................................................................................................................37H44
2.5.2 Heatpumpperformance..........................................................................................................................38H44
2.6 ChilledWaterLoops,HeatRejection,andChillerSequencing.............................................39H45
2.6.1 Chilledwaterloopdefinition....................................................................................................................40H49
2.6.2 ChilledWaterLooptab.............................................................................................................................41H51

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 2

2.6.3 HeatRejectiontab....................................................................................................................................42H54
2.6.4 ChillerSettab............................................................................................................................................43H60
2.7 PartLoadCurveChillers......................................................................................................44H62
2.7.1 Partloadcurvechillerdefinition..............................................................................................................45H62
2.7.2 CondenserHeatRecovery........................................................................................................................46H64
2.7.3 Electricalpowerconsumptionforpumpsandfans..................................................................................47H65
2.7.4 COPTemperatureDependence................................................................................................................48H66
2.7.5 Partloadperformancedataforchillerandauxiliaryequipment.............................................................49H66
2.8 ElectricWatercooledChillers.............................................................................................50H68
2.8.1 Watercooledchillerdefinition.................................................................................................................51H68
2.8.2 ChillerPerformance..................................................................................................................................52H69
2.9 ElectricAircooledChillers..................................................................................................55H83
2.9.1 Watercooledchillerdefinition.................................................................................................................56H83
2.9.2 ChillerPerformance..................................................................................................................................57H85
2.10DedicatedWatersideEconomizers(types)..........................................................................60H97
2.10.1 Watersideeconomizersettingsdialog.....................................................................................................61H99
2.11DXCooling(types)............................................................................................................62H102
2.12UnitaryCoolingSystems(types).......................................................................................63H105
2.12.2 UnitaryCoolingSystemPerformanceData............................................................................................64H107
2.13HeatingCoils.....................................................................................................................65H110
2.14CoolingCoils.....................................................................................................................66H111
2.14.1 Background.............................................................................................................................................67H111
2.14.2 SimpleModel..........................................................................................................................................68H111
2.14.3 AdvancedModel.....................................................................................................................................69H111
2.14.4 AutosizingMode.....................................................................................................................................70H112
2.14.5 ManualMode.........................................................................................................................................71H112
2.14.6 CoolingCoilDialogs................................................................................................................................72H113
2.14.7 DesignSizingParametersforSimpleCoilModel....................................................................................73H117
2.14.8 DesignSizingParametersforAdvancedCoilModel...............................................................................74H118
2.15SprayChamber.................................................................................................................75H123
2.15.1 Reference................................................................................................................................................76H123
2.15.2 SprayEfficiency.......................................................................................................................................77H123
2.15.3 CirculationPumpElectricalPower..........................................................................................................78H124
2.16SteamHumidifiers............................................................................................................79H125
2.17HeatRecoveryDevices......................................................................................................80H126
2.18Fans..................................................................................................................................81H128
2.19MixingDamperSet...........................................................................................................82H130
2.20ReturnAirDamperSet......................................................................................................83H137
2.21ControlledDivergentTJunction(splitterdamper).........................................................84H138

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 3

2.22DuctworkHeatPickup.....................................................................................................85H139
2.23DirectActingHeater/Cooler.............................................................................................86H140
2.24HotWaterRadiators.........................................................................................................87H142
2.24.2 DistributionPumpConsumption............................................................................................................88H146
2.24.3 Material..................................................................................................................................................89H146
2.24.4 TotalRadiatorWeight.............................................................................................................................90H146
2.24.5 WaterCapacity.......................................................................................................................................91H146
2.25ChilledCeilings.................................................................................................................92H147
3 Controllers...............................................................................................................................93H151
3.1 WorkingwithcontrollersontheairsideHVACnetwork....................................................94H151
3.1.1 On/Off,Deadband,andProportionalcontrol.........................................................................................95H152
3.1.2 Multiplecontrolofsinglevariable..........................................................................................................96H152
3.2 Controlleroperation.........................................................................................................97H153
3.3 Controllerparameters......................................................................................................98H154
3.3.1 Controlledvariables................................................................................................................................99H155
3.3.2 Sensedvariables.....................................................................................................................................100H156
3.4 Controlsincombination...................................................................................................101H158
3.4.1 Multiplecontrollersatasinglenetworknode........................................................................................102H158
3.4.2 LinkingofcontrollersvialogicalANDandORconnections....................................................................103H159
3.5 Airflowcontrollers............................................................................................................104H159
3.6 Controllerparametersterminologyandgeneraldiscussion...........................................105H159
3.6.1 TimeSwitchorOn/OffControl...............................................................................................................106H159
3.6.2 Sensor(foron/offandproportionalcontrol).........................................................................................107H161
3.6.3 SetPoint(foron/offcontrol)..................................................................................................................108H161
3.6.4 ProportionalControl...............................................................................................................................109H162
3.6.5 ANDConnections....................................................................................................................................110H164
3.6.6 ORConnections......................................................................................................................................111H164
3.7 ControllerAlgorithm.........................................................................................................112H164
3.8 Airflowcontrol.................................................................................................................113H166
3.9 IndependentTimeSwitchController................................................................................114H167
3.10IndependentControllerwithSensor.................................................................................115H169
3.10.1 Proportionalcontrolssequencing...........................................................................................................116H172
3.11IndependentDifferentialController..................................................................................117H174
3.12DependentTimeSwitchController...................................................................................118H175
3.13DependentControllerwithSensor....................................................................................119H176
3.14DependentDifferentialController....................................................................................120H177
4 RoomUnitControllers.............................................................................................................121H180
4.1 HotWaterRadiatorControl..............................................................................................122H181
4.1.2 On/offandsetpointcontrols.................................................................................................................123H182
4.1.3 ProportionalControllerforHotWaterFlowRate..................................................................................124H183
4.2 ChilledCeilingControl......................................................................................................125H184
4.2.2 On/offandsetpointcontrols.................................................................................................................126H185

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 4

4.2.3 ProportionalControllerforColdWaterFlowRate.................................................................................127H185
4.2.4 ProportionalTemperatureController.....................................................................................................128H186
4.3 DirectActingRoomHeaterController...............................................................................129H186
5 HVACWizard...........................................................................................................................130H188
5.1 HVACWizardInterface.....................................................................................................131H188
5.1.1 HVACWizarddialog................................................................................................................................132H188
5.1.2 HVACWizard:CreateNewSystem.........................................................................................................133H189
5.1.3 Page3oftheHVACWizard(CreateNewSystem)..................................................................................134H190
5.1.4 HVACWizard:OpenRecentSystem.......................................................................................................135H191
6 MultiplexingHVACSystemNetworks......................................................................................136H192
6.1 CreatingaMultiplexOverview.......................................................................................137H193
6.1.1 RulesforMultiplexesandcontrollerswithinthem................................................................................138H196
6.2 CreateMultiplex...............................................................................................................139H197
6.2.1 Description..............................................................................................................................................140H197
6.2.2 EditingMode...........................................................................................................................................141H197
6.2.3 Layers......................................................................................................................................................142H198
6.2.4 PrincipalRooms......................................................................................................................................143H199
6.2.5 AssignfromRoomGroup........................................................................................................................144H201
6.3 EditMultiplex...................................................................................................................145H202
6.3.1 MultiplexToolbar...................................................................................................................................146H202
6.3.2 EditMultiplexDialog...............................................................................................................................147H202
6.4 EditingComponentsandControllersinmultiplex.............................................................148H203
6.4.1 TabularEditing........................................................................................................................................149H203
6.4.2 TouchEdits.............................................................................................................................................150H203
6.4.3 EditRoomComponentInstancesandRoomUnitControllers................................................................151H203
6.5 TabularEditing.................................................................................................................152H204
6.5.2 PastetoDataTableusingtabulareditview...........................................................................................153H206
6.6 NodeNumbering..............................................................................................................154H208
6.7 DeleteMultiplex...............................................................................................................155H209
7 SystemLoads,Ventilation,andAutosizing...............................................................................156H210
7.1 Overview..........................................................................................................................157H210
7.2 Zonelevelloadsandsizing...............................................................................................158H210
7.3 Systemlevelloadsandsizing............................................................................................159H211
7.4 SystemPrototypes&Sizingworkflownavigator...............................................................160H212
7.4.1 SystemPrototypes&Sizingworkflowsummary....................................................................................161H212
7.4.2 Designsizingconditions..........................................................................................................................162H215
7.4.3 AcquirePrototypeSystems.....................................................................................................................163H215
7.4.4 PrototypeSystemsSelectionandModification......................................................................................164H217
7.4.5 AssignSpacesorZonestoRoomComponents.......................................................................................165H217
7.4.6 SystemSchedulesHoursofoperationandsetpoints..........................................................................166H218
7.4.7 RoomLoadsCalculations........................................................................................................................167H219
7.4.8 AccessLoadsDataspreadsheetsandASHRAE62.1Ventilation.............................................................168H220
7.4.9 AHUSystemParameters.........................................................................................................................169H222

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 5

7.4.10 AssignSystemParametersandRoomSizingData..................................................................................170H223
7.4.11 SystemandPlantLoadsCalculation.......................................................................................................171H224
7.4.12 SystemandPlantEquipmentSizing........................................................................................................172H225
7.4.13 SystemandPlantSizingReport..............................................................................................................173H225
8 PrototypeHVACSystems.........................................................................................................174H228
8.1 PredefinedprototypeHVACsystems:Commonfeatures.................................................175H229
8.2 PredefinedprototypeHVACsystems:Systemtypesandconfigurations..........................176H230
8.3 Workingwithprototypesystems......................................................................................177H233
8.3.1 Loading,saving,andretrievingprototypesystems................................................................................178H233
8.3.2 Selecting,moving,copying,andnamingsystems...................................................................................179H233
8.3.3 Modifyingpredefineprototypesystems...............................................................................................180H233
8.4 Commonelementsusedinpredefineprototypesystems................................................181H233
8.4.1 Energyrecoveryandbypassdampersection.........................................................................................182H233
8.4.2 VAVairflowcontrols...............................................................................................................................183H236
8.5 Prototypesystems:Systemspecificdescriptionsandguidance........................................184H237
8.5.1 PackagedTerminalAirConditioning(PTAC)...........................................................................................185H237
8.5.2 PackagedTerminalHeatPump(PTHP)...................................................................................................186H237
8.5.3 Singlezoneairconditioningsystemwithfurnace(PSZAC)...................................................................187H237
8.5.4 Singlezoneheatpumpsystem(PSZHP)................................................................................................188H237
8.5.5 VAVreheatusingDXCoolingandHWboiler..........................................................................................189H237
8.5.6 VAVusingDXCoolingandparallelfanpoweredboxeswithelectricheat.............................................190H237
8.5.7 VAVreheatusingwatercooledchillerandHWboiler...........................................................................191H237
8.5.8 VAVusingwatercooledchillerandparallelfanpoweredboxeswithelectricheat..............................192H237
8.5.9 Dedicatedoutsideairsystem(DOAS)withfourpipefancoilunits,EWCchillerandHWboiler...........193H237
8.5.10 Indirectdirect evaporative cooling version of VAVreheat system 5 above with backup DX cooling and
zonelevelCO2baseddemandcontrolledventilation(DCV).................................................................194H237
8.5.11 VAVreheat with differentialenthalpy economizer set up for the public areas of a hotel or similar
buildingwithPTACsystemsforindividualguest/residentroomsdrawingairfromanatriumzoneonthe
mainVAVsystem....................................................................................................................................195H237
8.5.12 Mixedmode natural ventilation and VAVreheat with zone temperature and zone CO2 overrides for
natventwhenitisinsufficient...............................................................................................................196H237
8.5.13 Singlefandualductandwithzonelevelmixingboxes..........................................................................197H237
8.5.14 Dualfandualductwithzonelevelmixingboxes..................................................................................198H237
8.5.15 Underfloor air distribution with parallel fanpowered boxes for perimeter zones, leakage path, and
heatingmoderemixingofPFPbzones..................................................................................................199H237
8.5.16 UFAD/DV system as above, plus heat pipe or runaround coil in AHU for free reheat of subcooled
(dehumidified)airaftertheAHUcoolingcoil.........................................................................................200H238
8.5.17 Active chilled beams and DOAS for ventilation using electric watercooled chiller with waterside
economizerandcondenserheatrecovery;HWboilerandrecoveredheatforDOASandzonebaseboard
fintubeconvectors.................................................................................................................................201H238
8.5.18 Radiantheatingandcoolingpanels(i.e.,fourpipesystem),plusDOASwithairsideenergyrecoveryand
DCV.........................................................................................................................................................202H238
8.5.19 Radiant panels and DOAS as above with heat pipe or runaround coil in AHU for free reheat of sub
cooled(i.e.,dehumidified)airaftertheAHUcoolingcoil......................................................................203H238
9 References...............................................................................................................................204H239
10AppendixA.RulesforAirFlowSpecification............................................................................205H240

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 6

11AppendixB.HVACSystemsModelingGuidanceSpecifictoASHRAEStandard90.12007........206H242
11.1.1 Baselinesystems2and4PackagedTerminalHeatPump(PTHP)andPackagedSingleZoneHeatPump
(PSZHP)..................................................................................................................................................207H242
12AppendixC.ModelingVRV/VRFsystems.................................................................................208H252

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 7

1 0BIntroduction
1.1 12BWhatisApacheHVACandwheredoesitfitwithintheVirtualEnvironment?
ApacheHVAC is used for modeling heating, ventilating, and airconditioning (HVAC) systems, and falls
withintheVirtualEnvironmentsThermalapplicationcategory.
TheApacheHVACsupportsthedetaileddefinition,configuration,control,andmodelingofHVACsystems.
ThesimulationprogramitselfisrunfromwithinApacheThermal.
ApacheHVAC is invoked as an adjunct to Apache Simulation by linking to a particular HVAC system file
whenthebuildingmodelsimulationisrun,asdescribedintheApacheUserGuide.
There are two distinct means of spaceconditioning and HVAC simulation in the IES Virtual Environment,
andthesearesuitableforverydifferenttasks,levelsofanalysis,andstagesofdesign.
ApacheSystemsSimplifiedsystemmodelingforschematicdesignandcodecomplianceinApacheSim:
Fully autosized and ideally controlled systems condition spaces exactly to set points via pre
defined HVAC systemtype algorithms and minimal room, system, and plant inputs within
ApacheSim.ThissimplifiedHVACmodelingisfullyintegratedwiththethermal,solar,andbulk
airflow modeling at every simulation time step. However, because the systems are
approximated, it is far less representative of actual system equipment, configurations, and
controls.Thus,whileitmaybeveryusefulinearlydesignphasesandspaceloadsanalyses,this
type of modeling is normally not used in design development, documentation of energy
performance for the ASHRAE 90.1 performance rating method, thermal comfort studies, or
otherdetailedanalysis.
ApacheHVACDetailedHVACsystemsmodeling:
Detailed dynamic modeling of systems, equipment, and controls in ApacheHVAC is also fully
integrated with the thermal, solar, and bulkairflow modeling at every simulation time step.
Componentbased system models can be built from scratch or by modifying autosizable
prototypesystems,ortheprototypesystemscanbeusedintheirpredefinedconfiguration.
When ApacheHVAC is invoked, all spaces in the model that are assigned to a room component in the
activeApacheHVACsystematthetimeofsimulationwillbeservedbythatsystem.Solongasthisistrue,
these rooms will not be served by the simpler systems otherwise defined in the Apache Systems dialog.
Similarly,Auxiliaryventilation,asdefinedintheAirExchangestaboftheThermalConditionstemplate,is
turnedoffautomaticallyforroomsservedbyanApacheHVACsystem.
VirtualEnvironment
Thermalapplications
ApacheHVACview

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 8

1.2 13BApacheHVACInterfaceOverview
TheApacheHVACviewconsistsofthefollowinginterfacefeatures:
1.2.1 59BVirtualEnvironmentMenuBar

These menus provide functions used throughout the Virtual environment. Please refer to the Virtual
EnvironmentUserGuideforfurtherinformation.
1.2.2 60BApacheHVACMenuBar
ThesepulldownmenusprovidefunctionsspecifictotheApacheHVACview.
1.2.3 61BApacheHVACToolbars
The toolbars provide quick access to menu functions, selection of components and controllers to be
placed on the system schematic, creation and editing of system of multiplexes, and access to system
prototypes.Themultiplexingeditingtoolbarisactiveonlywhenamultiplexisselected.
1.2.4 62BModelWorkspace

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 9

The model workspace displays the HVAC system airside schematic and provides a graphical means of
selecting,configuring,organizing,andeditingcomponentobjects.
1.2.5 63BMousecontrols
Theleftmousebuttonisusedforselectingandplacingcomponentandcontrollers.Whenplacingthese,
the current selection persists until cancelled by clicking the right mouse button. The mouse scroll wheel
canbeusedtozoominandoutofthesystemsview.Thepanfunctionaccessedprovidedbymovingthe
mousewhiledepressingthescrollwheel.
1.2.6 64BViewToolbar
This provides functions for manipulating the view of the system schematic, including zoom to HVAC
networkextents,window,in,out,pan,previous,andnext.
1.2.7 65BComponentbrowser
Browsershow/hidetoolbarbutton.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 10

ThecomponentbrowserprovidesalistingofallcomponentsinthecurrentApacheHVACfile.Thiscanbe
usedtolocateand/orselectaparticulartypeofcomponentorcontrollerwithinalargeorcomplexHVAC
network. Selecting the component or controller within the browser causes it to be highlighted on the
network in the model space. The browser can also be useful in determining how many of a particular
componentorcontrollertypearepresent.
ItisnotnecessarytohidethecomponentbrowserformostHVACsystemnetworks,asthespeedofthis
has been significantly improved over earlier versions. When working on exceptionally large or complex
HVAC networks, if the opening of component and controller dialogs does begin to slow noticeably, the
componentbrowsercanbeturnedOFFbyclickingthebrowsershow/hidebuttononthetoolbar.Thiswill
furtherincreasethespeedwithwhichcomponentandcontrollerdialogsopen.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 11

1.3 AComponentbasedApproachtoSystemSimulation
Energy simulation programs have in the past provided models of only certain fixed system types (VAV,
induction,fancoils,etc).Inpractice,buildingsystemsdonotconformtotheserigidsystemtypes,andso
itwasnecessarytoacceptadegreeofcompromiseintherealismofthemodel.
Figure11:AmultizoneHVACnetworkinthiscasevariableairvolumewithindirectdirectevaporative
cooling, energy recovery, variation of static pressure with bypass of heat exchangers, duct heat gain,
return air plenums, controls for mixedmode operation with natural ventilation, and primary, transfer,
andexhaustairflowpathsavailabletoeachofthezonesinthelayeredmultiplexregion.
ApacheHVAChasbeendesignedtoimposeminimalrestrictionsontheuserindefiningthesystemmodel.
The user is offered a number of basic blocks, each describing a generic type of equipment (heating coil,
fan, humidifier, etc.). These basic blocks can be assembled as required to model an actual system
configuration, rather than an idealized simplification. The complexity of the model is limited only by the
typesofblockavailableandsomebasicrulesconcerningtheirinterconnection.Withintheseconstraints,
itispossibletoassemblemodelsofmanydifferentsystemandcontrolconfigurationsandtoexplorethe
benefitsofvariationsonstandardsystemtypes.
Anitemofplantorcontrolcanbedescribedonce,andthencopiedorreferencedasmanytimesasmay
berequiredtodefinethesystem.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 12

1.4 14BSystemModelingFundamentals
1.4.1 66BPreparation
The speed, efficiency, and effectiveness with which an ApacheHVAC system can be set and all thermal
zonesassignedtoitissignificantlydependentupontheextenttowhichthemodelhasbeenappropriately
organized prior to doing so. Therefore, it is important to complete the following in ModelIt, before
attemptingtoassignroomsorzonestoanApacheHVACsystem:
Begin by using the Connect Spaces tool to couple any rooms in the model that will share a
common thermostat or related means of controlling space conditions (e.g., they will all be
served by a single VAV box). The resulting thermal zone will thus be represented as a single
Room component in ApacheHVAC. This will facilitate use of multiplexing, predefined
systems,andefficientsystemlayout,whileavoidingunnecessarycomplexity.
o When connecting spaces, if they will be separated by physical partitions in the actual
building, these partitions should be retained, as their thermal mass and ability or
receive solar gain or other radiant, conductive, and convective heat transfer will
contributetotheaccuracyofthermalandenergymodeling.
o Ifanyofthezoneshasabsoluteinternalgains(WorBtu/h)ratherthaninternalgains
defined according to floor area (W/m
2
or W/ft
2
), the absolute gains will have to be
manually added in the composite zone. However, if they are assigned per unit floor
area,noactionisrequired,asnofloorareawillbelost.
In addition to conditioned spaces, create geometry for any other spaces or zones that will
needtoberepresentedinApacheHVAC,suchasreturnairplenums(typicallyoneperflooror
as designed), underfloor air distribution (UFAD) supply plenums, thermally stratified zones,
radiantheatingorcoolingslabs,earthtubes,solarchimneys,etc.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 13

It is important to set up a Grouping Scheme in ModelIt that sorts thermal zones into groups
such as System1, 2, 3, etc. or AHU1, 2, 3, etc. and other space types, such as Return air
plenums,Solarchimneysegments,Unconditionedzones,etc.
If the model includes UFAD of thermal displacement ventilation (DV), it is essential to ensure
that the number and order of Stratified zones exactly matches the number and order of
corresponding Occupied zones in any one AHU group. Doing so will facilitate system
multiplexing,autosizing,andotherfundamentalaspectsofsystemmodeling.Iftherearesome
mixed (nonstratified zones) on the same system, either place them in a separate group of
occupiedzonesorcreatedummystratifiedzones(e.g.,aseriesofsmallsuperinsulatedboxes
with no internal gains) in the model that can fill out the list of stratified zones to make it
parallel the list of occupied zones on the same system. Occupied and Stratified should be in
separategroupswiththeAHUAssignmentscheme.
1.4.2 67BConstructingSystems
Systems are constructed by picking components from the toolbars. Most components take the form of
tiles that are placed on the diagram to build up a schematic of the system. Controllers can also be
drawn,togetherwithlinesindicatingtheassociatedsensorandcontrolpoints.Certaincomponents,such
asplantequipment,donotappearontheschematic,butareinsteadlinkedtoothercomponentsviatext
references.
Each component has a set of parameters characterizing its operation. Facilities for editing these
parameters are accessed by doubleclicking on the component or through the menus. Once placed,
groupsofcomponentsmaybeselected,deleted,moved,orcopiedusingfunctionsonthetoolbar.
Multiplexing,describedinsection6,providesanefficientmeansofassigninggroupsofspacestoasetof
room components and of replicating and editing HVAC components, controllers, and configurations
thereof. The associated Tabular Edit view supports efficiently editing and checking numerous inputs for
componentsandcontrollers.
Whendrawingschematicsitishelpfultokeepinmindthefollowingprinciples:

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 14

When first building an HVAC system, it is advisable to keep the system simple. This makes it
easy to test the control principles involved. The system can later be expanded to introduce
additionalroomsandcontrolrefinements.
Set up the minimum number of flow controls necessary to define the flow throughout the
systemi.e., on all branches. In other words, airflow must be specified in all parts of the
system, except where the flow can be deduced from other specified flows by addition and
subtractionatjunctions.Specifyingmoreflowsthanarestrictlynecessaryisnotforbidden,but
alwaysensurethatthespecifiedflowsaremutuallyconsistent.Inmostcases,itwillbeeasier
toallowflowstobecalculatedwherevertheycanbe.
In the case a room, it is only necessary to specify either the supply or the extract flow. The
program will then set the other flow on the assumption of equality of inflow and outflow. In
specialized applications, such as when MacroFlo is running in tandem with ApacheHVAC, the
room inflow and outflow may be set to different values. Any imbalance between inflow and
outflowwillthenbepickedupbyMacroFlo(ifitisinuse),andthedifferencewillbemadeup
withflowsthroughopeningsinthebuilding.AnimbalancecanalsobemeaningfulifMacroFlo
isnotinuse.Forexample,ifmoreairissuppliedtoaroomthanisextracted,theexcesswillbe
assumed to be vented to outside. For a full account of the rules for airflow specification see
AppendixA.
TheschematicmayincludemultipleSystemInletandSystemOutletcomponents.Thesecanbe
usedtorepresentboththeairinletandoutletofamechanicalsystemandotherpaths,suchas
exfiltrationinthecaseofapressurizedbuilding.
Most components placed on the airside network must have appropriate controllers attached
inordertofunction.Seecomponentsectionsfordetails.
The Check network button will identify most errors in the schematic. It also numbers the
nodes of the network, providing a reference to the nodes that is useful when viewing
simulation results. To remove the node numbering, if desired, simply reopen the same
ApacheHVACfile.
DetailsofallequipmenttobeincludedinthesimulationareenteredinApacheHVAC.Theextentofdata
input depends on the scope of the simulation, which is at the discretion of the user. For instance if it is
requiredtocalculatethenetenergyconsumptionofanLTHWheatingcoil,itwillbenecessarytospecifya
coil and a heat source to serve it. However, it will not be necessary to input the characteristics of the
LTHW system. In such a case the distribution losses of the LTHW system and pump power should be
enteredaszeroandtheheatsourceefficiencytakenas100%.
Notethatthedutyofequipmentforsimulationpurposescanbesetasthecomponentsareplacedorcan
be provided by the autosizing process. It is necessary only to specify a duty that equals or exceeds any
requirementsubsequentlycalledfor.
1.4.3 68BRoomcomponents
Thereareanumberofimportantpointstonotewithregardtothearrangementofroomcomponentsin
theairsystemandthespecificationofsupplyairflowrates:
ARoomintheVEisany3Dspacethatistobemodeledasadistinctthermalzone.Thiscan
be multiple rooms combined in ModelIt as a thermal zone, a single room, or a subdivided
potion of room volume, such as a perimeter zone in an openplan space or the occupied or
stratified zone within a space served by displacement ventilation. The ApacheHVAC Room
componentcanalsorefertoaspacethatwouldnotorcouldnotbeoccupied,butwhichplays

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 15

a role in the dynamic thermal interaction with HVAC systems. Examples include a returnair
plenum,anunderfloorairdistribution(UFAD)plenum,asegmentwithinanearthtube,aspace
within a vented doubleskin faade, or even a concrete slab that will be directly heated or
cooledbyahydronicloop.
Itispermissibletousethesameroomcomponent morethanonceintheairsystemnetwork
description,suchaswhenmorethanonesystemsuppliesairtothesameroom.Forexample,
consider a case where room type A has separate air supplies for heating and cooling; there
mayonlybeoneactualroomtypeA,butwecanusetwointhesystemnetworkdescription
one in the heating branch and one in the cooling branch. The result is exactly the same as if
youhadmixedtheheatingandcoolingsupplybranchestogetherthroughacombiningjunction
andsupplied thismixedairtoasingleroomtypeA. Theuseof multipleroomcomponents in
thiswayreducestheneedforlargenumbersofmixinganddividingjunctions.
Oncethesystemairhasenteredaroomcomponent,theprogramassumesthattheairwithin
the room (or bounded thermal zone assigned to a room component) is fully mixed. It is not
possibletodifferentiatebetween,say,airenteringfromaceilingdiffuserandairenteringfrom
aperimeterunitoraflooroutlet.Youcan,ifyouwish,describeasingleroomasseveralroom
types for the purposes of the computer simulatione.g., the core and perimeter zones of an
openplanofficecouldbedescribedasseparateroomtypes.However,youshouldappreciate
that thereareanumber ofcomplex mechanisms ofheat transferinvolvedinsuchasituation
(wind, stack, and induced air movement, radiant heat exchange, etc.) and the program can
onlyapproximatelyanalyzesomeofthese.
Some situations are best modeled by putting two room components in series. For example,
youmaywishtomodelabuildinginwhichthereturnairisextractedviatheceilingvoid.This
can be achieved by describing the occupied space and the ceiling void as two separate room
typesandthenconnectingtheminseries.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 16

2 1BHVACSystemComponents
Figure21:HVACcomponentstoolbar
ApacheHVACallows18generictypesofHVACcomponentstobemodeled.
2.1.1 69BWatersideplantequipmentandwaterloops
Heatsources:hotwaterboilers,heatpumps,furnaces,electricresistanceheat,etc.
Chilledwaterloopswithanassociatechillerset,condenserloop,andcoolingtower
Chillers:electricwatercooled,aircooledtypes;othersimilarwatercoolingsources
Watersideeconomizers(asadedicatedunitoramodeforwatercooledchillersystems)
Watersourceheatpumpsfortheupgradeofheatrecoveredfromacondenserloop
Directexpansion(DX)cooling(1to1relationshipwithacoilontheairsidenetwork)
Unitarycoolingsystems(completeunitisrepresentedbyacoilontheairsidenetwork)
2.1.2 70BAirsideplantequipmentandsystemcomponents
Airsourceheatpumpscoupledtoabackupheatsource
Spraychamberhumidifiers
Steaminjectionhumidifiers
Airtoairheat/energy/enthalpyrecoverydevices
Ductworkcomponentswiththermalpropertiesformodelingheatgainorloss
Fans
Dampersetsincludingmixingdampersandcontrolledflowsplitters
Heatingcoils
Coolingcoils(simpleandadvancedmodelsforchilledwater,DX,WSE,andUCSsources)
Roomcomponents(canbeassignedanygeometricspaceinthemodel)
2.1.3 71BRoomunitszoneequipmentincludedonlywithinRoomcomponents
Directactingheater/coolers
Radiatorsandsimilarterminalheatingdevices
Chilledceilingpanels,chilledbeams,andsimilarterminalcoolingdevices
The first set of these are defined mainly in plant equipment dialogs. Components in the middle set are
dealtwithmainlyontheairsidenetwork.Thelastset,roomunits,differfromotherHVACcomponentsin
that they are defined in terms of types but then located within a room component or thermal zone
(including in nonoccupied space or a heated or cooled slab zone) rather than on the airside network.
Energyused byroomunitsisalsoaccountedforandreportedseparatelyfromairsideHVACheatingand
coolingcomponents.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 17

Dataenteredforfansrepresentsaspecialcaseinthatfansarenotcontrolleddirectlyandfancomponent
inputs are used only to calculate consequential energy consumption and effect on air temperature. The
value entered in a fan component does not determine airflow through the system. Rather, the fan
component acts like a meter with a defined set of performance characteristics. The airflow through the
fanisdeterminedbyflowcontrollersonnetworkbranches.
The modeling of plant components is quasisteadystate in that the program does not attempt to model
transient behavior between simulation time steps. However, because time steps in ApacheSim are
typicallyonly610minutes,andcanbeaslittleas1minute,ifdesired,constantplantbehavioroveratime
step is an appropriate assumption. Furthermore, there is interaction between the HVAC system and
conditionedspaces(includingnaturalventilation,whenrunningMacroFlo)ateverysimulationtimestep.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 18

2.2 15BHeatSources
ApacheHVACofferstwotypesofheatsource:apartloadcurveheatingplantmodel,whichmaybeused
torepresent aboiler,aheatpump,furnace,orsomeothertypeofheatingplant,andahotwaterboiler
model.BothmodelsareaccessedthroughtheHeatsourcestoolbariconshownbelow.Theheatsources
list in Figure 22 shows the current model type as part load curve heating plant. You can choose the
desiredmodeltypetobeaddedthroughtheTypetoadddropdownselection.
Toolbariconforheatsourceslist.
Figure22: Heatsourceslistforselecting,adding,copying,andremoving bothpartloadcurveand hot

waterboilerheatingplantmodels.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 19

2.3 16BPartLoadHeatSource
The input parameters for the part load curve heating plant model are introduced next in this section.
Informationaboutthehotwaterboilermodelisintroducedinsection2.2.
Thepartloadcurveheatingplantmodelcanprovideheattoanycomponentsthatpresentaheatingload.
These range from baseboard heaters to heating coils and including steam humidifiers and absorption
chillers(viathepartloadcurvechillerdialog).Thepartloadcurveheatingplantcanactasabackupforan
airsourceheatpumportomeetremainingloadaftertheheatavailablefromacombinedheat&power
systemorcondenserheatrecovery(fromthepartloadcurvechiller,electricaircooledchiller,orelectric
watercooledchiller)hasbeenconsumed.
The heating load collectively presented by the radiators, heating coils, etc. assigned to a particular heat
sourcearesummedateachtimesteptosettherequiredinstantaneousoutputfromtheheatingplant.An
allowanceismadeforanypipeworkdistributionlossesthatarenotaccruingtothebuildinginterior.Part
loadefficiencycharacteristicsdetermineenergyconsumptionoftheplantequipment.
The partload heating plant module can operate in conjunction with (as backup for) an airsource heat
pump. The heat pump mode is selected by placing a heat pump component on the schematic and
selectingaheatingsourcefromthelistintheheatpumpdialog.
Note: if the load on a heating source is greater than the maximum load specified in the heating plant
definition, it will supply the additional energy but the efficiency will remain at the value entered for full
load.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 20

2.3.1 72BPartloadheatsourcedefinition
Figure23:Partloadheatingplanteditingdialogshowingillustrativeinputs

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 21

2.3.1.1 Heatingsourcereference
Enteradescriptionofthecomponent.Thereferenceislimitedto100characters.Itisforyourusewhen
selecting, organizing, and referencing any component or controllers within other component and
controllerdialogsandinthecomponentbrowsertree.Thesereferencescanbevaluableinorganizingand
navigating the system and when the system model is later reused on another project or passed on to
another modeler. Reference names should thus be informative with respect to differentiating similar
equipment,components,andcontrollers.
2.3.1.2 Heatingsourcetype
ChoosefromBoiler,HeatpumporOtherheatingplant.Allthesetypesaremodeledinthesameway,
buttheirsimulationresultsappearunderdifferentvariablesinVista.
2.3.1.3 Fuel
Specifythefuelused.
2.3.1.4 DistributionLosses
Enter the losses due to heat distribution as a percentage of heating load. For example, if distribution
lossesareenteredas5%andtheheatsourceisconnectedto10radiatorspresentingatotalheatingload
of 20kW, the distribution loss of 0.05 20 kW (1kW) is added to radiator heat demand to give a fuel
consumptionof21kWtheheatingplantefficiencyatthatload.
Thelossesdonotaccruetozonesinthebuilding.
2.3.1.5 Oversizingfactor
FollowingASHRAELoadsautosizing,thefactorbywhichtheheatingplantsizeisincreasedrelativetothe
peakcalculatedvalue.
2.3.2 73BCombinedHeat,Cooling,&Power
2.3.2.1 BackupforCH(C)P?
Tick this box to indicate that loads served by this heat source will be met first by available heat from a
combined heat & power (CHP) or combined heat, cooling, and power (CHCP) system, if present one has
beendefinedwithintheCHPsectionoftheRenewablesdialogintheApacheThermalview.
2.3.2.2 CH(C)Psequenceranking
CH(C)P sequence ranking determines the sequence in which heat sources are switched in to meet any
remainingloadaftertheavailableCH(C)Pcapacityhasbeenused.Heatsourceswithlowervaluesofthis
parameter will be switched in before those with higher values (the former will normally be the most
efficient heat sources). If two heat sources have the same sequence ranking they will be switched in
simultaneously,withtheCHPinputsupplyingthesamefractionoftheheatingloadforbothsystems.
2.3.3 74BCondenserheatrecovery
CondenserheatrecoveryisincludedinbothPartloadcurveandElectricwatercooledchillermodels.The
current model makes a userspecified percentage of thermal energy rejected to the condenser loop
available to a Heat source component. This percentage represents simple heatexchanger effectiveness.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 22

The available fraction of condenser heat is then assigned (within the chiller dialog) to a receiving heat
sourcethatwillusethisrecoveredheatfirstwhenaloadispresent.
Thetemperaturefortherecoveredcondenserheatcanbeupgradedwithanelectricwatertowaterheat
pump.ThiswouldbeusedinthecasesotherthanpreheatofDHW,suchasservingwhenspaceheating
loads that require higher temperatures than normally available via a heat exchanger on the condenser
waterloop.AfuelcodeassignmentandCOPareprovidedfortheheatpump.
2.3.3.1 Usewatersourceheatpump?
Ifthewaterloopservedbytheheatingplantreceivesheatrecoveredfromachillercondenser,thisheat
maybeupgradedusingawatersourceheatpump.Specifythismodeofoperationbytickingthebox.
2.3.3.2 HeatpumpCOP
EntertheCOPofthewatersourceheatpumpthatcouplesthecondenserloopwiththehotwaterloop.
2.3.3.3 Fuel
Thefuelusedbythewatersourceheatpump.
2.3.4 75BPumppower
Enterthecirculationpumpelectricalpower.Thepumpisassumedtooperatewheneverthereisaheating
loadtobemetonthisheatsourcecircuit,irrespectiveofthesourceoftheheat(i.e.boiler,heatpumpor
recovered heat from chillers). The pump power pump is modulated by the pump usage percentages
definedinthepartloadtable.
2.3.5 76BPartloadPerformance
2.3.5.1 Load
Enteruptotenloadvaluestodefinethepartloadefficiencycharacteristic.
Important: The partload values must be entered in increasing (ascending) order from top to bottom. If
enteredinthereverseorder,onlythefirstvaluewithbeused.
2.3.5.2 Efficiency
Enter an efficiency value for each partload value. Linear interpolation is applied between the defined
points.
2.3.5.3 Pumpusage
Enter a pump usage percentage for each partload value. Linear interpolation is applied between the
definedpoints.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 23

2.4 HotWaterBoilers
Thehotwaterboilermodelcanprovideheattoanycomponentsthatpresentaheatingload.Theserange
from baseboard heaters to heating coils and even absorption chillers (via the partload curve chiller
dialog).Thehotwaterboilercanactasabackupforanairsourceheatpumportomeetremainingload
aftertheheatavailablefromacombinedheat&powersystemorcondenserheatrecovery(fromthepart
loadcurvechillerorelectricwatercooledchiller)hasbeenconsumed.
The heating load collectively presented by the radiators, heating coils, etc. assigned to a particular heat
sourcearesummedateachtimesteptosettherequiredinstantaneousoutputfromtheheatingplant.An
allowanceismadeforanypipeworkdistributionlossesthatarenotaccruingtothebuildinginterior.Part
loadefficiencycharacteristicsdetermineenergyconsumptionoftheplantequipment.
The hot water boiler module can operate in conjunction with (as backup for) an airsource heat pump.
The heat pump mode is selected by placing a heat pump component on the schematic and selecting a
heatingsourcefromthelistintheheatpumpdialog.
Themodelusesdefaultoruserdefinedboilerperformancecharacteristicsatratedconditionsalongwith
the boiler efficiency curve to determine boiler performance at design and offrated conditions, as
specifiedandsimulated,respectively.
Thehotwaterloopconfigurationisassumedtobeaprimaryonlysystem,poweredbyahotwaterpump
that can be either a variablespeed pump with VSD or a constantspeed pump riding the pump curve.
When the hot water loop is only served by hot water boiler (i.e., without an airsource heat pump or
CH(C)Palsosupplyingheattothesamehotwaterloop),thepumpisassumedtooperateinlinewiththe
boiler,subjecttotheconstraintthatthepumpwillstartcyclingbelowtheminimumflowrateitpermits.
When the boiler is sharing the hot water circuit load with other heat suppliers (airsource heat pump or
CH(C)P),thepumpoperationwillbeindependentoftheboileron/offcyclingstatus.
The hot water circuit flow rate varies in proportion to the circuit heating load (presented by the heating
coils, hot water radiators, etc. that the circuit serves), subject to the minimum flow rate the pump
permits. The design hot water pump power is calculated as the specific pump power multiplied by the
designhotwatercircuitflowrate.Itisthenmodifiedbythepumppowercurvetogettheoperatingpump
power.
Transferofhotwaterpumpheatgaintotheloopismodeledaccordingtoauserinputfractionforpump
andmotorheatgaintowaterloop.
Note: If the load on a hot water boiler or other heating source is greater than the maximum capacity
specifiedintheheatingplantdefinition,theplantmodelwillsupplytheadditionalenergy; however,the
efficiencywillremainatthevalueenteredforfullload.
Note:Asteamhumidifiercannotbeservedbyahotwaterboiler,asthehotwaterboilermodelincludes
pumping power and return water temperature, and these parameters would not be appropriate for
steam delivery. Steam humidifiers must therefore use a heat source defined via the partload curve
model.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 24

2.4.1 77BHotwaterboilerdefinition
Figure24:Hotwaterboilereditingdialog

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 25

2.4.1.1 Reference
2.4.1.2 Fuel
Enterthefueltypeusedbythehotwaterboiler.
WarningLimits(%) 0.0to20.0
ErrorLimits(%) 0.0to75.0
Enter thelossesduetoheatdistributionaroundthesystemasapercentageofboilerheat demand.The
lossesdonotaccruetospaceswithinthebuilding.
2.4.2 78BCombinedHeat,Cooling,&Power
2.4.2.1 BackupforCH(C)P?
Tick this box to indicate that loads served by this heat source will be met first by available heat from a
combined heat & power (CHP) or combined heat, cooling, and power (CHCP) system, if present one has
beendefinedwithintheCHPsectionoftheRenewablesdialogintheApacheThermalview.
2.4.2.2 CH(C)Psequenceranking
CH(C)P sequence ranking determines the sequence in which heat sources are switched in to meet any
remainingloadaftertheavailableCH(C)Pcapacityhasbeenused.Heatsourceswithlowervaluesofthis
parameter will be switched in before those with higher values (the former will normally be the most
efficient heat sources). If two heat sources have the same sequence ranking they will be switched in
simultaneously,withtheCHPinputsupplyingthesamefractionoftheheatingloadforbothsystems.
2.4.3 79BCondenserheatrecovery
CondenserheatrecoveryisincludedinbothPartloadcurveandElectricwatercooledchillermodels.The
current model makes a userspecified percentage of thermal energy rejected to the condenser loop
available to a Heat source component. This percentage represents simple heatexchanger effectiveness.
The available fraction of condenser heat is then assigned (within the chiller dialog) to a receiving heat
sourcethatwillusethisrecoveredheatfirstwhenaloadispresent.
Thetemperaturefortherecoveredcondenserheatcanbeupgradedwithanelectricwatertowaterheat
pump.ThiswouldbeusedinthecasesotherthanpreheatofDHW,suchasservingwhenspaceheating
loads that require higher temperatures than normally available via a heat exchanger on the condenser
waterloop.AfuelcodeassignmentandCOPareprovidedfortheheatpump.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 26

2.4.3.1 Usewatersourceheatpump?
Ifthewaterloopservedbytheheatingplantreceivesheatrecoveredfromachillercondenser,thisheat
maybeupgradedusingawatersourceheatpump.Specifythismodeofoperationbytickingthebox.
2.4.3.2 HeatpumpCOP
EntertheCOPofthewatersourceheatpumpthatcouplesthecondenserloopwiththehotwaterloop.
2.4.3.3 Fuel
Thefuelusedbythewatersourceheatpump.
2.4.4 80BBoilerPerformance
2.4.4.1 BoilerModelDescription
Clickingthisbuttontopopupasummaryofthehotwaterboilermodelasshownbelow:
Figure25:Hotwaterboilermodeldescription
2.4.4.2 RatedConditionisDesignCondition
Whenthisboxisticked,thedesignconditiondata(seedetailsintheDesignconditionsubtab)isaread
only copy of the current rated condition data (see details in the Rated condition subtab), including any
unsavededitsyouhavemade.
2.4.4.3 2identicalstagedboilersoperatinginparallel?
If this checkbox is ticked, two identical staged boilers will be used in the hot water loop to which this
boilerisassigned.Itisassumedthatthetwoidenticalboilersarearrangedinparallelandthatthedesign
temperature rise across each boiler is kept as T
bdes
. The design water flow rate in the main hot water
loopisthustwiceofthatdesignflowthrougheachboiler.Thedesignhotwaterpumppowerisbasedon
thedesignflowrateinthemainhotwaterloop.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 27

If this checkbox is ticked, you can also specify whether or not the boilers will share load equally when
bothboilersareon(seebelow).
2.4.4.4 Boilersshareloadequallywhenbothareon?
Thischeckboxonlydisplayswhenthe2identicalstagedboilersoperatinginparallel?checkboxisticked.
Ifthischeckboxisticked,itisassumedthattheboilersshareloadequallywhenbothboilersareon.Inthis
case, you can also specify the percentage of combined capacity at which the second boiler switches on
(seebelow).
If this checkbox is unticked, the two identical boilers are assumed to operate in strict staging, i.e., the
firstboilerwillbeloadedtoitsfullcapacity,thesecondboilerswitchesontotaketheremainingloadthe
firstboilercannotmeet.
2.4.4.5 Percentageofcombinedcapacityatwhichsecondboilerswitcheson
This textbox only displays when the 2 identical staged boilers operating in parallel? checkbox and the
Boilers share load equally when both are on? checkbox are both ticked. Usually this will be 50%
(default), which means the second boiler switches on when the first boiler cannot meet the load. If the
second boiler is designed to switch on before the first boiler is fully loaded, you can specify any
percentage value between 0% and 50%. For example, if this parameter is specified as 40%, then the
secondboilerwillswitchonwhenthefirstboileris80%loaded.Andwhenbothboilersareon,theywill
sharethelooploadequally.
2.4.4.6 BoilerEfficiencyCurve,f
Ept
(p,T
lbt
)
Theboilerefficiencycurvecurrentlyselected.UsetheSelectbuttontoselecttheappropriatecurvefrom
thesystemdatabase.
Predefinedefficiencycurves
Noncondensingboiler
Condensingboiler
Circa1975hightempboiler
Circa1983midtempboiler
Newerlowtempboiler
Thefirst,second,andlastofthepredefinedefficiencycurvesabovearethemostlikelytobeapplicable
for modern hotwater boilers. Keep in mind that these curves describe the relative performance via the
shape of the curve, whereas the user input for Efficiency at the rated condition shifts the entire curve
upordown.
UsetheEditbuttontoeditthecurveparametersifneeded.TheEditbuttonwillpopupadialogdisplaying
theformulaandparametersofthecurve,allowingthecurveparameterstobeedited.Youareallowedto
editthecurvecoefficients,inadditiontotheapplicablerangesofthecurveindependentvariables.When
editingthecurveparameters,itisimportantthatyouunderstandthemeaningofthecurveanditsusage
inthemodelalgorithm.
Also be careful that the edited curve has reasonable applicable ranges for the independent variables. A
performancecurveisonlyvalidwithinitsapplicableranges.Inthecasetheindependentvariablesareout
oftheapplicablerangesyouset,thevariablelimits(maximumorminimum)youspecifiedintheinputwill
beapplied.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 28

Figure 26: Select dialog for the hot water boiler efficiency curve (part load and water temp
dependence)

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 29

Figure 27: Edit dialog for the hot water boiler efficiency curve (part load and water temperature
dependence)
Theboilerefficiencycurve(partloadandwatertempdependence)fEpt(p,Tlbt)isabicubicfunctionof
p=partloadratio
t
lbt
=T
lbt
T
datum

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 30

Where
T
lbt
=hotwatersupply(leavingboiler)temperature
T
datum
=datumtemperature(0Cor0F),introducedfortheconvenienceofunitsconversionofthe
curvecoefficients.
And:
f
Ept
(p,T
lbt
)=(C
00
+C
10
p
+C
20
p
2
+C
30
p
3
+C
01
t
lbt
+C
02
t
lbt
2
+C
03
t
lbt
3
+C
11
p
t
lbt
+C
21
p
2
t
lbt
+C
12
pt
lbt
2
)/C
norm
where
C
00
,C
10
,C
20
,C
30
,C
01
,C
02
,C
03
,C
11
,C
21
,andC
12
arethecurvecoefficients
C
norm
isadjusted(bytheprogram)tomakef
Ept
(1,T
lbtrat
)=1
T
lbtrat
=ratedhotwatersupply(leavingboiler)temperature.
The boiler efficiency curve is evaluated for each time step during the simulation. The curve value is
multipliedbytheratedefficiency(E
rat
)togettheoperatingefficiency(E)ofthecurrenttimestep,forthe
specificpartloadratiopandT
lbt
temperature:
E=E
rat
f
Ept
(p,T
lbt
)
The curve should have a value of 1.0 when the part load ratio equals 1.0 and the T
lbt
temperature is at
ratedcondition.
Anoteontheapplicablerangeofpartloadratiop:
The minimum p is used by the program as the minimum partload ratio for continuous operation,
underwhichtheboilerstartscyclingonandoff.
Themaximumpshouldusuallybe1.0.Duringthesimulation,apartloadratiogreaterthan1.0isasign
ofboilerundersizing.
Also note that the bicubic form of the boiler efficiency curve can be used in simplified forms. For
example, to use it in a biquadratic form, simply specify C
30
, C
03
, C
21
, and C
12
to be zero. To use it in a
quadraticlinearform,simplyspecifyC
30
,C
03
,C
02
,andC
12
tobezero.
2.4.4.7 ParasiticPower,W
p
Thisistheboilerparasiticpoweratfullload.Itisautomaticallyderivedbytheprogramusingtheprovided
parasiticElectricInputRatioandtheboilerdesignheatingcapacity,anddoesnotneedtobespecified.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 31

The parasitic power represents the parasitic electric power consumed by forced draft fans, fuel pumps,
stokers,orotherelectricaldevicesassociatedwiththeboiler.Foranaturaldraftgasfiredboiler,W
p
may
be zero or close to zero. This parasitic power is consumed whenever the boiler is operating, and the
modelassumesthatthisparasiticpowerdoesnotcontributetoheatingthewater.
2.4.4.8 ParasiticElectricInputRatio,W
p
/Q
des
Enter the ratio between the boiler design parasitic power consumption and the boiler design heating
capacity.Thisisusedtoderivetheboilerdesignparasiticpowerconsumptionbytheprogram.
2.4.5 81BRatedCondition
Rated condition and Design condition are provided for your flexibility in specifying hot water boiler
data.
The rated condition is the basis for the calculation of boiler characteristics at simulation time. The rated
condition is usually the condition at which the boiler characteristics are specified by a manufacturer.
However,itcanoptionallybethedesigncondition,inwhichcasetheuserselectsRated=Design.
Thedesignconditionistheconditionapplyingatthetimeofdesignpeakboilerload(butwillbeentered
manuallyinthefirstphase).
A user wishing to use catalogue boiler data enters a capacity and efficiency at the rated condition and
readsoffthederivedcapacityandefficiencyatthedesigncondition.(Notethemodeltreatsthecapacity
as a constant, so the design capacity will always equal the rated capacity. Design efficiency may be
differentfromratedefficiencyiftheuserspecifiesadesignhotwatersupplytemperaturethatisdifferent
fromtheratedhotwatersupplytemperature.)
A user wishing to size a boiler based on a design load enters a capacity and efficiency at the rated
condition, and then adjusts the efficiency to produce the desired derived efficiency at the design
condition(allowingforamarginofoversizing).(Designcapacitywillalwaysequaltheratedcapacity.)
IftheratedconditionanddesignconditionareoneandthesametheuserticksRatedconditionisdesign
condition,whichmakesthedesignconditionadynamiccopyoftheratedcondition.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 32

Figure28:Hotwaterboilerdialogshowingratedconditionsubtab
2.4.5.1 HotWaterSupplyTemperature,T
lbtrat
Entertheratedhotwatersupplytemperature(leavingboilerwatertemperature).

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 33

2.4.5.2 HotWaterFlowRate,V
brat
,V
brat
/Q
rat
,T
brat
Enter the rated hot water flow rate. V

brat
, V
brat
/Q
rat
, andT
brat
are three different options for specifying
ratedhotwaterflowrate.CurrentlyitisspecifiedintermsofT
brat
(thedifferencebetweentheratedhot
water supply and return temperatures). The other two options (V
brat
and the ratio between rated hot
waterflowrate(V
brat
)andratedheatingcapacity(Q
rat
))areautomaticallyderivedbytheprogrambased
onthespecifiedT
brat
andcannotbeedited.
2.4.5.3 HeatingCapacity,Q
rat
Entertheratedheatingcapacity.
2.4.5.4 Boilerefficiency,E
rat
Enter the rated Boiler efficiency. The boiler efficiency (as a fraction between 0 and 1) is the efficiency
relativetothehigherheatingvalue(HHV)offuelatapartloadratioof1.0andtheratedhotwatersupply
temperature (leaving boiler). Manufacturers typically specify the efficiency of a boiler using the higher
heatingvalueofthefuel.Fortherarecasewhenamanufacturers(orparticulardataset)boilerefficiency
is based on the lower heating value (LHV) of the fuel, multiply the thermal efficiency by the lowerto
higher heating value ratio. For example, assume a fuels lower and higher heating values are
approximately 45,450 and 50,000 kJ/kg, respectively. For a manufacturers thermal efficiency rating of
0.90 (based on the LHV), the nominal thermal efficiency entered here is 0.82 (i.e. 0.9 multiplied by
45,450/50,000).

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 34

2.4.6 82BDesignCondition
Figure29:Hotwaterboilerdialogshowingdesignconditionsubtab

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 35

The design condition data in the Design Condition subtab (as described below) will be a readonly (un
editable) copy of the current rated condition data when the Rated condition is Design condition box is
ticked,includinganyunsavededitsyouhavemadeintheRatedConditionsubtab.
2.4.6.1 HotWaterSupplyTemperature,T
lbtdes
Enterthedesignhotwatersupplytemperature(leavingboilerwatertemperature).
2.4.6.2 HotWaterFlowRate,V
bdes
,V
bdes
/Q
des
,T
bdes
Enter the design hot water flow rate. V

bdes
, V
bdes
/Q
des
, and T
bdes
are three different options for
specifyingdesignhotwaterflowrate.CurrentlyitisspecifiedintermsofT
bdes
(thedifferencebetween
the design hot water supply and return temperatures). The other two options (V
bdes
and V
bdes
/Q
des
(the
ratio between design hot water flow rate (V
bdes
) and design heating capacity (Q
des
).) are automatically
derivedbytheprogrambasedonthespecifiedT
bdes
andcannotbeedited.
Note:IfthereisanairsourceheatpumporCH(C)Pplantattachedtotheboilerloop,youshouldcalculate
whatproportionofthetotalloadtheboilertakesatthepeakcondition(whichishardforthesoftwareto
determine automatically) and reduce T
bdes
by this factor. (In general, T
bdes
is the temperature rise
acrosstheboiler,notthewaterloop.)
2.4.6.3 HeatingCapacity,Q
des
Thedesignheatingcapacityisalwaysacopyofheatingcapacityatratedconditionanddoesnotneedto
beedited.
2.4.6.4 Boilerefficiency,E
des
The boiler design efficiency is automatically derived by the program using other design and rated
conditiondataprovidedanddoesnotneedtobeedited.
2.4.7 83BOperatingParameters
2.4.7.1 HotWaterSupplyTemperatureSetPointType
Threeoptionsareavailableforhotwatersupplytemperaturesetpointtype:Constant,Timed,orReset.
2.4.7.2 ConstantHotWaterSupplyTemperatureSetPoint
WhenConstantisselectedforhotwatersupplytemperaturesetpointtype,thisfieldisautomaticallyset
bytheprogramasthehotwatersupplytemperatureatdesigncondition,whichhasbeenenteredinthe
Designconditionsubtab.
2.4.7.3 TimedHotWaterSupplyTemperatureSetPointProfile
WhenTimedisselectedforhotwatersupplytemperaturesetpointtype,selecttheabsoluteprofiletobe
appliedtothehotwatersupplytemperaturesetpoint,whicharedefinedthroughtheAPProfacility(the
ProfilesDatabase).

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 36

Figure210:Hotwaterboilerdialogshowingoperatingparameterssubtab
2.4.7.4 HotWaterSupplyTemperatureResetType
When Reset is selected for hot water supply temperature set point type, select the hot water supply
temperature reset type. Currently only one option is provided: Outdoor air temperature reset. When

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 37

Outdoorairtemperatureresettypeisselected,whichisthedefault,youalsoneedtospecifythreemore
resetparameters:
Outdoordrybulbtemperaturelowlimit
Outdoordrybulbtemperaturehighlimit
Hotwatersupplytemperatureatorabovehighlimit
The fourth parameter (Hot water supply temperature at or below low limit) required by Outdoor air
temperature reset type is automatically set by the program as the hot water supply temperature at
designcondition.
2.4.7.5 OutdoorDrybulbTemperatureLowLimit
When hot water supply temperature reset type is selected as Outdoor air temperature reset, enter the
outdoordrybulbtemperaturelowlimittobeusedbythereset.
2.4.7.6 HotWaterSupplyTemperatureatorbelowLowLimit
When hot water supply temperature reset type is selected as Outdoor air temperature reset, this
parameter is automatically set by the program as the hot water supply temperature at design condition
anddoesnotneedtobespecified.
2.4.7.7 OutdoorDryBulbTemperatureHighLimit
outdoordrybulbtemperaturehighlimittobeusedbythereset.
2.4.7.8 HotWaterSupplyTemperatureatoraboveHighLimit
hotwatersupplytemperatureatorabovetheoutdoordrybulbtemperaturehighlimittobeusedbythe
reset.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 38

2.4.8 84BPumps
Figure211:Hotwaterboilerdialogshowinghotwaterpumpstab

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 39

2.4.8.1 HotWaterPumpSpecificPower
Enter the hot water pump specific power, expressed in W/(l/s) in SI units (or W/gpm in IP units). The
default value (19 W/gpm) is based on the design hot water pump specific power asspecified in ASHRAE
90.1G3.1.3.5.
Hot water pump power will be calculated on the basis of variable flow, with hot water circuit flow rate
varyinginproportiontothecircuitheatingload(assignedbytheheatingcoils,hotwaterradiators,etc.).
The design hot water circuit flow rate is calculated using the boiler design heating capacity (Q
des
), the
boilerdesignhotwatertemperaturechange
,
T
bdes
andtheinformationonboilerconfiguration(whether
2identicalstagedboilersoperatinginparallel?isselected).
Thedesignhotwaterpumppoweriscalculatedasthespecificpumppowermultipliedbythedesignhot
watercircuitflowrate.Itisthenmodifiedbythepumppowercurvetogettheoperatingpumppower.
2.4.9 85BPumpheatgaintohotwaterloop(fraction)
Enterthehotwaterpumpmotorefficiencyfactor,whichisthefractionofthemotorpowerthatendsup
in the hot water. Its value is multiplied by the hot water pump power to get the hot water pump heat
gain,whichisdeductedfromtheheatingloadoftheboiler.
2.4.9.1 HotWaterPumpPerformanceCurve,f
Pv
(v)
The hot water pump power curve currently selected. Use the Select button to select the appropriate
curve from the system database. Use the Edit button to edit the curve parameters if you like. The Edit
button will pop up a dialog displaying the formula and parameters of the curve, allowing the curve
parameters to be edited. You are allowed to edit the curve coefficients, in addition to the applicable
ranges of the curve independent variables. When editing the curve parameters, it is important that you
understandthemeaningofthecurveanditsusageinthemodelalgorithm.
beapplied.
Thehotwaterpumppowercurvef
Pv
(v)isacubicfunctionof
v=V/V
e
where
V
=pumpvolumetricflowrate.
V
e
=designpumpvolumetricflowrate.
And:
f
Pv
(v)=(C
0
+C
1
v+C
2
v
2
+C
3
v
3
)/C
norm
where
C
0
,C
1
,C
2
andC
3

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 40

C
norm
Pv
(1)=1
Thehotwaterpumppowercurveisevaluatedforeachtimestepduringthesimulation.Thecurvevalueis
multiplied by the design hot water pump power to get the operating pump power of the current time
step,forthecurrentfractionofpumpvolumetricflowrate.
Thecurveshouldhaveavalueof1.0whenthepumpvolumetricflowrateequalsdesignpumpvolumetric
flowrate(v=1.0).
Figure212:Selectdialogforthehotwaterpumppowercurve

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 41

Figure213:Editdialogforthehotwaterpumppowercurve

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 42

2.5 Airsourceheatpump
Theairsourceheatpump(ASHP)canbetheprimaryheatsourceforanyheatingcoilorradiator.
The AHSP component is placed on the airside network. As its capacity will vary with the source
temperature, a backup heat source must first be defined (see 209HFigure 22) and then assigned within the
ASHP dialog. While available ASHP capacity will be used first, coils and radiators are assigned to the hot
waterboilersorpartloadcurveheatsourcethathasbeensetasthebackup.
Toolbariconforplacementofaheatpump.
Heatpumpcomponent.
Theheatpumpshouldbeplacedattheappropriatelocationinthenetwork(typicallythefreshairinlet)to
determinethetemperatureoftheheatsource.Notethattheairsourceheatpumpdoesnotinfluencethe
temperature of air at the node to which it is connectedi.e., an infinite source of varying temperature,
such as the outdoor environment, is assumed. The source temperature determines the variation of the
COPandthemaximumoutputofthedeviceatanygivensimulationtimestep.
Figure 214: Airsource heat pump dialog with illustrative inputs provided by default for the ASHP in the
predefinedpackagedsinglezoneheatpump(04PSZHP)system.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 43

Figure215:AirsourceheatpumpperformanceassociatedwithillustrativeinputsinFig.214
Figure216:GraphicrepresentationoftheillustrativeinputsinFig.214
Figures214,15,and16aboveshowillustrativeinputsfortheASHPdialogandtherelationshipbetween
theseandtheToincludeboththechangeinperformancewithoutdoortemperatureandthereducedCOP
at part load, simulation results were used to determine that the load placed upon the ASHP after sizing
wouldbe100%at32F,withsupplementalheatfromthebackupheatsourceincreasinglyrequiredbelow
thattemperatureand,above32F,heatingloadgraduallydiminishingto40%atanoutdoortemperature
of62F.ThisinformationwasusedtodeterminethepartloadCOPcurve(dashedline)inFigure215.To
facilitateinsertionoftheautosizedcapacity(baseduponthewinterheatingdesigndayconditionsforthe
project location) in the row associated with the ARI testing condition (47 F) used to determine the
equipmentcapacityandCOP,thecurvesareintentionallytruncatedtoendat47F.
TheinputsintheASHPdialogcould beextendedto warmertemperaturesif needed.Becausethedialog
accepts just 10 rows of data, the spacing between data points would need to be somehow altered to
accommodate this. Because the model uses linear interpolation between the data points provided, and
the COP and capacity curves are both relatively flat between about 17 and 32 F, this would be the best
regionofthecurvetoberepresentedbyareduceddensityofdatapoints.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 44

2.5.1 86BHeatpumpsettings
2.5.1.1 Reference
2.5.1.2 Backupheatsource
Abackupheatsourcemustfirstbedefined(see210HFigure22)andthenassignedhere.Itisgoodpracticeto
includeaheatpumpdesignation,suchasASHP01+HWboilerbackupinthenameofthebackupheat
source, as this is what you will select in the heating coil or radiator dialog in order to connect to a
particularASHP.Notethatthroughversion6.3,theASHPcapacitywillbeusedfirst,andonlythenwillthe
remaining load be met by any recovered condenser heat from a chiller or CHP resource associated with
the backup heat source (this may change in version 6.4 in order to support modeling of VRV system s
whereinthecoolingandheatingfunctionsinmultiplezonesshareacommoncondenserloop).
2.5.1.3 MinimumSourceTemperature
Theheatpumpisassumedtoswitchoffcompletelywhenthesourcetemperaturedropsbelowthisvalue.
Abovethisvalue,theheatpumpisassumedtomeetasmuchoftheloadasitcan,withtheheatsource
beingbroughtintotopupthisdemandifrequired.
2.5.2 87BHeatpumpperformance
2.5.2.1 SourceTemperature
This line of information describes the variation in the performance of the heat pump as the source
temperaturevaries.Enterthesourcetemperature.Uptotenpointsmaybeusedtodefinethevariation
ofperformancewithsourcetemperature.Enterthepointsinascendingorderofsourcetemperature.
2.5.2.2 HeatPumpCOP
Enter the coefficient of performance of the heat pump at the corresponding source temperature. This
value is the useful heat output divided by the total fuel energy consumption associated with the
operation of this device (excluding electrical consumption of any distribution pumps included in heating
plantcomponents).
2.5.2.3 Output
Enterthemaximumheatpumpoutputatthecorrespondingsourcetemperature.Ifthedemandforheat
outputexceedsthisvaluethentheheatsourceisusedtomakeuptheextrademand.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 45

2.6 17BChilledWaterLoops,HeatRejection,andChillerSequencing
The chilled water loop tool provides access to selection, editing, and adding or removing named chilled
waterloops.Eachindividualchilledwaterloopdialogthenprovidesinputsfortofollowing:
primaryandsecondarychilledwaterloopsandoptiontousejustoneofthese
chillers and other similar cooling sources (adding, sequencing, and editing of cooling
equipmentontheprimarychilledwaterloop)
heatrejection loop (for watercooled chillers) with cooling tower and options for waterside
economizerandcondenserheatrecovery
A chilled water loop is associated with a chiller set comprising any number of chillers, which can include
anycombinationofthreedifferenttypes:
electricwatercooledchiller(useseditablepredefinedcurvesandotherstandardinputs)
electricaircooledchiller(useseditablepredefinedcurvesandotherstandardinputs)
partloadcurvechiller(flexiblegenericinputs;canrepresentanydeviceusedtocoolwatervia
amatrixofloaddependentdataforCOPandassociatedusageofpumps,heatrejectionfans,
etc.,withtheoptionofaddingCOPvaluesforuptofouroutdoorDBTorWBTconditions)
Eachchillerorsimilarpieceofwatercoolingequipmentisdefinedinthecontextofachilledwaterloop.
Thusnochillerispermittedtoservemorethanoneprimarychilledwaterloop.Chillerscanbeduplicated
usingtheCopybuttonwithinachillersetandanImportfacilityisprovidedforcopyingadefinedchiller
fromonechilledwaterlooptoanother.
An optional condenser water loop is associated with each primary chilled water loop. This includes a
cooling tower model and is required only when the chiller set includes an electric watercooled chiller.
Aircooledchillersuseonlythedesigntemperatures(DBTandWBT)forheatrejection.Heatrejectionfor
the generic partloadcurve chiller type is described by the user via any combination of COP values,
pumppower,andfanpower(alloranyofwhichcanbeincludedinacompositeCOP)inthedialogforthat
typeofequipment.
Coolingcoilsandchilledceilingsareassignedachilledwaterloopratherthanachiller.Whilethestandard
configuration uses a primaryplussecondary loop configuration, the primary loop can be eliminated by
zeroingoutitspumppowersuchthatthesystemismodeledasaprimaryonlyconfigurationusingthe
secondaryloop.
During simulation, chillers within a chiller set are switched in according to a userspecified sequence.
During autosizing, sequenced chillers and the associated heat rejection plant and water flow rates are
sized on the basis of userspecified percentages of the peak design load. When electricwatercooled
chillers are included, and thus there is an associated cooling tower, the chiller set may operate in
watersideeconomizermode.
Thechilledwaterloopcomponentisaccessedthroughthetoolbariconshownbelow.
ToolbariconforChilledwaterloops.
ClickingthistoolbariconopensuptheChilledwaterloopsdialog(showninFigure217),whichmanages
a set of chilled water loops. A chilled water loop may be added, edited, removed or copied through the
correspondingbuttonsinthisdialog.Doubleclickingonanexistingchilledwaterloop(orclickingtheEdit

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 46

buttonafterselectionofanexistingchilledwaterloop)opensuptheChilledwaterloopdialog(shownin
Figure218),wherechilledwaterloopparametersmaybeedited.
TheChilledwaterloopdialogcurrentlyhasthreetabs:
Chilledwaterlooptab:Thistabmanagesthepropertiesofthechilledwaterloop.
Heat rejection tab: This tab manages information used for heat rejection. An optional
condenser water loop for use by electric watercooled chillers and (optionally) a waterside
economizercanbedefinedinthistab.
Chillersettab:Thistabmanagesalistofchillers(achillerset),whichmaybeeditedwithchiller
dialogs(seesection2.5,2.6and2.7).Chillersequencingranksundervariablepartloadranges
arealsodefinedinthistab,togetherwithchillerautosizingcapacityweightings.
Currentlyifacondenserwaterloophasbeendefinedforachilledwaterloop,atleastoneelectricwater
cooled chiller must also be defined for the same chilled water loop. Electric watercooled chillers
belonging to the same chiller set share a common condenser water loop and cooling tower. The cooling
towermodelusedisthesameasthatusedfortheWaterSideEconomizermodel,whichisbasedonthe
Merkeltheory.
Forthecondenserwaterloop,acondenserwaterpumpisassumedtobeonthesupplysideofthecooling
tower.
Whencondenserwaterflowrateisdifferentfromtheratedcondenserwaterflowrate,anadjustmentis
made to the entering condenser water temperature used by the program to solve for the chiller
performanceintheiterationprocess.Theadjustmentismadebasedonthefollowingprinciple:
Settheeffectiveenteringcondenserwatertemperaturetothevaluewhich,forthegivenrate
of heat rejection, would produce the same condenser water leaving temperature as a chiller
operatingwiththeratedcondenserwaterflowrate.
The chilled water loop configuration is assumed to be a primary/secondary system, served by a primary
circuitchilledwaterpumpandasecondarycircuitchilledwaterpump.
Bothcondenserwaterpumpandprimarycircuitchilledwaterpumpareassumedtooperateinlinewith
the chiller. The condenser water flow rate and primary circuit chilled water flow rate are assumed to be
constant (at the design values) when the chiller is on. They are multiplied by the corresponding specific
pump power to get the condenser water pump power and the primary chilled water pump power
respectively.
The secondary circuit chilled water pump is assumed to operate in line with the chiller, subject to the
constraintthatthepumpwillstartcyclingbelowtheminimumflowrateitpermits.Requiredchilledwater
flow rates for simple cooling coils and chilled ceilings vary in proportion to their cooling loads. Required
chilledwaterflowrateforadvancedcoolingcoilsaredeterminedbythedetailedheattransfercalculation
of the advanced cooling coil model. Required chilled water flow rates from all cooling coils and chilled
ceilings served by a chilled water loop are summed to get the required secondary circuit chilled water
flowrate,subjecttotheminimumpumpflowratethepumppermits.Thedesignsecondarychilledwater
pump power is calculated as the secondary specific pump power multiplied by the design secondary
chilled water flow rate (assumed equal to design primary chilled water flow rate). It is then modified by
thesecondarycircuitpumppowercurvetogettheoperatingsecondarypumppower.
Distributionlossesfromthepipeworkareconsideredasauserspecifiedpercentageofthechilledwater
loopload.In addition, chilledwaterandcondenserwaterpump heatgainsaremodeledby pumpmotor
efficiencyfactors.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 47

Condenser heat recovery is included in the current model as a simple userspecified percentage of the
thermalenergyrejectedtothecondenserloop.Thispercentagerepresentsheatexchangereffectiveness.
Theavailablecondenserheatisthenassignedtoareceivingheatsourcethatwillusethisrecoveredheat
first when a load is present. The user has the options to upgrade the hotwater temperature for the
recovered heat on the receiving (HW loop) end with an electric watertowater heat pump for use with
typicalspaceheatingloads.
Figure 217: Chilled water loops dialog (shown with default and illustrative loops included with the pre
definedsystemsinVE6.3)

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 48

Figure 218: Chilled water loop configuration drawn with a chiller set that includes all three types of
chiller models (partloadcurve; electric watercooled; electric aircooled): only the electric water
cooledtypeiscoupletothecondenserwaterloopandcoolingtowermodel.See2.4.11PrimaryCircuit
ChilledWaterSpecificPumpPowerformodelingsystemshavingonlyaprimarychilledwaterloopno
secondaryloop.
Secondary pump
Primary pump
Chillers
Condenser
water pump
Condenser water loop
Chilled water loop
T
ect
T
let T
lct
T
edb
g
e
T
ldb
g
l
Cooling
tower
T
owb
G
L T
1
T
2
Key:
air
water
V
c
V
e
EWC 1
EWC 2
EAC 1
EAC 2
PLC 1
PLC 2
S
i
m
p
l
e

c
o
i
l
A
d
v
a
n
c
e
d

c
o
i
l
C
h
i
l
l
e
d

c
e
i
l
i
n
g

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 49

2.6.1 88BChilledwaterloopdefinition
Figure219:Chilledwaterloopeditingdialog(shownwiththeChilledwaterlooptabactive)

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 50

Figure220: ChilledwaterlooptabintheChilledwaterloopdialog(shownwithinputsforanillustrative
loopconfigurationasincludedwiththepredefinedsystemsinVE6.3)
2.6.1.1 ReferencenameforChilledWaterLoop
Enter a description of the component. It is for your use when selecting, organizing, and referencing any
componentorcontrollerswithinothercomponentandcontrollerdialogsandinthecomponentbrowser

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 51

tree. These references can be valuable in organizing and navigating the system and when the system
modelislaterreusedonanotherprojectorpassedontoanothermodeler.Referencenamesshouldthus
beinformativewithrespecttodifferentiatingsimilarequipment,components,andcontrollers.
2.6.2 89BChilledWaterLooptab
The Chiller water loop tab facilitates the definition of the chilled water temperatures and chilled water
pumps,togetherwiththedistributionlossesandoversizingfactorforthechilledwaterloop.
Enter the chilled water loop distribution lossesi.e., the loss due to distribution of cooling from the
coolingplantequipmenttopointofuseasapercentageofcoolingdemand.Thelossenteredhereisnot
recoupedinthebuilding.
2.6.2.2 OversizingFactor
This is the oversizing factor that will be used in the autosizing of this component. During autosizing the
capacitywillbesettothepeakloadmultipliedbytheoversizingfactor.
2.6.2.3 ChilledWaterSupplyTemperatureResetType
Select the chilled water supply temperature reset type. Currently two options are provided: No reset or
Outdoor air temperature reset. When Outdoor air temperature reset type is selected, which is the
default,youalsoneedtospecifyfourmoreresetparameters:
Outdoordrybulbtemperaturelowlimit
Chilledwatersupplytemperatureatorbelowlowlimit
Outdoordrybulbtemperaturehighlimit
Chilledwatersupplytemperatureatorabovehighlimit
WhenNoresetisselected,youneedonlyspecifytheconstantdesignchilledwatersupplytemperature.
2.6.2.4 ChilledWaterSupplyTemperature
Enter the design chilled water supply temperature (leaving evaporator water temperature) if the chilled
water supply temperature reset type is selected as No reset. When Chilled water supply temperature
resettypeisselectedasOutdoorairtemperaturereset,thisfieldbecomesinactive.
2.6.2.5 OutdoorDrybulbTemperatureLowLimit
WhenchilledwatersupplytemperatureresettypeisselectedasOutdoorairtemperaturereset,enterthe
outdoordrybulbtemperaturelowlimittobeusedbythereset.
2.6.2.6 ChilledWaterSupplyTemperatureatorbelowLowLimit
chilledwatersupplytemperaturetobeusedbytheresetatorbelowtheoutdoordrybulbtemperature
lowlimit.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 52

2.6.2.7 OutdoorDrybulbTemperatureHighLimit
outdoordrybulbtemperaturehighlimittobeusedbythereset.
2.6.2.8 ChilledWaterSupplyTemperatureatoraboveHighLimit
chilledwatersupplytemperaturetobeusedbytheresetatorabovetheoutdoordrybulbtemperature
highlimit.
2.6.2.9 DesignChilledWaterLoopTemperatureDifference(Tedes)
Enter the design chilled water loop temperature difference (T
edes
)i.e., the difference between the
designchilledwatersupplyandreturntemperatures.
2.6.2.10 PrimaryCircuitChilledWaterSpecificPumpPoweratRatedSpeed
Entertheprimarycircuitchilledwaterspecificpumppoweratratedspeed,expressedinW/(l/s)inSIunits
(orW/gpminIPunits).
Primarycircuitchilledwaterpumppowerwillbecalculatedonthebasisofconstantflow(whenthechiller
operates). The model will be based on a specific pump power parameter, with a default value of 4.4
W/gpm. The default value is based on the total chilled water specific pump power (22 W/gpm) as
specified in ASHRAE 90.1 G3.1.3.10 and assuming a 20:80 split between the primary and secondary
circuits.
Theprimarycircuitchilledwaterloopflowratewillbecalculatedfromthedesigncoolingcapacity(Q
des
)
andthedesignchilledwatertemperaturechange
(T
edes
)ofthechilledwaterloop.
Primaryonly vs. Primary + Secondary loop configurations: To model a primaryonly configuration with
VSDpump,ratherthan thepresetprimary+secondarychilled waterloopconfiguration (forversion6.3
through 6.4), first set the primary specific pump power to zero. Select the VSD curve for the secondary
pumpandsetthespecificpumppowerforthesecondaryloopasappropriatefortheprimarylooppump.
Thissimplyremovesthe primarypumpfromthesystemandallowsthesecondarypump toserveasthe
primarypumpwithVSDintheactualsystem.If,ontheotherhand,youweretoincludeaspecificpower
input for the primary pump and set the secondary pump specific power to zero, there would be no
opportunity to use the VSD, as the primary pump is assumed (for version 6.3 through 6.4) to run at
constantspeedwheneverthechilleroperates.
2.6.2.11 PrimaryCircuitChilledWaterPumpHeatGaintoChilledWaterLoop(fraction)
Enter the primarycircuit chilledwaterpump heatgaintochilledwaterloop,whichisthefractionofthe
motorpowerthatendsupintheChilledwater.Itsvalueismultipliedbytheprimarycircuitchilledwater
pumppowertogettheprimarycircuitchilledwaterpumpheatgain,whichisaddedtothecoolingloadof
thechilledwaterloop.
2.6.2.12 SecondaryCircuitChilledWaterSpecificPumpPoweratRatedSpeed
Enter the secondary circuit chilled water specific pump power at rated speed, expressed in W/(l/s) in SI
units (or W/gpm in IP units). The default value (17.6 W/gpm) is based on the total chilled water specific
pumppower(22W/gpm)asspecifiedinASHRAE90.1G3.1.3.10andassuminga20:80splitbetweenthe
primaryandsecondarycircuits.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 53

Secondary circuit chilled water pump power will be calculated on the basis of variable flow. Required
chilled water flow rates for simple cooling coils and chilled ceilings vary in proportion to their cooling
loads, assuming a constant operating deltaT (through the cooling coils and chilled ceilings). Required
chilledwaterflowrateforadvancedcoolingcoilsaredeterminedbythedetailedheattransfercalculation
of the advanced cooling coil model. Required chilled water flow rates from all cooling coils and chilled
ceilings served by a chilled water loop are summed to get the required secondary circuit chilled water
flowrate,subjecttotheminimumpumpflowratethepumppermits.
The design secondary circuit chilled water loop flow rate is assumed equal to the design primary circuit
chilled water loop flow rate, which is calculated from the design cooling capacity (Q
des
) and the design
chilledwatertemperaturechange
T
edes
.
The design secondary chilled water pump power is calculated as the secondary specific pump power
multiplied by the design secondary chilled water flow rate. It is then modified by the secondary circuit
pumppowercurvetogettheoperatingsecondarypumppower.
2.6.2.13 SecondaryCircuitChilledWaterPumpHeatGaintoChilledWaterLoop(fraction)
Enterthesecondarycircuitchilledwaterpumpheatgaintochilledwaterloop,whichisthefractionofthe
motor power that ends up in the Chilled water. Its value is multiplied by the secondary circuit chilled
water pump power to get the secondary circuit chilled water pump heat gain, which is added to the
coolingloadofthechilledwaterloop.
2.6.2.14 SecondaryCircuitChilledWaterPumpPowerCurve,f
Pv
(v)
Thesecondarycircuitchilledwaterpumppowercurvecurrentlyselected.UsetheSelectbuttontoselect
theappropriatecurvefromthesystemdatabase.UsetheEditbuttontoeditthecurveparametersifyou
like.TheEditbuttonwillpopupadialogdisplayingtheformulaandparametersofthecurve,allowingthe
curveparameterstobeedited.Youareallowedtoeditthecurvecoefficients,inadditiontotheapplicable
ranges of the curve independent variables. When editing the curve parameters, it is important that you
understandthemeaningofthecurveanditsusageinthemodelalgorithm.
beapplied.
Thesecondarycircuitchilledwaterpumppowercurvef
Pv
(v)isacubicfunctionof
v=V/V
e
where
V
=pumpvolumetricflowrate.
V
e
=designpumpvolumetricflowrate.
And:
f
Pv
(v)=(C
0
+C
1
v+C
2
v
2
+C
3
v
3
)/C
norm

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 54

where
C
0
,C
1
,C
2
andC
3
C
norm
Pv
(1)=1
Thesecondarycircuitchilledwaterpumppowercurveisevaluatedforeachiterationofthechilledwater
loop, for each time step during the simulation. The curve value is multiplied by the design secondary
chilledwaterpumppowertogettheoperatingsecondarypump powerofthecurrenttimestep,forthe
currentfractionofpumpvolumetricflowrate.Thecurveshould haveavalueof1.0whentheoperating
pumpvolumetricflowrateequalsratedpumpvolumetricflowrate(v=1.0).
Figure221:Editdialogforthesecondarycircuitchilledwaterpumppowercurve(values forconstant
speedpumpareshown)
2.6.3 90BHeatRejectiontab
The Heat rejection tab (Figure 222 above) facilitates the definition of the design outdoor drybulb and
wetbulbtemperaturesfortheheatrejectionandforsettingthe parametersofacondenserwaterloop.
The design conditions for heat rejection are used for all electric aircooled and watercooled chiller
modelsandassociatedcoolingtowers.Thecondenserwaterloopinthistabfunctionsforallwatercooled

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 55

chillersintheattachedchillersetandincludescondenserwatertemperatures,coolingtower,condenser
waterpump,condenserhearrecovery,andwatersideeconomizer.Thecondenserwaterloopisrequired
whenanelectricwatercooledchillermodelisincludedinthechillerset.
Figure 222: Heat rejection tab on Chilled water loop dialog (shown with inputs for an illustrative loop
configurationasincludedwiththepredefinedsystemsinVE6.3)

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 56

2.6.3.1 DesignOutdoorDrybulbTemperature
Enterthedesignoutdoordrybulbtemperature.
This parameter is autosizable. When this parameter is autosized, its value in the field and its autosizing
labelAbecomered.
2.6.3.2 DesignOutdoorWetbulbTemperature
Enter the design outdoor wetbulb temperature for the cooling tower. This parameter is autosizable.
Whenthisparameterisautosized,itsvalueinthefieldanditsautosizinglabelAbecomered.
2.6.3.3 UseCondenserWaterLoop(Watercooled)?
Whenthischeckboxisnotticked,whichisthedefault,allparametersregardingthecondenserwaterloop
are inactive. When this checkbox is ticked, all parameters regarding the condenser water loop becomes
active.Currently,ifthisboxisticked,theremustbeatleastoneElectricWatercooled(EW)chillerdefined
forthechilledwaterloop.
2.6.3.4 DesignCondenserEnteringWaterTemperature
,
T
ectdes
Enterthedesigncondenserenteringwatertemperature.
2.6.3.5 DesignCondenserWaterTemperatureDifferenceT
cdes
Enter the design condenser water temperature difference T

cdes
(the difference between the design
condenserwaterleavingandenteringtemperatures).
2.6.3.6 EnteringCondenserWaterTemperatureSetPoint
Entering condenser water temperature set point could either be set up as a constant or an absolute
profile.Notethatusingafixedenteringcondenserwatertemperaturesetpointmeansthecoolingtower
serving the condenser is controlled by the traditional way of trying to maintain a constant condenser
watersupplytemperature.Thetimedprofileoptionallowstheflexibilityofusingothercontrolstrategies
forthecoolingtower.Youmaywanttoexperimentwithacontrolstrategythat,forexample,maintainsa
constanttemperaturedifferencebetweenthecondenserwatersupplytemperatureandtheambientwet
bulbtemperature(constantapproach).
2.6.3.7 CoolingTowerDesignApproach
This is the difference between the cooling tower leaving water temperature (T
2
) and the outdoor wet
bulb temperature (t
owb
) at the design condition. The design approach of the cooling tower is
automatically derived by the program using the provided chilled water loop design data and condenser
waterpumpdata,anddoesnotneedtobespecified.
2.6.3.8 CoolingTowerDesignRange
Thisisthe difference betweenthecoolingtowerenteringwater temperature(T
1
)and the coolingtower
leaving water temperature (T
2
) at the design condition. The design range of the cooling tower is
automatically derived by the program using the provided chilled water loop design data and condenser
waterpumpdata,anddoesnotneedtobespecified.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 57

2.6.3.9 CoolingTowerDesignHeatRejection,Q
hrdes
Thisistheheatrejectionloadonthecoolingtoweratdesigncondition.Thedesignheatrejectionloadof
the cooling tower is automatically derived by the program using the provided chilled water loop design
dataandcondenserwaterpumpdata,anddoesnotneedtobespecified.
2.6.3.10 CoolingTowerFanPower,W
fan
Enterthepowerconsumptionofthecoolingtowerfanwhenrunningatfullspeed.
2.6.3.11 CoolingTowerFanElectricInputRatio,W
fan
/Q
hrdes
This is the ratio between the design fan power consumption and the design heat rejection load of the
coolingtower.Itisautomaticallyderivedbytheprogramusingtheprovidedcoolingtowerfanpowerand
thederivedcoolingtowerdesignheatrejectionload,anddoesnotneedtobespecified.
2.6.3.12 CoolingTowerFancontrol
Selectthefancontroltypeofthecoolingtower.Threetypesoffancontrolareavailable:Onespeedfan,
Twospeed fan and VSD fan. When Twospeed fan is selected, you also need to specify two more
parameters(seebelow):LowspeedfanflowfractionandLowspeedfanpowerfraction.
2.6.3.13 LowspeedFanFlowFraction
Enterthefractionofthedesignflowthatthecoolingtowerfandeliverswhenrunningatlowspeed.This
parameteronlyneedstobespecifiedwhenFancontroltypeisselectedasTwospeedfan.
2.6.3.14 LowspeedFanPowerFraction
Enterthepowerconsumedbythecoolingtowerfanwhenrunningatlowspeed,expressedasafraction
ofthecoolingtowerdesignfanpower.ThisparameteronlyneedstobespecifiedwhenFancontroltype
isselectedasTwospeedfan.Generally,thelowspeedpowerfractionwillbealesservaluethanthelow
speedflowfraction.Forexample,ifthelowspeedflowfractionwere0.50,thelowspeedpowerfraction
wouldtypically(dependingonfancurves,motorperformance,etc.)beontheorderof0.30.
2.6.3.15 CondenserWaterSpecificPumpPoweratRatedSpeed
Enter the condenser water specific pump power at rated speed, expressed in W/(l/s) in SI units (or
W/gpminIPunits).
Condenserwaterpumppowerwillbecalculatedonthebasisofconstantflow(whenthechilleroperates).
The model will be based on a specific pump power parameter, with a default value of 19 W/gpm as
specifiedinASHRAE90.1G3.1.3.11.
Thecondenserwaterloopflowratewillbecalculatedfromvaluesofcondenserwaterheatrejectionload
andcondenserwatertemperaturerangethroughthecondenseratthedesigncondition.
2.6.3.16 CondenserWaterPumpHeatGaintoCondenserWaterLoop(fraction)
Enter the condenser water pump heat gain to the condenser water loop, which is the fraction of the
pump motor power that ends up in the condenser water. Its value is multiplied by the condenser water
pumppowertogetthecondenserwaterpumpheatgain,whichisaddedtotheheatrejectionloadofthe
coolingtower.(Condenserwaterpumpisassumedtobeonthesupplysideofthecoolingtower.)

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 58

2.6.3.17 CondenserHeatRecovery(%)
Thisisthepercentageoftheheatrejectedtothecondenserwaterloopthatcanberecoveredtoaheat
source circuit. You can specify any Condenser Heat Recovery (CHR) percentage between 0% and 100%.
When the specified CHR percentage is nonzero, it is also necessary to specify the CHR Recipient (see
below),whichwill be the heatsourcecircuitthatreceivestherecoveredheat.If heatrecoveryfromthe
chillercondensercircuitisnotrequired,leavetheCHRpercentageaszeroandtheCHRRecipientwillbe
grayedout.
Theamountofheatrecoveredatanygiventimeisgivenby:
100
) (
Recovered Heat
p Q Q
c l
+
=
Where,Q
l
istheloadonthechilledwaterloop,Q
c
isthecompressorpowerandpispercentagerecovery.
2.6.3.18 CondenserHeatRecoveryRecipient
This is the heat source circuit that receives the condenser heat recovered from the chiller condenser
circuit.WhenthespecifiedCHRpercentage(seeabove)isnonzero,thisparameterisactiveandneedsto
be specified. Choices available in the dropdown list will be the heat source circuits that have been
defined in the system. If heat recovery from the chiller condenser circuit is not required, leave the CHR
percentageaszeroandtheCHRRecipientwillbegrayedout.
Ifoneheatsourcecircuitisspecifiedtobetherecipientofcondenserheatrecoveryfrommultiplechiller
condenser circuits, the condenser heat recovered from those chiller condenser circuits will be
accumulatedforthisheatsourcecircuit.
2.6.3.19 UseWatersideEconomizerWhenitcanMeettheLoadinFull?
When this checkbox is ticked, the chilled water loop will operate in waterside economizer mode if the
waterside economizer alone can cover the total chilled water loop load. Otherwise, the chillers defined
for the chilled water loop will take the loop load. When it is operating, the waterside economizer is
assumedtousethesamecondenserwaterloopparametersdefinedforthechilledwaterloop.
2.6.3.20 WatersideEconomizerHeatExchangerEffectiveness
The effectiveness of the waterside economizer heat exchanger is defined with respect to whichever
connectedwaterloophaslowerflow.
Ifthechilledwaterloopservingthecoilsloophaslowerflow,theeffectivenessis
coil
,definedby
T
1coil
=T
2coil
+
coil
(T
2
T
2coil
)
Ifthecoolingtowerloophasrelativelylowerflow,theeffectivenessis
tower
,definedby
T
1
=T
2
+
tower
(T
2coil
T
2
)
Here
T
1
isthetowerenteringwatertemperature
T
2
isthetowerleavingwatertemperature
T
1coil
isthecoilenteringwatertemperature

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 59

T
2coil
isthecoilleavingwatertemperature
coil
and
tower
are in the ratio of the flows in the coil and cooling tower loops. The heat exchange
effectivenessparameteristhusthesmallerofthesetwoeffectivenessvalues.
Figure 223: Chiller set tab in Chilled water loop dialog (showing an illustrative example of three
sequencedwatercooledchillersoftwosizes,asincludedwiththepredefinedsystemsinVE6.3).

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 60

2.6.4 91BChillerSettab
The Chiller set tab facilitates the definition of the chillers serving the chilled water loop. Chillers can be
added, edited, copied and removed from the existing chiller list (shown in the first column of the chiller
sequencing table, see below) using the corresponding buttons. Chillers can also be imported from an
existingchilledwaterloopusingtheImportbutton.
Achillersequencingtableisprovidedtosettheorderinwhichchillersareturnedonwithinanyparticular
loadrangeandtosettherelativeweightingofautosizedcapacities.Tickboxesareprovidedtoactivateup
to5loadrangesforsequencingandthecellswithwhitebackgroundcanbeeditedbydoubleclicking.The
cellscontainingchillernamesintheChillerlistcolumnprovideaccesstoeditingindividualchillers.
Note that there must be a condenser water loop defined for the chilled water loop before an electric
watercooledchillercanbeaddedorimported.
2.6.4.1 ChillerModelTypetoAdd
Selection made in this combo list determines the model type of the chiller to be added by clicking the
chillerAddbutton.Currentlythreemodeltypesareavailable:partloadcurvechiller,electricwatercooled
chillerorelectricaircooledchiller.
The chiller set can include any number of chillers or similar cooling sources defined using one of three
models,andthesetcanincludeanycombinationofthethreedifferentmodeltypes:
electricwatercooledchiller(useseditablepredefinedcurvesandotherstandardinputs)
electricaircooledchiller(useseditablepredefinedcurvesandotherstandardinputs)
partloadcurvechiller(flexiblegenericinputs;canrepresentanydeviceusedtocoolwatervia
amatrixofloaddependentdataforCOPandassociatedusageofpumps,heatrejectionfans,
etc.,withtheoptionofaddingCOPvaluesforuptofouroutdoorDBTorWBTconditions)
2.6.4.2 ChillerList
Thechillerlistcolumnliststhechillersandsimilarcoolingsourcesinthechillersetforthecurrentchilled
waterloop.Toopentheeditdialogforthatchiller,doubleclickachillernameonthelistorselectachiller
andclicktheEditbutton.
2.6.4.3 ChillerType
Thechillertypecolumnliststhetypesofthechillersdefinedforthechilledwaterloop.Thechillertypes
are determined automatically by the program depending on the chiller model type selection when the
chillersareadded.
Currently there are three chiller model types available: part load curve chiller, electric Watercooled
chiller,andelectricaircooledchiller.
2.6.4.4 PartLoadRange(upto%)
Thepartloadrange(%)valuescanbeedited,withtheexceptionoftheendvalue(100%).Partloadrange
values must always be nondecreasing from left to right. The number of part load ranges is currently
limitedtoamaximumof5.
2.6.4.5 ChillerSequenceRank
Chillersequenceranksareenteredinthebodyofthetable,foreachchillerandforeachpartloadrange.
These are integers in the range (0, 99) defining the order in which the chillers will be sequenced during

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 61

simulation.Withinaspecificpartloadrange,chillerswithlowersequencerankwillbesequencedinfirst.
Atleastonechillershouldhaveanonzerosequencingrankineverycolumn.
Whenmultiplechillersarespecifiedtohavethesamesequencerankforapartloadrange,thechillerswill
be sequenced in together in that part load range, and will share the loop load in proportion to their
designcapacities.
Within any range (except the last), if all the specified chillers are operating at maximum output, it is
automaticallymovedtothenextrange.
For version 6.3, the cooling capacity of chillers is used to determine the top end of the performance
curves (scaling the curves accordingly), but does not constrain output: any load exceeding the total
availablecapacityat100%ofthedesignsizingcoolingloadwillbemetbytheequipmentsequencedON
in the 100% column using the performance values associated with the closest available point on the
curves. In other words, the performance under a given set of conditions will be held constant as the
capacityexceedthemaximumthatwasdeterminedorsetforsizingpurposes.Inthiscontext,constrainof
capacityisdeterminedatthecoolingcoilorchilledceiling.However,insubsequentversionsthecapacity
of chillers and similar cooling sources can be constrained, such that the cooling devices served by them
canbemodeledascollectivelyfallingshortofaddressingthetotalofallcoincidentloads.Thisisusefulin
modelinglowenergysystems,suchascoolingsystemswithacoolingtowerbynochiller,designedtobe
justcapableofmeetingthefullloadunderparticulardesignconditions,butnotallanticipatedconditions.
2.6.4.6 ChillerAutosizingCapacityWeighting
Chiller autosizing capacity weighting is a column of values indicating the relative proportion of the load
that each chiller will take during autosizing. If the rightmost sequence rank is zero for any chiller, the
corresponding autosizing capacity weighting will be set automatically to zero. Any chiller with a zero
autosizingcapacityweightingwillnotbeautosized.TheDistributeas%buttonnormalizestheautosizing
capacityweightingssothattheysum to100.Whenalltheautosizingweightingsare zero theDistribute
as%buttonwillbedisabled.ItisnotobligatorytousetheDistributeas%buttonasthevalueswillbe
normalizedautomaticallywhenapplied.
2.6.4.7 ActiveSequenceColumns
Under each part load range column of the chiller sequencing table (except the 100% column), there is a
checkboxindicatingthecurrentstatusofthecolumn.Thesecheckboxescanonlybetickedintheorderof
righttoleft,anduntickedfromlefttoright.
Foranewchilledwaterloop,thefirst3checkboxes(underthe1
st
threecolumnsfromtheleft)areinitially
grayedoutandthecheckboximmediatelytotheleftoftherightmostpartloadrangecolumn(the4
th
one)
willhaveanenabledstate.
When a check box is ticked, it will populate the column immediately above it with the data from the
column to the right of it, thereby rendering the column immediately above it editable. Furthermore, a
checkboxunderacolumntotheleftofthischeckboxwillbeenabledsimultaneously.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 62

2.7 PartLoadCurveChillers
CurrentlytherearethreechillermodelsimplementedinApacheHVAC:apartloadcurvechiller,anelectric
watercooledchiller,andanelectricaircooledchiller.AllthreeareaccessedthroughtheChillersettabof
anassociatedchilledwaterloop.Whenaddingchillerstotheset,thechillermodeltypeisdeterminedby
theChillermodeltypetoaddselectionintheChillersettaboftheChilledwaterloopdialog.Thesetcan
includeanycombinationofthethreetypes.
Figure224:ChillersettabofChillerwaterloopdialogshownwithtwosequencedPartloadcurvechiller
modelsandcurrenttypetoaddsettopartloadcurve.
2.7.1 92BPartloadcurvechillerdefinition
Thepartloadcurvechillermodelusesamatrixofgenericinputsthatcanrepresentaverybroadrangeof
possible water cooling equipment. It comprises a matrix of loaddependent data for COP and associated
usage of pumps, heatrejection fans, etc., with the option of adding COP values for up to four ranges of
outdoorDBTorWBTconditions.ItalsocanbeusedtomodelaheatdrivenAbsorptionchiller.
The input parameters for the Part load curve chiller model are described in this section. The electric
watercooledandaircooledchillermodelsaredescribedinsections2.6and2.7,respectively.
Thepartloadcurvechillermodelissimilartotheanalogousheatsourcemodel,butwiththeadditionof
outdoortemperaturedependent COPs and greater detail in the description of energy use for associated
pumps, fans, and so forth. In addition, basic modeling of condenser heat recovery (CHR) via double
bundlecondensersorsimilarhasbeenprovidedbyallowingaportionoftheheatrejectedfromthechiller
tobemadeavailableforuseonadesignatedheatsourcecircuit.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 63

Figure 225: Part load curve chiller editing dialog showing an illustrative example for which the cooling
towerfanandcondenserwaterpumppowerareembeddedintheCOPvaluesforeachrangeofloadand
outdoorwetbulbtemperatureandcondenserheatrecoveryisalsoused.
Importantnotes:Allpumpand/orfanpowerenteredinthepartloadcurvechillerdialogisindependent
of the loop pump and cooling tower energy calculated according to parameters set in the associated
chilledwaterloopdialogi.e.,pumppowerandheatrejectionfanpowerenteredinthepartloadcurve
chillerdialogisinadditiontothatcalculatedbasedonsimilarparametersinthechilledwaterloopdialog.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 64

Figure 226: Part load curve chiller editing dialog showing tick box for absorption chiller and associated
selectionofadrivingheatsourceinplaceoffuelcodeorelectricity.
2.7.1.1 Reference
Enter a description of the component. It is for your use when selecting, organizing, and referencing any
componentorcontrollerswithinothercomponentandcontrollerdialogsandinthecomponentbrowser
tree. These references can be valuable in organizing and navigating the system and when the system
modelislaterreusedonanotherprojectorpassedontoanothermodeler.Referencenamesshouldthus
beinformativewithrespecttodifferentiatingsimilarequipment,components,andcontrollers.
2.7.1.2 Fuel
Theenergysourceusedbythechillercompressor.Fortheelectricchillers,thisshouldbeeitherthemore
generic Electricity source or Cooling, which is an electrical enduse designation that is mapped to
Cooling electricity in the reports for the ASHRAE 90.1 Performance Rating Method (see section 8: Pre
Defined Prototype HVAC Systems and the separate user guide for the PRM Navigator). When the
AbsorptionChiller?boxisticked,theFuelselectionwillbereplacedwithaHeatsourceselection.
2.7.1.3 AbsorptionChiller?
The part load curve chiller can be used to model an absorption chiller. To enable this option, tick the
Absorption Chiller? checkbox. The Condenser Heat Recovery (%) parameter is then removed and the
Fuelselectionisreplacedwith theabsorptionchillerHeatsourceselection.Therequiredenergyinput
totheabsorptionchillerwillbepassedasloadtothedesignatedheatsource.
2.7.1.4 Heatsource
When the Absorption Chiller? checkbox is ticked, the Fuel selection is replaced with the absorption
chiller Heat source selection. You need to select the heat source for the absorption chiller in this case.
Therequiredenergyinputtotheabsorptionchillerwillbepassedasloadtothedesignatedheatsource.
2.7.2 93BCondenserHeatRecovery
2.7.2.1 CondenserHeatRecovery(%)
Thisisthepercentageoftherejectedheatthatcanberecoveredtoaheatsourcecircuit.Youcanspecify
anyCondenserHeatRecoverypercentagebetween0%and100%.
When the specified CHR percentage is nonzero, it is also necessary to specify the CHR Recipient (see
below),whichwill be the heatsourcecircuitthatreceivestherecoveredheat.If heatrecoveryfromthe
chillercondensercircuitisnotrequired,leavetheCHRpercentageaszeroandtheCHRRecipientcombo
boxwillbereplacedwiththeAbsorptionChiller?checkbox(seebelow).

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 65

Theamountofheatrecoveredatanygiventimeisgivenby:
100
) (
Recovered Heat
p Q Q
c l
+
=
Where,Q
l
istheloadonthechiller,Q
c
isthecompressorpowerandpispercentagerecovery.
The Condenser Heat Recovery (%) parameter is hidden when the Absorption Chiller? checkbox is
ticked.Condenserheatrecoveryisnotavailablewhenmodelinganabsorptionchiller.
2.7.2.2 CondenserHeatRecoveryRecipient
This is the heat source circuit or loop that receives the recovered condenser heat. When the specified
CHRpercentageissettoanonzerovalue,thisparameterreplacestheAbsorptionChiller?checkboxand
mustthenbespecified.Thedropdownlistallowsselectionofheatsourcesorhotwaterloopsthathave
been defined in the system. If heat recovery from the condenser is not required, leave the CHR
percentagesettozero;CHRRecipientselectionwillbereplacedbytheAbsorptionChiller?checkbox.
Ifmultiplechillersreferenceoneheatsourcecircuitastherecipientofcondenserheatrecovery,theheat
recoveredfromthosechillerswillbeaccumulatedforthisheatsourcecircuitorhotwaterloop.
2.7.3 94BElectricalpowerconsumptionforpumpsandfans
2.7.3.1 ChilledWaterCirculationPumps
Enter the maximum rate of electrical consumption of the chilled water circulation pumps. These are
assumedtooperatewheneverthereisademandforchilledwaterfromthiscoolingsource.Pumppower
canbevariedwithcoolingloadbyenteringpercentagevaluesinthetableofpartloadperformancedata.
The maximum power input for chilled water pumps is a generic input that could represent any
electrical device with either constant power or power varying with cooling load; however, the energy
consumedinthiscasewithbereportedinthedistributionpumpscategory.
WarningLimits(kW) 0.0to15.0
ErrorLimits(kW) 0.0to9999.0
2.7.3.2 CondenserWaterPumps
Enterthemaximumrateofelectricalconsumptionofthecondenserwaterpumps.Theseareassumedto
operate whenever there is a demand for chilled water from this cooling source. Pump power can be
varied with cooling load by entering percentage values in the table of partload performance data. The
input for condenser water pumps could be used to represent any powered heatrejection device with
either constant power or power varying with cooling load; the energy consumed in this case with be
reportedintheheatrejectionfans/pumps.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 66

2.7.3.3 CoolingTowerFans
Enter the maximum rate of electrical consumption of the cooling tower or condenser fans. These are
assumed to operate whenever there is a demand for chilled water from this cooling source. Fan power
canbevariedwithcoolingloadbyenteringpercentagevaluesinthetableofpartloadperformancedata.
2.7.4 95BCOPTemperatureDependence
2.7.4.1 OutsidetemperatureforCOPdata
Use the dropdown selector to indicate if you will be entering temperature dependent COP values and
whetherthesewillbeassociatedwithoutdoordrybulborwetbulbtemperatures.
2.7.4.2 NumberofTemperatureDependentCOPs
UsethedropdownselectortoindicateifyouwillbeenteringCOPvaluesfor1,2,3,or4outdoordrybulb
orwetbulbtemperatures.
2.7.4.3 TemperaturesT1T4forTemperatureDependentCOPs
Enter 1 to 4 outdoor drybulb or wetbulb temperatures for which you intend to include Temperature
DependentCOPsintheperformancetablebelow.
2.7.5 96BPartloadperformancedataforchillerandauxiliaryequipment
2.7.5.1 ChillerPartLoadOutput
EnterthechilleroutputandpartloadvaluesinkWorkBtu/hasappropriate.Theoutputvaluesmustbe
enteredinascendingorder(forexample,startingwith100atthefirstortoprowandendingwith900at
thebottom)sothatallvalueswillbeused.
Up to twenty data points (rows in the data table or matrix) may be used to define the variation of
performance with partload. Enter the points in ascending order of partload. Use the Add, Insert, and
Removebuttonsatthebottomtochangethenumberofrowsinthedatatable.
2.7.5.2 ChillerWaterPumpUsage
Enterthepercentageuseofthechilledwaterdistributionpumpsthatcoincideswiththeoutputspecified
inChillerPartLoadOutput.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 67

2.7.5.3 CondenserWaterPumpUsage
Enter the percentage use of the condenser water pumps that coincides with the output specified in
ChillerPartLoadOutput.
2.7.5.4 CoolingTowerFansUsage
Enter the percentage use of the cooling tower or condenser fans which coincides with the output
specifiedinChillerPartLoadOutput.
2.7.5.5 PartloadandTemperatureDependentCOPs
Enterthecoefficientofperformanceassociatedwiththepartloadoutputvalueoneachrow.Ifyouhave
selectedoptionsaboveandenteredDBTorWBTvaluesfortemperaturedependenceoftheCOPs,enter
theCOPvaluesassociatedwitheachtemperature(T1T4)intheappropriatecolumns.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 68

2.8 ElectricWatercooledChillers
The electric watercooled chiller model simulates the performance of an electric chiller cooled by
condenserwaterfromanopencoolingtower.Themodelusesdefaultoruserdefinedchillerperformance
characteristicsatratedconditionsalongwiththreeperformancecurvesforcoolingcapacityandefficiency
todeterminechillerperformanceatoffratedconditions.
Thethreechillerperformancecurvesusedare:
Chillercoolingcapacity(watertemperaturedependence)curve
Chillerelectricinputratio(EIR)(watertempdependence)curve
Chillerelectricinputratio(EIR)(partloadandwatertemperaturedependence)curve
2.8.1 97BWatercooledchillerdefinition
2.8.1.1 Reference
Enter a description of the component. Reference names should be informative with respect to
differentiating similar equipment. It is for your use when selecting, organizing, and referencing any
equipment within other component and controller dialogs and in the component browser tree. These
references can be valuable in organizing and navigating the system and when the system model is later
reusedonanotherprojectorpassedontoanothermodeler.
2.8.1.2 Fuel
Selectthefuelorenergysourceusedbythechillercompressortodeterminethecategoryforreporting
energy consumptionresults.Forscratchbuiltsystemmodels, this shouldnormallybeset toElectricity
fortheelectricchillers.ItwillbepresettoCoolingasanenergyendusecategory(consistentwithLEED
EAcredit1submittalrequirements)whenworkingwiththepredefinedprototypeApacheHVACsystems,
as provided by the Prototype Systems Library, System Prototypes & Sizing facility, or the ASHRAE 90.1
PRMworkflownavigator.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 69

Figure227:Electricwatercooledchillerdialog
2.8.2 98BChillerPerformance
2.8.2.1 ChillerModelDescription
Clicking this button provides a summary of the electric watercooled chiller model variables as shown
below:

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 70

Figure228:Electricwatercooledchillermodeldescription
Whenthisboxisticked,theratedconditiondata(seedetailsintheRatedconditionsubtab)isareadonly
copy of the current design condition data (see details in the Design condition subtab), including any
2.8.2.3 CoolingCapacityCurve,f
CAPtt
(T
let
,T
ect
)
This field indicates the currently selected performance curve for chiller capacity as a function of leaving
evaporatortemperatureandenteringcondensertemperatureforaparticularchillerequipmenttype.Use
theSelectbuttontochoosetheappropriatecurvefromthesystemdatabase.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 71

Figure229:Electricwatercooledchillerdialogshowingdropdownselectionforcoolingcapacitycurve.
2.8.2.4 EditCoolingCapacityCurve,fCAPtt(Tlet,Tect)
The Edit button opens a dialog displaying the formula and parameters of the curve, allowing the curve
parameterstobeedited,ifneeded.However,thisisrecommendedforadvancedusersonlyandrequires
both sufficient data from a manufacturer and an appropriate tool, such as MatLab, for generating the
properfitcurvecoefficients.Formostusers,selectingarepresentativecurveforthechillertypeandthen
enteringappropriateperformancecharacteristics(COP,coolingcapacity,supplytemperature,etc.)inthe
ratedanddesignconditionstabswillbemostappropriate.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 72

Wheneditingthecurveparameters,itisimportantthatyouunderstandthemeaningofthecurveandits
usage in the model algorithm. The edited curve should have reasonable ranges for the independent
variables, as a given performance curve is only valid within its applicable ranges. If the independent
variablesareoutofthesetapplicableranges,thevariablelimits(maximumorminimum)specifiedinthe
inputdialogwillbeapplied.
Figure230:Editdialogforthecoolingcapacitycurveofelectricwatercooledchiller
Thecoolingcapacitycurvef
CAPtt
(T
let,
T
ect
)isabiquadraticfunctionof
t
let
=T
let
T
datum
t
ect
=T
ect
T
datum
where
T
ect
=enteringcondenserwatertemperature.
T
let
=chilledwatersupply(leavingevaporator)temperature.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 73

T
datum
curvecoefficients.
And:
f
CAPtt
(T
let,
T
ect
)=(C
00
+C
10
t
let
+C
20
t
let
2
+C
01
t
ect
+C
02
t
ect
2
+C
11
t
let
t
ect
)/C
norm
where
C
00
,C
10
,C
20
,C
01
,C
02
andC
11
C
norm
CAPtt
(T
letrat,
T
ectrat
)=1
T
ectrat
=ratedenteringcondenserwatertemperature.
T
letrat
=ratedchilledwatersupply(leavingevaporator)temperature.
The cooling capacity curve is evaluated at each iteration of the chiller performance, for each time step
duringthesimulation.Thecurvevalueismultipliedbytheratedcoolingcapacity(Q
rat
)togettheavailable
(fullload)coolingcapacity(Q
cap
)ofthecurrenttimestep,forthespecificT
ect
andT
let
temperatures:
Qcap=QratfCAPtt(Tlet,Tect)
Thecurveshouldhaveavalueof1.0whenthetemperaturesareatratedconditions.
2.8.2.5 EIR(WaterTempDependence)Curve,
f
EIRtt
(T
let
,T
ect
)
This field indicates the currently selected performance curve for chiller Electric Input Ratio (EIR) as a
function of leaving evaporator temperature and entering condenser temperature for a particular chiller
type.UsetheSelectbuttontochoosetheappropriatecurvefromthesystemdatabase.
2.8.2.6 EditEIR(WaterTempDependence)Curve,
f
EIRtt
(T
let
,T
ect
)

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 74

Figure231:EditdialogfortheEIR(watertemperaturedependence)curveofelectricwatercooledchiller
ThechillerEIR(watertemperaturedependence)curvef
EIRtt
(T
let,
T
ect
t
let
=T
let
T
datum
t
ect
=T
ect
T
datum
where
T
ect
T
let
T
datum
curvecoefficients.
And:
f
EIRtt
(T
let,
T
ect
)=(C
00
+C
10
t
let
+C
20
t
let
2
+C
01
t
ect
+C
02
t
ect
2
+C
11
t
let
t
ect
)/C
norm
where

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 75

C
00
,C
10
,C
20
,C
01
,C
02
andC
11
C
norm
EIRtt
(T
letrat,
T
ectrat
)=1
T
ectrat
T
letrat
The chiller EIR (water temperature dependence) curve is evaluated for each iteration of the chiller
performance,foreachtimestepduringthesimulation.ThecurvevalueismultipliedbytheratedEIR(=1/
COP
rat
, where COP
rat
is the rated coefficient of performance) to get the fullload EIR of the current time
step, for the specific T
ect
and T
let
temperatures. The curve should have a value of 1.0 when the
temperaturesareatratedconditions.
2.8.2.7 EIR(Partloadandwatertemperaturedependence)curve,
f
EIRpt
(p,T
ect
T
let
)
This field indicates the chiller Electric Input Ratio (EIR) partload dependence curve currently selected.
This is the performance curve for chiller Electric Input Ratio (EIR) as a function of partload fraction,
entering condenser temperature, and leaving evaporator temperature for a particular chiller type. Use
theSelectbuttontochoosetheappropriatecurvefromthesystemdatabase.
2.8.2.8 EditEIR(Partloadandwatertemperaturedependence)curve,
f
EIRpt
(p,T
ect
T
let
)

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 76

Figure 232: Edit dialog for the EIR (partload and water temperature dependence) curve of electric
watercooledchiller
ThechillerEIR(partloadandwatertemperaturedependence)curvef
EIRpt
(p,t)isabiquadraticfunctionof
p=Q/Q
cap
t=T
ect
T
let
where
p=partloadfraction
Q=coolingload
Q
cap
=available(fullload)coolingcapacity
T
ect
T
let

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 77

And:
f
EIRpt
(p,t)=(C
00
+C
10
p+C
20
p
2
+C
01
t+C
02
t
2
+C
11
p
t)/C
norm
where
C
00
,C
10
,C
20
,C
01
,C
02
andC
11
arethecurvecoefficients,
C
norm
EIRpt
(1
,
T
ectrat
T
letrat
)=1
T
ectrat
T
letrat
ThechillerEIR(partloadandwatertemperaturedependence)curveisevaluatedineachiterationofthe
chiller performance, for each time step during the simulation. The curve value is multiplied by the rated
EIR (= 1/ COP
rat
, where COP
rat
is the rated coefficient of performance) and the EIR (water temperature
dependence)curvevaluetogettheEIRofthecurrenttimestep,forthespecificT
ect
andT
let
temperatures
andthespecificpartloadratioatwhichthechillerisoperating:
EIR=f
EIRtt
(T
let
,T
ect
)f
EIRpt
(p,T
ect
T
let
)/(pCOP
rat
)
The curve should have a value of 1.0 when the part load ratio equals 1.0 and the temperatures are at
ratedconditions.
Theminimumpisusedbytheprogramastheminimumunloadingratio,wherethechillercapacitycanno
longerbereducedbynormalunloadingmechanismandthechillermustbefalseloadedtomeetsmaller
coolingloads.Atypicalfalseloadingstrategyishotgasbypass.Ifthisisthefalseloadingstrategyusedby
thechiller,theminimumpisthepartloadratioatwhichhotgasbypassstarts.
Themaximumpshouldusuallybe1.0.Duringthesimulation,apartloadratiogreaterthan1.0isasignof
chillerundersizing.
2.8.2.9 MinimumPartloadRatioforContinuousOperation
This is the minimum partload ratio at which the chiller can operate continuously. When the partload
ratioisbelowthispoint,thechillerwillcycleonandoff.
2.8.2.10 CompressorHeatGaintoChilledWaterLoop(fraction)
This is the fraction of compressor electric energy consumption that must be rejected by the condenser.
Heatrejectedbythechillercondenserincludestheheattransferredintheevaporatorplusaportionorall
of the compressor energy consumption. For electric chillers with hermetic compressors, all compressor
energyconsumptionisrejectedbythecondenser,sothecompressorheatgainfactorshouldbe1.0.For
chillers with semihermetic or open compressors, only a portion of the compressor energy used is
rejectedbythecondenser,sothecompressorheatgainfactorshouldbelessthan1.0.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 78

Figure 233: Electric watercooled chiller dialog showing design condition tab when Rated condition is
Designconditiontickboxisticked.Whenthisisunticked,theinputsforCoolingcapacityandCOPareno
longereditedhere,butareeditableintheRatedconditiontab.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 79

2.8.3.1 EnteringCondenserWaterTemperature
,
T
ectdes
Thedesignenteringcondenserwatertemperatureisspecifiedintheassociatedchilledwaterloopdialog
(intheHeatrejectiontab)andisdisplayedhereasaderivedparameter.
2.8.3.2 CondenserWaterFlowRate,V
c
,V
c
/Q
des
,T
cdes
V
c
, V
c
/Q
des
, and T
cdes
are three different options for specifying design condenser water flow rate.
CurrentlyitisspecifiedintermsofT
cdes
(thedifferencebetweenthedesigncondenserwaterleavingand
entering temperatures). It is specified in the associated chilled water loop dialog (in the Heat rejection
tab) and is displayed here as a derived parameter. The other two options (V
c
and V
c
/Q
des
(the ratio
between design condenser water flow rate (V
c
) and design cooling capacity (Q
des
).) are automatically
derivedbytheprogrambasedonthespecifiedT
cdes
andcannotbeedited.
2.8.3.3 ChilledWaterSupplyTemperature,T
letdes
The design chilled water supply temperature (leaving evaporator water temperature) is specified in the
associated chilled water loop dialog (in the Chilled water loop tab) and is displayed here as a derived
parameter.
2.8.3.4 ChilledWaterFlowRate,Ve,Ve/Qdes,Tedes
V
e
,V
e
/Q
des
andT
edes
arethreedifferentoptionsforspecifyingdesignchilledwaterflowrate.Currentlyit
is specified in terms of T
edes
(the difference between the design chilled water return and supply
temperatures).Itisspecifiedintheassociatedchilledwaterloopdialog(intheChilledwaterlooptab)and
is displayed here as a derived parameter. The other two options (V
e
and V
e
/Q
des
(the ratio between
design chilled water flow rate (V
e
des
).) are automatically derived by the
programbasedonthespecifiedT
edes
andcannotbeedited.
2.8.3.5 CoolingCapacity,Q
des
When Rated condition is design condition is not ticked, the design cooling capacity is automatically
derived by the program using other design and rated condition data provided and does not need to be
edited.WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisticked,enterthedesigncoolingcapacity.
labelAbecomegreen.
2.8.3.6 CoefficientofPerformance,COP
des
When Rated condition is design condition is not ticked, the design coefficient of performance is
automaticallyderivedbytheprogramusingotherdesignandratedconditiondataprovidedanddoesnot
need to be edited. When Rated condition is design condition is ticked, enter the design coefficient of
performance.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 80

RatedconditionandDesignconditionareprovidedforyourflexibilityinspecifyingchillerdata.
Theratedconditionisthebasisforthecalculationofchillercharacteristicsatsimulationtime.Therated
condition is usually the rated or ARI condition i.e. the condition at which the chiller characteristics are
specifiedbyamanufacturer.However,itcanoptionallybethedesigncondition.
ThedefaultratedconditiondataarebasedonthestandardARIconditions(ARIStandard550/5902003):
44
o
F leaving chilledwater temperature, 85
o
F entering condenser water temperature, 2.4 gpm/ton
evaporator water flow rate, 3.0 gpm/ton condenser water flow rate. Here /ton means per ton of
refrigerationdeliveredtothechilledwater.
Thedesignconditionistheconditionapplyingatthetimeofdesignpeakchillerload.
AuserwishingtousecataloguechillerdataentersacapacityandCOPattheratedconditionandreadsoff
thederivedcapacityandCOPatthedesigncondition.
A user wishing to size a chiller based on a design load enters a capacity and COP at the rated condition,
thenadjuststhecapacitytoproducethedesiredderivedcapacityatthedesigncondition(allowingfora
marginofoversizing).
If the rated condition and design condition are one and the same, the user ticks the checkbox of Rated
condition is design condition, which makes the rated condition data a dynamic copy of the design
conditiondata.
The derivations of chiller capacity and COP are done using the userentered performance curves and
otherdata.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 81

Figure 234: Electric watercooled chiller dialog showing Rated condition tab when Rated condition is
Designconditiontickboxisnotticked.ThewhitefieldsintheRatedconditiontabareeditablewhennot
setequaltothedesignconditions.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 82

2.8.4.1 EnteringCondenserWaterTemperature
,
T
ectrat
WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisticked,theratedenteringcondenserwatertemperatureisa
dynamic copy of the design entering condenser water temperature. When Rated condition is design
conditionisnotticked,entertheratedenteringcondenserwatertemperature.
2.8.4.2 CondenserWaterFlowRate,V
crat
,V
crat
/Q
rat
,T
crat
V
crat
, V
crat
/Q
rat
, and T
crat
are three different options for specifying rated condenser water flow rate.
Currently it is specified in terms of the ratio between rated condenser water flow rate (V
crat
) and rated
cooling capacity (Q
rat
). The other two options (V
crat
and T
crat
(the difference between the rated
condenserwaterleavingandenteringtemperatures))areautomaticallyderivedbytheprogrambasedon
thespecifiedV
crat
/Q
rat
andcannotbeedited.
When Rated condition is design condition is ticked, the rated condenser water flow rate is a dynamic
copy of the design condenser water flow rate. When Rated condition is design condition is not ticked,
entertheratedcondenserwaterflowrate.
letrat
WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisticked,theratedchilledwatersupplytemperature(leaving
evaporatorwatertemperature)isadynamiccopyofthedesignchilledwatersupplytemperature.When
Ratedconditionisdesignconditionisnotticked,entertheratedchilledwatersupplytemperature.
2.8.4.4 ChilledWaterFlowRate,V
erat
,V
erat
/Q
rat
,T
erat
V
erat
, V
erat
/Q
rat
, and T
erat
are three different options for specifying rated chilled water flow rate.
Currently it is specified in terms of the ratio between rated chilled water flow rate (V
erat
) and rated
cooling capacity (Q
rat
erat
and T
erat
(the difference between the rated chilled
waterreturnandsupplytemperatures))areautomaticallyderivedbytheprogrambasedonthespecified
V
erat
/Q
rat
andcannotbeedited.
WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisticked,theratedchilledwaterflowrateisadynamiccopyof
the design chilled water flow rate. When Rated condition is design condition is not ticked, enter the
ratedchilledwaterflowrate.
rat
When Rated condition is design condition is ticked, the rated cooling capacity is a dynamic copy of the
designcoolingcapacity.WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisnotticked,entertheratedcooling
capacity.
rat
When Rated condition is design condition is ticked, the rated coefficient of performance is a dynamic
copy of the design coefficient of performance. When Rated condition is design condition is not ticked,
entertheratedcoefficientofperformance.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 83

2.9 18BElectricAircooledChillers
Theelectricaircooledchillermodelsimulatestheperformanceofanelectricchillercooledbyoutdoorair.
Themodelusesdefaultoruserdefinedchillerperformancecharacteristicsatratedconditionsalongwith
three performance curves for cooling capacity and efficiency to determine chiller performance at off
ratedconditions.
Thethreechillerperformancecurvesusedare:
Chillercoolingcapacity(temperaturedependence)curve
Chillerelectricinputratio(EIR)(tempdependence)curve
Chillerelectricinputratio(EIR)(partload(andtemperature)dependence)curve
EnergyconsumptionbycondenserfansisincludedinthechillersElectricInputRatio(EIR)andassociated
performancecurves.AcondenserfanElectricInputRatio(EIR
fan
),representingtheratioofcondenserfan
power consumption to the total chiller power consumption, is used to split the energy consumption
calculatedbytheperformancecurvesintothecondenserfanpowerconsumptionandchillercompressor
energyconsumption.
2.9.1 101BWatercooledchillerdefinition
2.9.1.1 Reference
Enter a description of the component. Reference names should be informative with respect to
differentiating similar equipment. It is for your use when selecting, organizing, and referencing any
equipment within other component and controller dialogs and in the component browser tree. These
references can be valuable in organizing and navigating the system and when the system model is later
reusedonanotherprojectorpassedontoanothermodeler.
2.9.1.2 Fuel
Selectthefuelorenergysourceusedbythechillercompressortodeterminethecategoryforreporting
energy consumptionresults.Forscratchbuiltsystemmodels, this shouldnormallybeset toElectricity
fortheelectricchillers.ItwillbepresettoCoolingasanenergyendusecategory(consistentwithLEED
EAcredit1submittalrequirements)whenworkingwiththepredefinedprototypeApacheHVACsystems,
as provided by the Prototype Systems Library, System Prototypes & Sizing facility, or the ASHRAE 90.1
PRMworkflownavigator.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 84

Figure235:Electricaircooledchillerdialog

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 85

2.9.2 102BChillerPerformance
2.9.2.1 ChillerModelDescription
Clicking this button provides a summary of the electric watercooled chiller model variables as shown
below:
Figure236:Electricaircooledchillermodeldescription
Whenthisboxisticked,theratedconditiondata(seedetailsintheRatedconditionsubtab)isareadonly
copy of the current design condition data (see details in the Design condition subtab), including any
2.9.2.3 CoolingCapacityCurve,f
CAPtt
(T
let
,T
odb
)
Thisfieldindicates thecurrentlyselectedperformancecurveforchiller capacityasafunctionofleaving
evaporator water temperature and outdoor air drybulb temperature for a particular chiller equipment
type.UsetheSelectbuttontochoosetheappropriatecurvefromthesystemdatabase.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 86

Figure237:Electricaircooledchillerdialogshowingdropdownselectionforcoolingcapacitycurve.
2.9.2.4 EditCoolingCapacityCurve,f
CAPtt
(T
let
,T
odb
)

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 87

Figure238:Editdialogforthecoolingcapacitycurveofelectricaircooledchiller
Thecoolingcapacitycurvef
CAPtt
(T
let,
T
odb
t
let
=T
let
T
datum
t
odb
=T
odb
T
datum
where
T
odb
=outdoorairdrybulbtemperature.
T
let

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 88

T
datum
curvecoefficients.
And:
f
CAPtt
(T
let,
T
odb
)=(C
00
+C
10
t
let
+C
20
t
let
2
+C
01
t
odb
+C
02
t
odb
2
+C
11
t
let
t
odb
)/C
norm
where
C
00
,C
10
,C
20
,C
01
,C
02
andC
11
C
norm
CAPtt
(T
letrat,
T
odbrat
)=1
T
odbrat
=ratedoutdoorairdrybulbtemperature.
T
letrat
The cooling capacity curve is evaluated at each iteration of the chiller performance, for each time step
duringthesimulation.Thecurvevalueismultipliedbytheratedcoolingcapacity(Q
rat
)togettheavailable
(fullload)coolingcapacity(Q
cap
)ofthecurrenttimestep,forthespecificT
odb
andT
let
temperatures:
Q
cap
=Q
rat
f
CAPtt
(T
let
,T
odb
)
Thecurveshouldhaveavalueof1.0whenthetemperaturesareatratedconditions.
2.9.2.5 EIR(TempDependence)Curve,
f
EIRtt
(T
let
,T
odb
)
This field indicates the currently selected performance curve for chiller Electric Input Ratio (EIR) as a
function of leaving evaporator temperature and outdoor drybulb temperature (for condenser heat
rejection) for a particular chiller type. Use the Select button to choose the appropriate curve from the
systemdatabase.
2.9.2.6 EditEIR(TempDependence)Curve,
f
EIRtt
(T
let
,T
odb
)

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 89

Figure239:EditdialogfortheEIR(temperaturedependence)curveofelectricaircooledchiller
ThechillerEIR(temperaturedependence)curvef
EIRtt
(T
let,
T
odb
t
let
=T
let
T
datum
t
odb
=T
odb
T
datum
where
T
odb
T
let
T
datum
curvecoefficients.
And:
f
EIRtt
(T
let,
T
odb
)=(C
00
+C
10
t
let
+C
20
t
let
2
+C
01
t
odb
+C
02
t
odb
2
+C
11
t
let
t
odb
)/C
norm

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 90

where
C
00
,C
10
,C
20
,C
01
,C
02
andC
11
C
norm
EIRtt
(T
letrat,
T
odbrat
)=1
T
odbrat
T
letrat
ThechillerEIR(temperaturedependence)curveisevaluatedforeachiterationofthechillerperformance,
foreachtimestepduringthesimulation.ThecurvevalueismultipliedbytheratedEIR(=1/COP
rat
,where
COP
rat
is the rated coefficient of performance) to get the fullload EIR of the current time step, for the
specific T
odb
and T
let
temperatures. The curve should have a value of 1.0 when the temperatures are at
ratedconditions.
2.9.2.7 EIR(PartloadDependence)curve,
f
EIRpt
(p,T
odb
T
let
)
This field indicates the chiller Electric Input Ratio (EIR) partload dependence curve currently selected.
This is the performance curve for chiller Electric Input Ratio (EIR) as a function of partload fraction,
outdoor drybulb air temperature, and supply (leaving evaporator) water temperature for a particular
chillertype.UsetheSelectbuttontochoosetheappropriatecurvefromthedatabase.
2.9.2.8 EditEIR(Partloadandtemperaturedependence)curve,
f
EIRpt
(p,T
odb
T
let
)
ThechillerEIR(partloadandtemperaturedependence)curvef
EIRpt
(p,t)isabiquadraticfunctionof
p=Q/Q
cap
t=T
odb
T
let
where
p=partloadfraction
Q=coolingload
Q
cap
=available(fullload)coolingcapacity
T
odb

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 91

T
let
Figure 240: Edit dialog for the EIR (partload and temperature dependence) curve of electric aircooled
chiller
And:
f
EIRpt
(p,t)=(C
00
+C
10
p+C
20
p
2
+C
01
t+C
02
t
2
+C
11
p
t)/C
norm
where
C
00
,C
10
,C
20
,C
01
,C
02
andC
11
arethecurvecoefficients,
C
norm
EIRpt
(1
,
T
odbrat
T
letrat
)=1
T
odbrat
T
letrat

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 92

ThechillerEIR(partloadandtemperaturedependence)curveisevaluatedineachiterationofthechiller
performance,foreachtimestepduringthesimulation.ThecurvevalueismultipliedbytheratedEIR(=1/
COP
rat
, where COP
rat
is the rated coefficient of performance) and the EIR (temperature dependence)
curve value to get the EIR of the current time step, for the specific T
odb
and T
let
temperatures and the
specificpartloadratioatwhichthechillerisoperating:
EIR=fEIRtt(Tlet,Todb)fEIRpt(p,TodbTlet)/(pCOPrat)
The curve should have a value of 1.0 when the part load ratio equals 1.0 and the temperatures are at
ratedconditions.
Theminimumpisusedbytheprogramastheminimumunloadingratio,wherethechillercapacitycanno
longerbereducedbynormalunloadingmechanismandthechillermustbefalseloadedtomeetsmaller
coolingloads.Atypicalfalseloadingstrategyishotgasbypass.Ifthisisthefalseloadingstrategyusedby
thechiller,theminimumpisthepartloadratioatwhichhotgasbypassstarts.
Themaximumpshouldusuallybe1.0.Duringthesimulation,apartloadratiogreaterthan1.0isasignof
chillerundersizing.
2.9.2.9 MinimumPartloadRatioforContinuousOperation
This is the minimum partload ratio at which the chiller can operate continuously. When the partload
ratioisbelowthispoint,thechillerwillcycleonandoff.
2.9.2.10 CompressorHeatGaintoChilledWaterLoop(fraction)
This is the fraction of compressor electric energy consumption that must be rejected by the condenser.
Heatrejectedbythechillercondenserincludestheheattransferredintheevaporatorplusaportionorall
of the compressor energy consumption. For electric chillers with hermetic compressors, all compressor
energyconsumptionisrejectedbythecondenser,sothecompressorheatgainfactorshouldbe1.0.For
chillers with semihermetic or open compressors, only a portion of the compressor energy used is
rejectedbythecondenser,sothecompressorheatgainfactorshouldbelessthan1.0.
2.9.2.11 CondenserFanPower,W
fan
Enterthecondenserfanpowerconsumption.Forapplicationwithoutcondenserfans(condenserscooled
by natural convection or wind), set this parameter to zero. Note that this input is used to change the
calculated Condenser Fan EIR, the EIR value will be used to resize this input if and when the chiller
capacityischangedmanuallyorbyautosizing.
2.9.2.12 CondenserFanElectricInputRatio,EIR
fan
Thisistheratioofthecondenserfanpowerconsumptiontothetotalchillerpowerconsumption,whichis
computedfromthechillerperformancecurves.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 93

Figure 241: Electric aircooled chiller dialog showing design condition tab when Rated condition is
Designconditiontickboxisticked.Whenthisisunticked,theinputsforCoolingcapacityandCOPareno
longereditedhere,butareeditableintheRatedconditiontab.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 94

2.9.3.1 Outdoorairdrybulbtemperature
,
T
odbdes
Thedesignoutdoorairdrybulbtemperatureisspecifiedintheassociatedchilledwaterloopdialog(inthe
Heatrejectiontab)andisdisplayedhereasaderivedparameter.
labelAbecomegreen.
letdes
The design chilled water supply temperature (leaving evaporator water temperature) is specified in the
associated chilled water loop dialog (in the Chilled water loop tab) and is displayed here as a derived
parameter.
e
,V
e
/Q
des
,T
edes
V
e
,V
e
/Q
des
andT
edes
arethreedifferentoptionsforspecifyingdesignchilledwaterflowrate.Currentlyit
is specified in terms of T
edes
(the difference between the design chilled water return and supply
temperatures).Itisspecifiedintheassociatedchilledwaterloopdialog(intheChilledwaterlooptab)and
is displayed here as a derived parameter. The other two options (V
e
and V
e
/Q
des
(the ratio between
design chilled water flow rate (V
e
des
).) are automatically derived by the
programbasedonthespecifiedT
edes
andcannotbeedited.
des
When Rated condition is design condition is not ticked, the design cooling capacity is automatically
derived by the program using other design and rated condition data provided and does not need to be
edited.
WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisticked,enterthedesigncoolingcapacity.
labelAbecomegreen.
des
When Rated condition is design condition is not ticked, the design coefficient of performance is
automaticallyderivedbytheprogramusingotherdesignandratedconditiondataprovidedanddoesnot
needtobeedited.
WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisticked,enterthedesigncoefficientofperformance.
RatedconditionandDesignconditionareprovidedforflexibilityinspecifyingchillerdata.
Theratedconditionisthebasisforthecalculationofchillercharacteristicsatsimulationtime.Therated
condition is usually the rated or ARI condition i.e. the condition at which the chiller characteristics are
specifiedbyamanufacturer.However,itcanoptionallybethedesigncondition.
ThedefaultratedconditiondataarebasedonthestandardARIconditions(ARIStandard550/5902003):
44
o
Fleavingchilledwatertemperature,95
o
Foutdoorairdrybulbtemperature,2.4gpm/tonevaporator
waterflowrate.Here/tonmeanspertonofrefrigerationdeliveredtothechilledwater.
Thedesigncondition,ontheotherhand,istheconditionapplyingatthetimeofdesignpeakchillerload.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 95

Figure242:ElectricaircooledchillerdialogshowingRatedconditiontabwhenRatedconditionisDesign
condition tick box is not ticked. The white fields in the Rated condition tab are editable when not set
equaltothedesignconditions.
AuserwishingtousecataloguechillerdataentersacapacityandCOPattheratedconditionandreadsoff
thederivedcapacityandCOPatthedesigncondition.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 96

A user wishing to size a chiller based on a design load enters a capacity and COP at the rated condition,
thenadjuststhecapacitytoproducethedesiredderivedcapacityatthedesigncondition(allowingfora
marginofoversizing).
If the rated condition and design condition are one and the same, the user ticks the checkbox of Rated
condition is design condition, which makes the rated condition data a dynamic copy of the design
conditiondata.
The derivations of chiller capacity and COP are done using the userentered performance curves and
otherdata.
2.9.4.1 Outdoorairdrybulbtemperature
,
T
odbrat
When Rated condition is design condition is ticked, the rated outdoor air dry bulb temperature is a
dynamiccopyofthedesignoutdoorairdrybulbtemperature.
When Rated condition is design condition is not ticked, enter the rated outdoor air dry bulb
temperature.
letrat
WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisticked,theratedchilledwatersupplytemperature(leaving
evaporatorwatertemperature)isadynamiccopyofthedesignchilledwatersupplytemperature.
When Rated condition is design condition is not ticked, enter the rated chilled water supply
temperature.
erat
,V
erat
/Q
rat
,T
erat
V
erat
, V
erat
/Q
rat
, and T
erat
are three different options for specifying rated chilled water flow rate.
Currently it is specified in terms of the ratio between rated chilled water flow rate (V
erat
) and rated
cooling capacity (Q
rat
erat
and T
erat
(the difference between the rated chilled
waterreturnandsupplytemperatures))areautomaticallyderivedbytheprogrambasedonthespecified
V
erat
/Q
rat
andcannotbeedited.
WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisticked,theratedchilledwaterflowrateisadynamiccopyof
thedesignchilledwaterflowrate.
WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisnotticked,entertheratedchilledwaterflowrate.
rat
When Rated condition is design condition is ticked, the rated cooling capacity is a dynamic copy of the
designcoolingcapacity.
WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisnotticked,entertheratedcoolingcapacity.
rat
When Rated condition is design condition is ticked, the rated coefficient of performance is a dynamic
copyofthedesigncoefficientofperformance.
WhenRatedconditionisdesignconditionisnotticked,entertheratedcoefficientofperformance.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 97

2.10 DedicatedWatersideEconomizers(types)
ToolbariconforWatersideEconomizers(types)list.
This facility allows you to define the characteristics of one or more dedicated waterside economizers
directlycoupledtoasinglecoolingcoil.Thistypeofwatersideeconomizer(WSE)canbeassociatedwitha
backupchillerandispresentlylimitedtorunningonlywhenitcanmeettheloadinfull.
ThisdedicatedWSEisdistinctfromandcompletelyindependentoftheWSEmodeavailableontheHeat
rejectiontabforwatercooledchillersorchillersetsaccessedintheChilledwaterloopsdialog.
The waterside economizer consists of a chilled water loop serving the cooling coil, and a cooling tower
linkedtothechilledwaterloopviaaheatexchanger(seediagram).Thereisapumpinthecoolingtower
water loop and a twospeed fan in the cooling tower. The cooling supplied by the cooling tower is
controlledbycyclingthefanbetweentheoff,lowspeedandfullspeedsettings.
The waterside economizer operates when it can meet the coil cooling load in full (the parameter
controllingthisaspectofoperationiscurrentlyforcedtotrue).Whenthewatersideeconomizerisunable
to the meet the coil load in full it will redirect the cooling load to the backup chiller, if one is specified.
Otherwise,nocoolingoccurs.
The capacity of the cooling coil will be limited by the capacity of the waterside economizer. A further
capacitylimitationmaybeplacedonthecoolingcoilusingthecoolingcoilsMaximumDutyparameter.
The waterside economizers (WSE) entities defined here are types, rather than instances. When a single
WSEtypeisassignedtomanycoolingcoils,anadditionalinstanceoftheWSEiscreatedforeachcooling
coiltowhichthetypeisassigned.Inthisrespect,watersideeconomizersdifferfromchillers.
Asofversion6.1,awatersideeconomizertypecanreadilybesettoduplicatethecoolingtowerdefinedin
a selected backup watercooled chiller. When the cooling tower as WSE can no longer meet the entire
loadpresentedbythecoil,thefullloadonthecoilwillbepassedtothebackupwatercooledchiller,with
the chiller then using the same tower model and performance parameters for condenser heat rejection.
The WSE performance will be consistent with that of the tower used for chiller heat rejection so longas
there is only one coil assigned to that WSE type. If additional coils are assigned to the same WSE type,
thesecanstillshareasinglebackupchiller,buttheeffectwillbeasthoughadditionalcopiesofthesame
coolingtowerareavailable(oneforeachcoil)solongastheloadonanyparticularcoilcanbemetbyan
instanceoftheWSE.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 98

Figure243:DedicatedWatersideEconomizers(types)list

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 99

2.10.1 105BWatersideeconomizersettingsdialog
Figure244:DedicatedWatersideeconomizer(types)editingdialog.

VE6.3 ApacheHVAC 100

Figure245:Watersideeconomizerconfiguration
2.10.1.1 Reference
2.10.1.2 Designcoolingtowerapproach
The difference between the cooling tower leaving water temperature (T
2
) and the outside wet bulb
temperature(t
owb
)atthedesigncondition.
2.10.1.3 Designcoolingtowerrange
Thedifferencebetweenthecoolingtowerenteringwatertemperature(T
1
)andthecoolingtowerleaving
watertemperature(T
2
)atthedesigncondition.
2.10.1.4 Designoutsidewetbulbtemperature
Theoutsidewetbulbtemperatureatthedesigncondition.
2.10.1.5 Designcoolingtowerload
Theloadonthecoolingtower(andcoolingcoil)atthedesigncondition.Thisisusedtosizethewaterflow
ratesinthesystem.Appropriatesizingisessentialforaccuraterepresentationofthecoolingtower.
Cooling tower
Heat exchanger
Cooling coil
T
1

T
2

T
2coil

T
1coil

t
edb
t
ldb

G
L
t
owb

water
air
Key:

g
e

g
l

m
coil


2.10.1.6 Heatexchangereffectiveness
The effectiveness of the heat exchanger. This is defined with respect to the water loop with the lower
flow.
Ifthecoilloophasthelowerflow,theeffectivenessis
coil
,definedby
T
1coil
=T
2coil
+
coil
(T
2
T
2coil
)
Ifthetowerloophasthelowerflow,theeffectivenessis
tower
,definedby
T
1
=T
2
+
tower
(T
2coil
T
2
)
Here
T
1
isthetowerenteringwatertemperature
T
2
isthetowerleavingwatertemperature
T
1coil
isthecoilenteringwatertemperature
T
2coil
isthecoilleavingwatertemperature
coil
and
tower
are in the ratio of the flows in the coil and tower loops. The heat exchange effectiveness
parameteristhusthesmallerofthesetwoeffectivenesses.
2.10.1.7 CoolingcoildesignwaterdeltaT
Thedifferencebetween thecooling coilleavingand enteringwatertemperatures(T
coil2
andT
coil1
)at the
designcondition.This,togetherwiththedesigncoolingtowerload,isusedtosizethecoolingcoilwater
flow.
2.10.1.8 Coolingtowerdesignfanpower
Thepowerconsumptionofthecoolingtowerfanwhenrunningatfullspeed.
2.10.1.9 Lowspeedfanflowfraction
Thefractionofthedesignflowthatthecoolingtowerfandeliverswhenrunningatlowspeed.
2.10.1.10 Lowspeedfanpowerfraction
Thepowerconsumedbythecoolingtowerfanwhenrunningatlowspeed,expressedasafractionofthe
coolingtowerdesignfanpower.
2.10.1.11 Designpumppower
Thedesignpowerconsumptionofthecoolingtowerpump.Thepumpoperateswhenthesystemdelivers
cooling.


2.10.1.12 Economizeroperatesonlywhenitcanmeettheloadinfull?
Whenthisboxistickedtheeconomizerisswitchedoffifitcannotmeetthecoilloadinfull.Thissettingis
currentlyforcedtotrue.
2.10.1.13 Backupchiller
Usethissettingtospecifyachillerprovidingbackuptothewatersideeconomizer.Iftheeconomizerhas
switchedoffbecauseitcannotmeetthefullload,andnobackupchillerisspecified,nocoolingoccurs.
2.11 19BDXCooling(types)
ToolbariconforDXCooling(types)list.
ThisfacilitysupportsdefiningtheperformancecharacteristicsofoneormoreDXcoolingsources.
Theentitiesdefinedherearetypes.AsingleDXcoolingtypemaybeassignedtomanycoolingcoils.Atthe
timeofsimulationinstanceofthetypeisautomaticallycreatedforeachcoolingcoiltowhichthetypeis
assigned.InthisrespectDXcoolingcomponentsdifferfromchillers.
The DX cooling model simulates the refrigerant side of a DX cooling system. The DX cooling airside (the
coolingcoilorevaporator)ismodeledwiththecurrent(simple)ApacheHVACcoolingcoilmodel,usingthe
total available DX cooling capacity calculated by the DX cooling model. This model uses default or user
defined DX cooling performance characteristics at rated conditions and three performance curves to
determineDXcoolingperformanceatoffratedconditions.
ThethreeDXcoolingperformancecurvesare:
DXcoolingcapacity(temperaturedependence)curve
DXcoolingelectricinputratio(EIR)(tempdependence)curve
DXcoolingelectricinputratio(EIR)(partloaddependence)curve


Figure246:DXCoolingeditdialog
The DX cooling model includes the compressor and outdoor (condenser) fan power and thus energy
consumption.Ifthecondensertypeissettobeevaporativelycooled,theDXCoolingmodelalsoaccounts
forspraypumppowerandenergyconsumption.Itdoesnotincludetheindoor(supply)fanpower.Supply
fansforDXcoolingsystemsmustbemodeledseparatelyusingtheApacheHVACfancomponent.
TheDXcoolingmodelcoversbothaircooledandevaporativecooledcondensers.Energyconsumptionby
condenser fans (and spray pumps if evaporativecooled) is included in the DX units Electric Input Ratio


(EIR) and associated performance curves. A condenser fan (and spray pump) Electric Input Ratio
(EIR
fan/pump
), representing the ratio of condenser fan power consumption to the total DX unit power
consumption,isusedtosplitthecalculatedenergyconsumptionintoseparateresultsforcompressorvs.
condenserfan(andspraypump).
AstheDXCoolingisaType,eachconnectedcoilgeneratesanothercopyoftheselectedtypeatthetime
ofsimulation.Ifthe boxisticked(asit isbydefault)toallowthe coilcapacity tooverridetheRatedand
Design cooling capacity of the Type, the performance curves are scaled for each instance such that the
Rated/Design capacity in the type will be set equal to the user set or autosized value in the coil dialog.
Therefore, the key bits of information in the Types dialog are really the curve selection and the COP
values, as the capacity is essentially scalable. This is particularly desirable when using a number of
autosizedcoils.


2.12 20BUnitaryCoolingSystems(types)
ToolbariconforUnitaryCoolingSystems(types)list.
Thisfacilitysupportsdefiningthecharacteristicsofoneormoreunitaryairconditioningsystems.
The entities defined here are types, rather than instances. A single unitary cooling system type may be
assigned to many cooling coils, and an instance of the component is automatically created for each
coolingcoiltowhichthetypeisassigned.Inthisrespectunitarycoolingsystemsdifferfromchillers.
Figure247:Unitarycoolingsystem(types)list


Figure248:Unitarycoolingsystem(types)editingdialog.
The unitary cooling system is a unitary split vapor compression cycle cooling system serving one zone. It
consists of an outdoor aircooled condensing unit, a compressor and an indoor evaporator coil. On the
outdoorsidethereisaheatrejectionfanandontheindoorsideasupplyfan,whichisdownstreamofthe
evaporatorcoil.Thesystemdoesnotincorporateafreshairsupplyanditdoesnotprovideheating.
Ontheschematicaunitarycoolingsystemshouldbesetupbyplacingacoolingcoilinaloopcirculating
airthrougharoomandassigningasuitableunitarycoolingsystemtypetothecoolingcoil.Thesupplyfan
will then be placed automatically in the duct following the cooling coil, but it is not shown on the
schematic.
Intheintendedmodeofoperationthecompressorandbothfanscycletomaintainthedesiredroomset
point. While the system is on it delivers cooling at a rate determined by the outside air dry bulb
temperature and the condition of the air entering the evaporator coil. This control regime should be set
upinApacheHVACbysettinganunattainablylowtemperaturesetpointforthecoolingcoil(forexample
0C)andmodulatingthecoilairflowonaproportionalbandinresponsetoroomtemperature.Theairflow
throughthecoilwillthenbeatimeaverage,whichisachievedintherealsystembyon/offcycling.
Other control regimes are possible, but deviation from the intended mode of operation may invalidate
theperformancemaponwhichthealgorithmdepends.


ThedefaultdataforthiscomponentistakenfromASHRAE1402004[1],whichspecifiesaseriesoftests
forbuildingenergysimulationprograms.ThedatausedisfromTable26dofthestandard,wherethedata
isexpressedinIPunits.
2.12.1.1 Reference
2.12.1.2 Compressorfuelcode
Thefuelusedbythecompressor.ThiswillnormallybeElectricity,butotherfuels,suchasMiscellaneous
A,maysometimesbeappropriate.
2.12.1.3 Airflowrate
The flow rate through the evaporator coil under design conditions. The flow through the coil during
simulationmustbenogreaterthanthis.Whenitisless,theflowreductionisassumedtobeachievedon
atimeaveragebycyclingthefanoperation.
2.12.1.4 Scaleperformanceparameterswithdesignairflowrate?
If this box is ticked any change to the design airflow rate will cause all the performance parameters
expressed in power units to be scaled in proportion. This allows the performance of a similar unit of a
differentsizetobemodeledtoagoodapproximation.
2.12.2 106BUnitaryCoolingSystemPerformanceData
This data defines a performance map describing the performance of the system under varying external
andoncoilconditions.Thevaluesmaybeeditedinthetable,andthenumberofrowsandcolumnsmay
beeditedusingtheAddandRemovebuttons.
2.12.2.1 ODB
Valuesofoutsidedrybulbtemperature
2.12.2.2 EWB
Values of evaporator coil entering (thermodynamic) wet bulb temperature at which the system
performanceisspecified.
2.12.2.3 Enteringdrybulbtemperature
Valuesofevaporatorcoilenteringdrybulbtemperatureatwhichthesystemperformanceisspecified.
2.12.2.4 GrossTotalCapacity
The total (sensible plus latent) cooling output of the evaporator coil when the system is operating at
capacity (that is, at design supply airflow) under conditions when the evaporator coil is wet. This is
referredtoasgrosstotalcapacitybecauseitisoffsetbythesupplyairfangain.Thisvaluedoesnotapply


whentheevaporatorcoilisdry,andinthiscasethegrosssensiblecapacityisequaltothegrosssensible
capacity.Adrycoilisindicatedbythefigureforgrosssensiblecapacitybeinggreaterthanthefigurefor
gross total capacity. In general, interpolation of the performance map is required to determine whether
thecoiliswetordry.Thisinterpolationisdoneautomaticallybythesimulationalgorithm.
2.12.2.5 GrossSensibleCapacity
Thesensiblecoolingoutputoftheevaporatorcoilwhenthesystemisoperatingatcapacity(designsupply
airflow).Aswithgrosstotalcapacity,thetermgrossisappliedbecausethecoolingeffectisoffsetbythe
supplyairfangain.
2.12.2.6 CompressorPower
Thepowerrequiredtodrivethecompressorwhenthesystemisoperatingatcapacity.
2.12.2.7 Useextrapolation?
If this box is ticked, which is the recommended setting, the program will extrapolate the performance
parameters gross total capacity, gross sensible capacity and compressor power when the operating
condition lies outside the bounds of the performance map. The extrapolation is applied using data from
the cell of the performance map that lies closest to the operating condition. If the box is not ticked the
performanceparametersaresettothoseatthenearestpointoftheperformancemap.
2.12.2.8 Heatrejectionfanpower
Thepowerconsumptionoftheoutdoorheatrejectionfan.Thisisaccountedforassystemelectricity.
2.12.2.9 Supplyfanpower
Thepowerconsumptionoftheindoorsupplyairfan.Alltheheatfromthesupplyfanisassumedtoenter
theairstream.Thisisaccountedforassystemelectricity.
2.12.2.10 LowloadCOPrdegradationfactor
At part load, when the supply fan is cycling, there is a degradation of system efficiency. This is modeled
usingadegradationfactorappliedtotherefrigerationcoefficientofperformance,COP
r
,definedby
COP
r
=(grosstotalcoilload)/(compressorpower)
Atpartload,COPrisreducedbyaloaddependentmultiplicativeCOP
r
degradationfactor,CDF:
COP
r
=COP
rfull
*CDF
whereCOP
rfull
isthevalueofCOP
r
atfullload(foragivenoutsideandoncoilcondition).
CDFisassumedtobealinearfunctionofpartloadratio,PLR:
CDF=CDF
0
+(1CDF
0
)*PLR
wherePLRisdefinedas
PLR=(grosstotalcoilload)/(grosstotalcoilcapacity)


and CDF
0
is a dimensionless constant with a value in the range (0,1) the low load COPr degradation
factor.
The COP
r
degradation factor also has an effect on fan power consumption and supply air fan gain. This
effect is modeled by assuming that the COP
r
degradation is due to a startup period preceding each
operational period, during which the evaporator coil attains its equilibrium value and effectively
contributesnothingtocooling.Duringthisstartupperiodthecompressor,andboththesupplyandheat
rejectionfans,areassumedtobeon.


2.13 HeatingCoils
Toolbariconforplacementofaheatingcoil.
Heatingcoilcomponent.
2.13.1.1 Reference
Figure249:Heatingcoildialog
2.13.1.2 HeatSource
Eachheatingcoilspecifiedinthenetworkmustbeconnectedtoaheatsourcefromtheheatsourceslist.
2.13.1.3 MaximumDuty
Enter the maximum duty of the heater coils. The program will limit the output from the coil to this
maximum capacity, even if the controls are calling for more. In cases where there is no proportional
control,theoutputwillbesettothisvaluewhenevertheon/offcontrolofthecoilison.


2.14 21BCoolingCoils
Toolbariconforplacementofacoolingcoil.
Coolingcoilcomponent.
2.14.1 107BBackground
ApacheHVAC provides two levels of cooling coil models for use in HVAC systems. A Simple cooling coil
modelusesasimplifiedapproachtodeterminingcoilheattransfercharacteristicsandassumesconstant
watersidetemperaturechangethroughthecoil.AnAdvancedmodelmoreexplicitlymodelsbothairside
and waterside heat transfer providing a more detailed and accurate calculation of coil heat transfer and
corresponding airside/waterside properties. This includes modeling the coil in for dry (sensible), wet
(latent),and partialdry/wetconditions.TheAdvancedmodelprovidesthenecessarymodelingdetailto
support explicit waterside modeling contained in Chilled Water Loop configurations. The Advanced
modelalsoprovidesmoredetailedcoilspecificationmethodssothatcoilsmaybebettersizedorselected
from manufacturer data for specific HVAC system configurations. This facilitates more accurate
determinationcoildesignandoffdesignperformance.
Both Simple and Advanced cooling coil models are accessed through the cooling coil icon tool bar icon
andthecoolingcoildialog.AHVACsystemconfigurationcancontainbothSimpleandAdvancedmodes,
however,multiplexedsystemsmustonlycontainmodelsofthesametype(i.e.,allSimpleORallAdvanced
models).
Simple models can be served by Chilled Water Loops, Unitary cooling systems, Waterside economizers,
andDXcoolingsystems.AdvancedmodelscanonlybeservedbyChilledWaterLoopssystems.
2.14.2 108BSimpleModel
TheSimplemodelisthedefaultcoolingcoilmodel.TheSimplemodelonlyrequiresatmostthreeinput
valuestosetthecoilperformance:Contactfactor,Coolingcapacity,andOversizingfactor.TheSimpleis
recommendedearlyinthedesignprocesswhendetailedcoildataorperformanceisnotrequired.
2.14.3 109BAdvancedModel
The Advanced model is more detailed and accurate characterization of the heat transfer process of a
cooling coil. The Advanced model uses more detailed coil design parameter specification and enhanced
heattransfermodelingcapability.OneofthefeaturesoftheAdvancedmodelistheabilitytodesign(i.e.,
size) the cooling coil for the specific HVAC system application. In this context, size refers to
determining the coil heat transfer characteristics at a design point. With these design point
characteristics, the cooling coil can then be more accurately modeled at both design and offdesign
operatingconditions.Toprovideuserflexibilitytwosizingmethods(modes)areavailable:Autosizingand
Manual.
In the first mode, Autosizing, the user specifies the coil Contact factor (similar to the Simple model) and
then may invoke the System Sizing process to determine the remaining airside parameters necessary to


sizethecoil.Inthesecondmode,Manualsizing,theuserspecifiesbothairside/watersideconditions(and
thecoilContactfactorisdeterminedfromtheseparameters).Notethatforbothsizingmodes,although
coilcontactfactorisspecificordeterminedatthedesignpoint,inthesimulationcontactfactorwillvary
ascoiloperatingconditionschange.Thisabilitytomodelcoiloffdesignperformanceisakeyfeatureof
theAdvancedcoilmodel.Moredetailsonthetwosizingmodesisprovidedbelow.
An Advanced model dialog facilitates the two design sizing approaches by immediately sizing the
coolingcoilforthecurrentstateofdesignsizinginputs.Typicaldefaultcoildesignvaluesareprovidedfor
both Autosizing and Manual modes. Editing a design parameter will automatically and instantly resize
thecoil,andthenewsizingparametersimmediatelydisplayed.ASizingstatusmessageboxindicatesthe
state of the sizing process including error conditions resulting from outofrange or inconsistent input
parameters.
For each sizing mode, there are a set of derived parameters that are calculated upon user edit of any
design parameter. For example, in Autosize mode the user sets (or can rely on System Sizing data) the
entering airflow, entering air dry and wetbulb temperatures, the leaving dry bulb temperature, and
contact factor. The resulting leaving air wetbulb temperature, chilled water loop flow, and cooling
capacityareinstantlycalculatedanddisplayed.If,forexample,theresultingcoolingcapacityistoolow,
theusermightincreasetheairmassflowormodifythecontactfactortoachievegreatercooling.
InManualmode,theuserhasfullcapabilitytosetallthedesignparametersontheairsideandwaterside
of the coil. From these design parameters, the resulting coil contact factor, chilled water flow rate, and
cooling capacity are calculated and displayed. Again, if for example, the cooling capacity is too low, the
usermightinputahigherairmassflow.
Switching between the two design sizing modes is simply done by selecting the desired sizing mode
button. The default dialogue mode is to only show the design parameter set for the selected mode,
however, the user can display both modes data by specifying the Display mode to both. Finally, the
usercanholdautosizedvalueswhentheyswitchtoManualmode.
2.14.4 110BAutosizingMode
The Autosizing mode is designed to give the ease of specifying a single cooling coil design parameter
coupledwiththeSystemSizingfeaturetocompletetherequireddesigninputsfortheAdvancedcoil.In
Autosizingmode,theusersetsthecoilContactfactor,theninvokestheSystemSizingprocesstopopulate
the remainder of the airside parameters. These parameters, combined with the input Contact factor,
complete the design point specification for the cooling coil. In addition, prior to or after System Sizing
datahasbeenobtained,theusermayalsochangeanyoftheautosizedparameters(orContactfactor)at
anypointtosetanewcoildesignpoint.
2.14.5 111BManualMode
IncontrasttoAutosizingmode,Manualsizingmodeallowstheusertoinputallthenecessaryairsideand
watersideconditionsthatsetthecoolingcoildesignpoint.Manualmodehastwobasicapproaches.One
is to allow input of a manufacturer specified (i.e., catalogue) cooling coil. In this case, the cooling coil
usedintheHVACsystemmodelwillcorrespondtoanactualphysicalcoil.NotetheManualsizingdesign
parameters correspond to those typically found in manufacturer data sheets to facilitate this
specification. The second approach is to allow the user to design their own cooling coil in order to
understandtheimpactofthedesignparametersontheoverallsystem.Withtheinteractivefunctionality
oftheAdvancedmodeldialog,thisinformationisgivenimmediatelytotheuser.


2.14.6 112BCoolingCoilDialogs
Therearetwocoolingcoildialogs,eachspecifictothetypeofcoilmodeldesired.TheSimplecoilmodel
is the default when selecting a cooling coil from the toolbar. The Simple coil model dialogs are shown
belowcorrespondingtothetypesofsystemsthatservethecoil.
Figure250:Simplecoolingcoilmodeldialogwithcoilservedbychilledwaterloop
Figure 251: Simple cooling coil dialog with coil served by a dedicated waterside economizer (this is
distinctfromtheWSEmodeavailable forchillersetsincludingwatercooledchillerson achilledwater
loop)


Figure252:Simplecoolingcoildialog(coilservedbyDXcooling)
Figure253:Simplecoolingcoilmodeldialog(coilservedbyunitarycoolingsystem)
TheusermayselecttheAdvancedcoilmodelfromtheSimplemodeldialog.Onceselected,theAdvanced
model dialog will open automatically upon selecting the particular coil. The Advanced model dialog is
shownbelowforbothAutosizingandManualsizingmodes.


Figure254:Advancedmodelcoolingcoildialog:Autosizingmode(notethatthedisplayformatsettingat
thebottomofthedialogallowsforbothmodestobeshownatonce,ifdesired).


Figure255:Advancedmodelcoolingcoildialog:Manualsizingmode(notethatthedisplayformatsetting
atthebottomofthedialogallowsforbothmodestobeshownatonce,ifdesired).
TheupperportionofboththeSimpleandAdvancedmodeldialogscontaininformationforspecifyingthe
reference name, coil model type, and system type serving the coil. The lower section of the dialog
contains the Design sizing parameters appropriate for each model type. Detailed descriptions of these
parametersareprovidedbelow.
2.14.6.1 Reference
Enteradescriptionofthecomponent.


2.14.6.2 CoilModeltype
CoilmodeltypemaybeeitherSimpleorAdvanced.
2.14.6.3 Systemtype
Selectasystemservingthecoilfromthoseavailableonthelist.
2.14.6.4 Systemname
SelectadefinedsystemoftheSystemtypespecified.
2.14.7 113BDesignSizingParametersforSimpleCoilModel
2.14.7.1 CoilContactFactor(ifcoilservedbyChilledWaterLoop,Watersideeconomizer,orDX)
DefaultValue 0.91CWL,0.85DX
TypicalValues 0.70to0.95
ErrorLimits 0.01to1.0
Thecontactfactorisusedtodescribethewayairflowsoverthecoil,andisusedtocalculatethebalance
of sensible to latent heat removal of the air passing over the coil. The contact factor specifies what
proportion of the total airflow is contacted by the coil and so follows an ideal psychrometric process of
cooling along a constant moisture content line until the saturation curve is met, and then following the
saturation line. The balance of the airflow is assumed to be unaffected by the cooling coil but is then
mixedwiththecooledairuponleavingthecoil.
Typicalvaluesofcontactfactorareintherange0.70.95.Foragivenflowrate,highercontactfactorswill
tend to be associated with coils that either have more rowsof fins or a larger face area, and thus lower
facevelocity.Ahighercontactfactorhastheadvantageofachievingthedesiredleavingairtemperature
(LAT) with relatively warmer water from the chiller. As the contact factor is reduced, the required coil
temperature, and thus also water temperature, is lower, which has implications for chiller operating
efficiency and chilledwater reset controls. On the other hand, a low contact factor also has the same
effectasintentionallybypassingsomeoftheairaroundthecoilsothatthecoolingcoilcanbeoperatedat
averylowtemperatureformaximumdehumidification,andthenmixingthebypassfractionwiththevery
dryairoffthecoiltogetafinalLAT.Whilethebypassairisobviouslyalsomorehumid,thenetresultwill
be a lower leaving wetbulb temperature (WBT) for the same drybulb LATi.e., greater wetbulb
depression. This can be readily seen in ApacheHVAC system simulation results for higher and lower
coolingcoilcontactfactorsinahumidclimate.
2.14.7.2 Coolingcapacity(ifcoilservedbyChilledwaterloop,watersideeconomizer,orDX)
DefaultValues 200.00kW 682.43kBTU/h

TypicalRange 0.50to250.00kW 1.71to853.04kBTU/h
ErrorLimits 0.05to1000.00kW 0.17to3412.14kBTU/h
Enter the maximum duty of the cooling coils. The simulation will limit the output from the coil to this
maximum capacity, even if the controls are calling for more. In cases where there is no proportional
control,theoutputdevicewillbesettothisvaluewhenevertheon/offcontrolofthecoilison.


2.14.7.3 Oversizingfactor(allsystemtypes)
Specifythefactorbywhichthecoolingcoilcapacityisincreasedrelativetothepeakcalculatedvalue.
DefaultValues 1.15
TypicalRange 1.00to1.50
2.14.7.4 Unitarysystem(ifcoilservedbyunitarycoolingsystem)
When a unitary cooling system model is assigned to the cooling coil, this model includes a supply fan
downstream of the cooling coil that is not shown on the schematic. The parameters of this fan are
definedinthepropertiesoftheunitarycoolingsystem.SeeUnitaryCoolingSystemssection.
2.14.8 114BDesignSizingParametersforAdvancedCoilModel
2.14.8.1 Sizingstatus
TheSizingstatusmessageboxprovidesinformationonthestateofthecoilsizingprocess.Thisincludes
error messages for outofrange or inconsistent design parameters. A summary of the Sizing status
messagesisprovidedbelow.
CoolingCoilAdvancedModel
SizingStatusSummary
SizingMode
Autosizing Manual
Status Comment Status Comment
ReadyforAutosizing
Requiredinputvalues
havebeenentered.
ReadyforManualSizing
Requiredinputvalueshave
beenentered.
Autosizingcomplete
Coilhasbeensizedusing
autosizedparameters.
Calculationsuccessful
Coilhasbeensizedwithinput
values.
NotPossible:
EnteringWBTtoo
low
EnteringairWB
temperatureistoolow
forthecorresponding
enteringDBtemperature
NotPossible:Entering
WBTtoolow
EnteringairWBtemperature
istoolowforthe
correspondingenteringDB
temperature
NotPossible:Leaving
WBTtoolow
LeavingairWBtemperatureis
toolowforthecorresponding
leavingDBtemperature
NotPossible:
EnteringWBT>
EnteringDBT
EnteringairWB
temperatureisgreater
thantheenteringairDB
temperature
WBT>EnteringDBT
EnteringairWBtemperature
isgreaterthantheenteringair
DBtemperature
NotPossible:Leaving
WBT>LeavingDBT
LeavingairWBtemperatureis
greaterthantheleavingairDB
temperature


NotPossible:
EnteringDBT<
LeavingCWL
temperature
EnteringairDB
temperaturemustbe
lowerthantheleaving
ChilledWaterLoop
temperature
DBT<LeavingCWL
temperature
EnteringairDBtemperature
mustbelowerthanthe
leavingChilledWaterLoop
temperature
NotPossible:
LeavingDBT<
EnteringCWL
temperature
LeavingairDB
temperaturemustbe
lowerthantheentering
ChilledWaterLoop
temperature
NotPossible:Leaving
DBT<EnteringCWL
temperature
LeavingairDBtemperature
mustbelowerthanthe
enteringChilledWaterLoop
temperature
NotPossible:
Conditionsnot
consistentwith
inputContact
factor
Theinputairside
conditionswillnotyield
acoolingprocess
consistentwiththeinput
Contactfactor.
NotPossible:
Conditionsnot
feasibleforcooling
onlyprocess
Theinputairsideconditions
arenotfeasibleforacooling
onlyprocess,i.e.,theexiting
airwouldhavetobeheatedto
reachthedesiredcombination
ofDBT/WBT.
2.14.8.2 Airflowrate
Air flow rate is the volumetric air flow entering the coil. Air flow rate must be specified in both
Autosizing/Manualmodes.InAutozingmode,peakairflowratecanbedeterminedbytheSystemSizing
process. When an autosized air flow rate is displayed, the value will be indicated in green with a A.
However, air flow rate still be edited from the autosized values (the value will return to black with
corresponding A). Note that this air flow rate is only used in for determining the coil heat transfer
parameters and not used by any flow controllers associated with the HVAC system on which the coil
resides.
DefaultValues 9438.95l/s 20000.00CFM

TypicalRange 94.39to14158.42l/s 200to30000CFM
ErrorLimits 0.00to474500.00l/s 0.00to1,000,000.00CFM
2.14.8.3 Enteringairdry(DB)andwetbulb(WB)temperatures
Entering air dry (DB) and wetbulb (WB) temperatures are the air stream conditions entering the coil.
ThesetemperaturesmustbespecifiedinbothAutosizing/Manualmodes.InAutozingmode,peakdesign
values for these temperatures can be determined by the System Sizing process. When autosized
temperaturesaredisplayed,thevaluewillbeindicatedingreenwithaA.However,thetemperatures
canstillbeeditedfromtheautosizedvalues(thevalueswillreturntoblackwithcorrespondingA).
DefaultValues 26.67C 80.00F

TypicalRange 15.00to50.00C 60.00to120.00F
ErrorLimits 0.00to100.00C 32.00to212.00F
2.14.8.4 Leavingairdry(DB)andwetbulb(WB)temperatures
Leavingairdry(DB)andwetbulb(WB)temperaturesaretheconditionsoftheairsteamexitingthecoil.
Leaving air DB temperature must be specified in both Autosizing/Manual modes. In Autosizing mode,
required leaving air DB temperature to meet the system load can be determined by the System Sizing
process. When an autosized temperature is displayed, the value will be indicated in green with a A.


However, the temperature can still be edited from the autosized values (the values will return to black
withcorrespondingA).
In Autosize mode, the leaving air WB temperature is calculated from other entered parameters (i..e.,
Contactfactor)andnoneditable.InManualmode,leavingairWBtemperaturemustbespecified.

2.14.8.5 CoilContactFactor
The coil Contact factor is as described in Section 2.10.3.5. In Autosizing mode, Contact factor is a user
input. In Manual mode, Contact factor is calculated from the specified airside parameters. In Manual
mode, if the user specifies a set of airside parameters that require a process not achievable by cooling
alone (i.e., reheat would be needed to achieve the air leaving conditions), the Contact factor will
indicatedasNotFeasible.
DefaultValue 0.91
TypicalValues 0.70to0.95
2.14.8.6 Chilledwaterloopsupplytemperature
Chilled water loop supply temperature is the design chilled water temperature entering the coil. In
Autosizemode,thisvalueislinkedtothecorrespondingChilledwaterloopsupplytemperature(seeCWL
section xxx) serving the coil and noneditable. In Manual mode, this value is editable, however, the
editedvalueislocaltothecoolingcoilanddoesnotaffectthecorrespondingChilledwaterloopspecified
value.

2.14.8.7 Chilledwaterloopdeltatemperature
Chilledwaterloopsupplydeltatemperatureisthedesignchilledwatertemperaturerisethroughthecoil.
In Autosize mode, this value is linked to the corresponding Chilled water loop delta temperature (see
Chilled Water Loop section 2.4.10) serving the coil and noneditable. In Manual mode, this value is
editable, however, the edited value is local to the cooling coil and does not affect the corresponding
Chilledwaterloopspecifiedvalue.
DefaultValues 6.67K 12.00F

TypicalRange 4.00to8.00K 8.00to14.00F
ErrorLimits 0.00to16.67K 0.00to30.00F
2.14.8.8 Chilledwaterloopflowrate
Chilledwaterloopflowrateisthedesignchilledwaterflowrateservingthecoil.Thisvalueiscalculated
from the other coil design sizing parameters. Note that this value is adjusted by the Oversizing factor
specified. In the simulation, the necessary chilled water flow rate is determined by the coil model to


meettherelevantcontrolrequirements.However,thesimulationwilllimitthechilledwaterflowrateto
thecoilatthisvalueeveniftheassociatedcontrolrequirementsaregreater.
2.14.8.9 Coolingcapacity
Cooling capacity is the design heat transfer capacity of the coil. This value is calculated from the other
coildesignsizingparameters.NotethatthisvalueisadjustedbytheOversizingfactorspecified.
2.14.8.10 Oversizingfactor
The factor by which the coil design values chilled water flow rate and cooling capacity are increased
relativetotheautosizedvalues.Airsideparameters(flowrate,enteringairDBtemperature,enteringair
WBtemperature,leavingairDBtemperature,andleavingairWBtemperature)areNOTadjustedby the
oversizingfactor.
Thecoildesignheattransferwiththeoversizingfactoris:
coII,dcs
= m
aIr,dcs
(h
aIr,cntcr
- h
aIr,Icavc
) 0veisizing factoi
= m
watcr,dcs
c
p,watcr,dcs
T
chIIIcd watcr Ioop,dcs
TheoversizingfactorisonlypertinenttotheAutosizingmodetoallowtheusertooversizethecoilfrom
anautosizeddesignvalues.FortheManualsizingmode,nooversizingfactorisnecessarysincethecoil
designparameterscanbesetdirectlytoconsideradditionalcapacityifdesired.
DefaultValues 1.15
TypicalRange 1.00to1.50
2.14.8.11 HoldAutosizingParameters?
The Hold autosizing parameters? tick box is provided so that if switching between Autosizing and
Manualsizingmodes,thecurrentsetofautosizedvalueswillbeheld.


2.14.8.12 AdvancedModelDesignParametersSummary
TheAdvancedmodeldesignparametersforAutosizeandManualsizingmodesaresummarizedbelow.
CoolingCoilAdvancedModel
DesignParametersSummary
CoilDesign
Parameter
SizingMode
Autosizing Manual
Status Comment Status Comment
Airflowrate
AutosizedValue
Editable
Editablebefore/after
SystemSizing
UserInput
Editable
EnteringairDB
temperature
AutosizedValue
Editable
Editablebefore/after
SystemSizing
Dialoguewillcheck
forerrorsand
consistency
UserInput
Editable
Dialoguewillcheckfor
errorsandconsistency
EnteringairWB
temperature
AutosizedValue
Editable
UserInput
Editable
LeavingairDB
temperature
AutosizedValue
Editable
UserInput
Editable
LeavingairWB
temperature
DerivedValue
NonEditable
UserInput
Editable
Contactfactor
UserInput
Editable
Dialoguewillcheck
forerrorsand
consistency
DerivedValue
Noneditable
Chilledwatersupply
temperature
FromCWL
NonEditable
UserInput
Editable
Editablebuteditsare
limitedtothecoilmodel
only,i.e.,donotalterthe
CWLvaluesenteredinthe
CWLdialog.Dialoguewill
checkforerrorsand
consistency
Chilledwaterloop
deltaT
FromCWL
NonEditable
UserInput
Editable
Chilledwaterflow
rate
DerivedValue
NonEditable
DerivedValue
NonEditable
Coolingcapacity
DerivedValue
NonEditable
DerivedValue
NonEditable
Oversizingfactor
UserInput
Editable
UserInput
Editable
Holdautosizing
parameters?
UserSelected
Autosizedparameters
willbeheldasthe
userswitches
betweenAutosizeand
Manualsizingmodes.
NotApplicable


2.15 22BSprayChamber
The spray chamber is assumed to follow an adiabatic saturation process with fixed efficiency. The
efficiency defines the ratio between the actual moisture takeup of the air relative to the maximum
possible(i.e.fromoncoilairconditiontothesaturatedconditionatthesameenthalpy).Thiscanalsobe
thought of as saturation effectiveness, or how close the unit is able to come to providing fully saturated
air.
Toolbariconforplacementofaspraychamber.
Spraychambercomponent.
Notethatsprayhumidifierseitherrunwildorareoff,i.e.itisnotpossibletocontrolmoistureinputoroff
coilconditions.
2.15.1 115BReference
Figure256:Spraychamberdialog
2.15.2 116BSprayEfficiency
Thespraychamberisassumedtofollowanadiabaticsaturationprocess.Theefficiencydefinestheratio
betweentheactualmoisturetakeupoftheairpassingthroughtheunitrelativetothemaximumpossible
(i.e.,fromonairconditiontothesaturatedconditionatthesameenthalpy).


2.15.3 117BCirculationPumpElectricalPower
Thespraydeviceitselfwillconsumeenergy,aswellasaffectingtheaircondition.Forexample,thespray
chambermaywellhaveacirculatingpump,whosepowerconsumptionshouldbespecified.Thispumpis
assumedtobeoperatingwhenthehumidifierisoperating.


2.16 SteamHumidifiers
Steam humidifiers may receive heat input either from a remote heat source or by local electric heating.
Condensationin the downstreamductmaybe preventedbyspecifyinga maximumdownstreamrelative
humidity.
Toolbariconforplacementofasteamhumidifier.
Steamhumidifiercomponent.
2.16.1.1 Reference
Figure257:Steamhumidifierdialog
2.16.1.2 MaximumOutput
Enterthemaximumrateofmoistureinputfromthesteamhumidifierstotheairstream.
WarningLimits(kg/s) 0.005to1.0
ErrorLimits(kg/s) 0.001to5.0


2.16.1.3 TotalEfficiency
Enterthetotalefficiencyofthesteamhumidifiers.Thisparameterisusedtorelatethetotalheatinputto
theairstreamtotheenergyusedtogeneratethatinput(i.e.itisusedtotaketheenergyinputtotheair
streambacktoaprimaryenergyconsumption.)
2.16.1.4 MaximumRelativeHumidity
In actual applications, steam injection is normally limited to avoid the risk of condensation in the
downstreamduct.ThisRHhighlimitcutoutvalueshouldbeenteredhere.
2.16.1.5 SteamHumidifierHeatSource
A steam humidifier may be supplied with steam from a heat source. If this is the case then enter the
referenceoftheheatsource.Ifyoudonotselectaheatsourcethehumidifieruseslocalelectricheating.
2.17 23BHeatRecoveryDevices
In order to enable a range of different device types to be modeled, a fairly simple representation of the
heat recovery process has been used. This describes the sensible and latent heat recovery potential in
termsofdeviceeffectiveness(seeASHRAEhandbookfordefinitionandtypicalvalues).
Heat recovery devices can be controlled only as a function of exiting drybulb temperature. In other
words, the 'variable being controlled' must be drybulb temperature. For either enthalpy recovery or
modelingofadesiccantdriedbyaheatsource,seethesectiononLatentHeatEffectivenessbelow.Inthe
latter case, a heating coil is required to properly model the drying of the desiccant, and thus the
undesirabletransferofsensibleheatinthedirectionoppositetothelatentheat.
Itisimportantalsotonotealsothatthisistheonecomponentthathastwodownstreamnodesthatcan
becontrolled:oneatthetopandoneatthebottomofthecomponent.However,youmustpickjustone
ofthesetwoairstreamsforthecontrolpoint.
Ifyourequiretheheatrecoverydevicetobefullon,controlthedownstreamnodeofthesupplysidetoa
high temperature by entering an unachievable high target temperature, such as 100, in the value for
maximumcontrolsignal.Ifyouintendtorecovercoolthfromanexhaustairstream,itisgenerallybest
to do so by controlling the leaving exhaust air exit node to an unachievable high target, such that heat
transferperformancewillbelimitedonlybytheeffectivenessparameters.
Toolbariconforplacementofheatrecovery.
Heatrecovery


2.17.1.1 Reference
Figure258:Heatrecoverydialog
2.17.1.2 SensibleHeatEffectiveness
Enterthesensibleheateffectiveness.
2.17.1.3 LatentHeatEffectiveness
Enterthelatentheateffectiveness.Notethatanegativelatenteffectivenessispermitted,butshouldbe
usedonlyinthecaseofmodelingadesiccantthatisbeingactivelydriedorregenerated,thusallowing
latentenergytobetransferredinanuphilldirection.
WarningLimits(%) 60to90.0
2.17.1.4 ElectricalPowerConsumedWhenOperating
Enter the electrical power consumed when operating. This might be the pump power for a runaround
coil,themotorpowerforathermalwheel,etc.


2.18 Fans
The fan module is used to determine the required fan power at a given flow rate, and thus energy
consumptionofthefan,andtoaccountforthetemperatureriseintheairstream.
Toolbariconforplacementofleftandrightintakefans.
Leftandrightintakefancomponents.
The fan component does not actively influence the flow rate; the values entered here do not determine
airflow through the system. Rather, these values are used solely to calculate the consequential energy
consumptionandeffectonairtemperatureatagivenflowrate.
Pressure,inthiscase,referstothetotalstaticpressure(internalplusexternal)tobeovercomebythefan.
Efficiencyincludesboththemechanicalefficiencyofthefanandtheelectricalefficiencyofthemotorand
associated power electronics (e.g., a variablespeed drive). For variablevolume systems, the flow,
pressure,andefficiencycharacteristicsneedtobedefinedatmultiplepointsonthefancurve.
Figure259:FandialogwithillustrativeinputsforanASHRAE90.1baselinefan


Thecombinationofflow,pressure,andefficiencyisusedduringthesimulationtocalculatetheelectrical
powerconsumptionandfanheatinputtotheairstreamasfollows:
Efficiency 1000
Pressure Flow
Power

=
Where
Flowisairflowinkg/s
Pressure is the pressure resistance against which the fan has to work in Pa at Flowtypically
between50and200Paforlocalfansandbetween500and2000Paforductedfans.
istheairdensity
Efficiencyisthetotal(mechanical+electrical)fanefficiency
Energyloss=Electricalpower(1Efficiency)
Fanheatpickup=Electricalpower(1Efficiency)Airstreamheatpickup%
Where
Poweriselectricityconsumptionascalculatedinthefirstfanequation,above.
Efficiencyistotalcombinedefficiencyatagivenflowrateforboththefanandmotor.
Airstreamheatpickupisthefractionoftotalfanandmotorlossesthatgointotheairstream.
Itisimportanttorealizethatthefancurvedatamustaccountforthesystemlayout(totalpressure)and
the type of airflow and fan controls. For example, the same fan would performance depending on
whether it is controlled by a downstream damper or by variablespeed drive. In the system with speed
control,thepressureeitherwilldropwithfloworwillbemaintainedataconstantvalueasthebasisfor
fan speed control (in either case, power and heat will fall with flow); whereas the dampercontrolled
systemwillhaveroughlyconstantspeed,andthereforethepressuremustriseasflowisreduced.
2.18.1.1 Reference
Efficiency Total
Pressure Total Rate Flow Volume
n Consumptio Energy Electrical

=


2.18.1.2 AirstreamHeatPickup
Depending on whether the fan motor is in the airstream or not, there will be a greater or smaller heat
pickupbytheairacrossthefan.Forfanswhosemotorislocatedintheairstream,afigureof100%should
beused.Forfanswherethemotorisnotlocatedintheairstream,thiswillbelessthan100%.
2.18.1.3 Flow
Enterthefanflowrate.Uptofivepointsmaybedefinedonthefancharacteristiccurve.
WarningLimits(l/s) 0.0to25000.0
ErrorLimits(l/s) 0.0to900000.0
2.18.1.4 Pressure
Enterthetotalfanstaticpressureatthisflowrate,includingbothinternalpressure(resultingfromfilters,
coils,andotherairhandlercomponents)andexternalpressure(fromductwork,terminalunits,etc.).
WarningLimits(Pa) 150.0to2000.0
ErrorLimits(Pa) 10.0to90000.0
2.18.1.5 Efficiency
Enterthefantotalefficiencyatthisflowrate.Thisfigureisusedtocalculatetheelectricalconsumptionof
the fan at any instant, by dividing the work done on the air by the efficiency. The value entered here
shouldbetheproductoftheefficienciesoftheimpeller,drive,andmotor.
2.19 24BMixingDamperSet
ToolbariconforplacementofaMixingDamper.
MixingDamperSetcomponentontheairsideHVACnetwork.
Themixingdampercontrolsflowfromtheleftinletbranchasapercentageofthemixedairflow,subject
to a preset minimum. The minimum can be scheduled or modulated by a timeswitch profile in the
dampercomponentdialog.Acontrollerthenmodulatesflowfromtheleftbranchvs.bottombranchasa
percentage of the outlet flow rate or in an attempt to achieve a target mixedair temperature. Typical
applications include outside air economizers, demandcontrolled ventilation, and bypass dampers for
heatrecovery, indirect evaporative cooling, heat pipes, coils with high static pressure, or similar
componentswithinanairhandler.Forexample,VAVsystemswithoutsideaireconomizers(variablefresh
aircontrol)andminimumventilation(outsideair)requirementsrequireadamperatthefreshairinlet.


The minimum flow from the left branch is entered in the damper component dialog, and can be
scheduledandevenmodulatedviathemodulatingprofilereferencedinthisdialog.
Figure 260: Mixing damper set dialog (top) and associated controller dialog (bottom) as set up for
modulatingthedampertoatargetmixedairdrybulbtemperatureforatypicaloutsideaireconomizer.
NotethatthecontrolleralsohasanANDreferencetoadependentcontrollerwithsensorthatprovides
a similar outdoor air dewpoint temperature high limit. In this example, the controller will modulate
the damper, mixing outside air and return air to get as close as it can to achieving a target mixedair
temperatureof55F.


Inthecaseofoutsideaireconomizerdamperapplications,theflowintothelefthandbranchissubjectto
theminimumvaluespecifiedbytheMinimumflowparameter,withthreeexceptions:
The flow from the left branch will be less than the set minimum when the total demand for
outflow (mixedair) is less than the minimum outside air value. In this case, the flow into the
lefthandbranchissimplyequaltotheoutflowatanygiventimestep.
The flow on the lefthand inlet branch will be increased above the minimum, such as in the
case of airside economizer free cooling, CO
2
based demandcontrolled ventilation (DCV), as
determined by a controller pointed to the downstream (mixedair) node of the damper set.
The controlled variable for economizer operation is normally a target mixedair temperature,
for DCV it is usually a percentage flow. See the DCV examples illustrated below for systems
thatcombineOAeconomizerandDCVoperation.
An RA Damper component connected to the vertical (bottom) inlet branch on the Mixing
Damperwilloverridethesetminimumoutsideairwhenthetotaldemandforsupplyairatthe
mixedairnodeexceedsthetotalofavailablereturnairplustheminimumOA.Thisisintended
mainly for use in building, such as laboratories, for which there are multiple means of
exhaust/extract from spaces served by the system. While it would be possible to create a
detailed schedule for the minimum OA makeup air requirement, this is not necessary at the
systemOAdamper,solongastheairbalanceisalwaysprovidedforatthezonelevel.
TheMixingDamperisusedtodeterminethefractionofdownstreamflowdemandthatisdrawnfromthe
leftinletbranchvs.thebottominletbranch.Themixingdampercomponentcanbeusedonlywheretotal
flow at the mixedair (outlet) is determined downstream of the damper set, and not where flow is
otherwise determined on either upstream branch. In other words, while flow paths, sources, and
conditions can be determined upstream of a mixing damper, and mixing dampers can be used in series,
the actual airflow volume at the downstream node of a mixing damper must be determined on a
downstream branch. Configurations for which flow is otherwise determined on either inlet branch
upstreamofthemixingdamperwillpassanetworkcheck,butwillnotrunatsimulationtime.Therefore,
thiscomponentwill,inmostcases,beusedonlyatornearthesysteminlet.
When the controllers profile is on, the damper set component modulates the flow into its lefthand
branch(normallythefreshairinlet)eithertoapercentageoftheflowleavingthedeviceortogetasclose
as it can to a target mixedair temperature. The leaving flow rate will have been determined by flow
demandsdownstream.
The time switch profile within the controller that is controlling the damper modulation is interpreted as
anon/offswitch,ONwhentheprofilevalueisgreaterthan50%andOFFotherwise.Thisisincontrastto
thebehaviorofatimeswitchprofileusedeithertoscheduleortomodulatetheminimumflowontheleft
branchorwhenavolumeflowcontroller.
PercentageflowcontrolcanbeappliedonlytomixingdampersetsanddivergentTjunctions(whichcan
thusactasflowsplittingdampers),andmustbeappliedatthecontrolnodeimmediatelydownstreamof
themixingdamperset.
2.19.1.1 Reference


2.19.1.2 DamperMinimumFlow
This parameter sets a minimum value for the flow into the lefthand branch of the damper set.
Independentofwhethertheon/offcontrolwithintheassociatedcontrollerusedtomodulatethedamper
position above the minimum flow is on or off, the flow into the lefthand branch will be subject to a
minimumwhichisthelesserofthisminimumvalueandtheflowratedemandedatthedamperoutletby
downstreamcontrollers.
2.19.1.3 ModulatingProfile
Themodulatingprofileinthemixingdampersetcanserveatleasttwofunctions:
A schedule can be used to enforce the minimum outside air (flow from the left branch) during
only occupied hours of building operation, thus allowing the outside air damper to close
completely during unoccupied hours. This is a typical means of avoiding unnecessary heating of
outside air when system fans switch on the middle of the night or weekends to maintain a
setbacktemperature.
Amodulatingprofilecanbeusedtovarytheminimumflowratebaseduponeitherascheduleor
aformulaprofilereferencingavaluesuchasoutdoordrybulbtemperature.
Demandcontrolled ventilation based upon zonelevel CO
2
is provided not by modulating profile, but by
attachingaproportionalcontrollertothedampersetwithaCO
2
sensoronthedownstreamnodeofthe
occupiedzone(s)/room(s)asillustratedbelow.Notethebranchofthedampersettowhichthecontroller
ispointed.
2.19.1.4 MixingDamperApplication:CO
2
basedDemandControlledVentilation(DCV)example
For CO
2
based demandcontrolled ventilation, the controlled variable for outside air (OA) can be either
flow rate (cfm or l/s) into the left branch of the damper set or the fraction from the left branch as a
percentage of the total mixedair flow rate. However, the latter is much more flexible and useful, as it
allows independent zonelevel controllers with CO
2
sensors to vote on the systemlevel outsideair
damperposition,withouthavingtoknowatanygiventimestepwhattheactualflowrateatthatdamper
is.
IftherearemultiplezonesvotingonthefractionofoutsideairasafunctionofindividualCO
2
levels(via
multiplexed controllers responding to sensed room CO
2
levels), the controlled variable will normally be
percentageflow.For100%outsideairsystems,asinthesecondexamplebelow,zonelevelflowratescan
becontrolledtomaintaindesiredCO
2
levels.NoOAdamperisrequired.
Ifoutsideairflowabovetheminimumrequiredforventilationand/ormakeupairiscontrolledtoatarget
mixedair temperature, as is most typical means of outside air economizer control, a duplicate damper
willneedtobeincludedforraisingthefractionofoutsideairwhendemandedbyzoneCO
2
levels.Thisis
because all controllers pointing to a given node must use the same controlled variable in order to
facilitatevoting.
Intheapplicationillustratedbelow,eachzonevotesforadditionalOAatthesystemlevelasthezoneCO
2
exceedsasetthreshold(seethehighlightedcontrollerandassociatedcontrollerdialog).Aseconddamper
component,inadditionaltothenormalOAeconomizer,justbelowandtotheleftoftheOAeconomizer
damper. This represents a second copy of the same actual damper, but with a different controlled
variable.WhiletheOAeconomizeriscontrolledtomodulatethefractionofoutsideairtomeetadesired


mixedairtargettemperature,withanoutsidetemperaturehighlimit,atorabovewhichitwillshutdown
tothesetminimumOAflow,theaddedDCVdampercanaddmoreOAbasedonzonedemand.Thezone
level DCV controllers vote on the amount of additional OA needed at any give time. The highest vote
from zonelevel DCV controllers modulates the system DCV damper from 0 to 100% as zone CO
2
concentrationrisesfrom1,000to1,400ppm.Inotherwords,whenitisdesirabletobringinmoreOAto
maintain the set mixedair temperature, the first damper will prevail. When it is desirable for
maintenance of appropriate zone CO
2
levels to introduce more OA than otherwise provided by the
thermallydrivenOAeconomizer,theaddeddamperwillprevail.NeithercaneverbringinmoreOAthan
is demanded by the system. Both will have equal priority in determining how much OA is brought in at
anygiventime.
Figure 261: Illustrative HVAC network configuration with added outsideair damper and controller for
CO
2
baseddemandcontrolledventilationinamixing(recirculating)system.


Figure 262: Illustrative controller dialog for CO
2
based demandcontrolled ventilation in a mixing
(recirculating) system. This controls the percentage flow in the added copy of the outsideair damper,
thusoverridingtheoutsideairflowrateotherwisedeterminedbythermalconsiderationsforthenormal
economizerdamperoperation,asneededtomaintainsetzoneCO
2
levels.
Asecondexample(below)illustratesanappropriateconfigurationforcontrolofthezoneleveloutsideair
ventilation rate with a 100% outside air system. This is typical for ventilation systems used with fancoil
units, active chilled beams, and similar terminal equipment. In this case, some zones can use constant
volume ventilation and others can have ventilation rate varied according to CO
2
concentration in the
zone.


Figure 263: The system network example above illustrates a configuration for CO
2
based demand
controlledventilationina 100%outsideairsystem(i.e.,withnorecirculation). Thisexampleisafancoil
system, but could easily be modified to model active chilled beams (induction units), passive chilled
beams,orchilledceilingpanels.ForallzoneswithDCV,thehighlightedcontrollermustuseroomCO
2
as
thesensedvariableforcontroloftheprimaryzoneairflowrate.Otherzonescansimplyuseafixedflow
rate(e.g.,identicalvaluesfortheflowrateatminandmaxsensorsignals).
Note that the damper set at the system inlet is a face & bypass damper for the energy recovery device,
andhasnoinfluenceonthefractionofoutsideair.Aseparatecontrollerinthisexampledeterminesthe
fraction of air that air passes through or around the heat/enthalpy recovery device based upon zone
temperatures, and thus whether additional fan energy is consumed as a result of added static pressure
whenrecoveringthermalenergy.


2.20 ReturnAirDamperSet
ToolbariconsforplacementoftheRADampercomponent.
RADampercomponentonthenetwork.
The Return Air (RA) Damper Set component incrementally increases the minimum flow of outside air
(makeup air) entering the system via the economizer damper when required. In other words, it can, as
needed,overridetheminimumOAsettingintheintakeairmixingdampercomponent.
TheRADamperSetisintendedforuseonlywiththeMixingDamperSet,andthisisassumedtobewhen
the latter is functioning as anoutside air (OA) economizeri.e., when it is mixing OA and RA flows. The
RADamperhasnouserinputsandperformsitsfunctiononlywhenpairedwiththeMixingDamperSet.In
order for the two to be linked, the RA Damper must be present on the vertical branch entering the OA
economizerdamper.Therecanbenojunctionsbetweenthem.IfitisnotpairedwiththeMixingDamper
inthisconfiguration,andthuslinkedtheOAdamper,itwillreverttofunctioningasasimpleTjunction.
The capability of the RA damper link to automatically overridethe minimum OA setting within the OA
damper is useful in the case of any system for which the sum total ofRA plus minimum OA available to
the system may occasionally be less than the collective demand for primary supply airflow to the
conditioned zones. This may occur, forexample, when there are separately exhausted zones (lavatories,
copyrooms,janitorscloset,lockerrooms,etc.)orvariablevolumevent/fumehoods(e.g.,inlaboratories,
hospitals, industrial environments, etc.) removing air from the system according to schedules or sensed
variablesthatareindependentoftheprimaryairflowcontrolstotheconditionedzonesthatfeedthem.
AnotherwaytothinkofthisisthattheRADampercanoverridetheminimumOAsettingwhenthetotal
demand for supply air at the mixedair node exceeds the total of available return air plus the minimum
OA.Thisisintendedmainlyforuseinbuildings,suchaslaboratories,forwhichtherearemultiplemeans
of exhaust/extract from spaces served by the system. While it would be possible to create a detailed
schedulefortheminimumOAmakeupairrequirement,thisisnotnecessaryatthesystemOAdamper,so
longastheairbalanceisalwaysprovidedforatthezonelevel.
The RA damper does not, however, obviate the need to otherwise specify airflow rates so that other
brachesonthesystem,suchastransferairpaths,arenotstarvedofairflowwhentheminimumflowfrom
upstreambranches,ortheschedulethereof,constrainswhatisavailabledownstream.


2.21 ControlledDivergentTJunction(splitterdamper)
ToolbariconsforplacementofTJunctioncomponents.
DivergentTjunctioncomponents.
When the flows for a junction component are set to be divergent, the junction can be controlled to
function as a fixed or variable percentageflow splitter damper. Until a percentage flow controller is
pointed to the downstream node at one of two outlets on a divergent junction, it functions as a simple
uncontrolled junction of airflow paths. Attaching a percentage flow controller to either one of the two
outlets provides a controlled split of the flow, regardless of the current flow rate. It is important the
percentageflowcontrolisappliedtoonlyoneofthetwodownstreamnodes,andnotboth.Furthermore,
theflowmustnotalsobedeterminedbyaflowratecontrolleronthesamedownstreambranch,asthis
wouldcreateanoverconstrainedpath.
Clicking on the red arrows in the Junction flow direction dialog determines divergent rather than
convergent flows in junction components. Percentage flow control can be used only in the case of
divergentjunctions.
DivergentTjunctioncomponentwithpercentageflowcontrollerattachedtooneoftwooutlets.


2.22 DuctworkHeatPickup
Whensupplyductspassthroughnotablywarmspaces,suchasreturnairplenums,orwhensupplyand/or
returnductsarelocatedoutsideofthebuildingenvelopeitisoftendesirabletomodeltheheatgaintoor
heatlossfromductwork.Heatlostfromhotductsisgainedbytheroomairthroughwhichtheductruns
pass (where additional heat may or may not be needed). Similarly, heat gained by cold supply ducts
passingthroughahotreturnplenumwillraisethesupplyairtemperatureandprovideunintendedcooling
tothereturnair,someorallofwhichistypicallyexhaustedfromthebuilding.
Toolbariconsforductwotkheatpickup(horizonatalandverticalcomponents).
Ductworkheatpickupcomponent.
2.22.1.1 Reference
Figure264:Ductworkheatpickupdialog


2.22.1.2 SurfaceAreaofDuct
Entertheapproximatesurfaceareaoftheduct(s).
WarningLimits(m) 5.0to100.0
ErrorLimits(m) 0.1to10000.0
2.22.1.3 AverageUvalueofDuct
Enter the average Uvalue of the duct. The duct Uvalue is used together with the duct surface area to
calculatetheheattransferbetweentheductandtheadjacentroom(oroutside).
WarningLimits(W/mK) 0.1to10.0
ErrorLimits(W/mK) 0.01to99.0
2.22.1.4 Location
Select either external to building (outside the conditioned envelope) or contained with room
(includingnonoccupiedspaces,suchasreturnairplenums).
2.22.1.5 RoomContainingDuct
Select an indoor location of the ductwork (an actual space in the model), if the location is not set to
external.Theflowofheatbetweentheductandroomismodeledforboththeairsystemandtheroom.
2.23 25BDirectActingHeater/Cooler
Toolbariconfordirectactingheater/coolerslist.
Direct acting heaters are intended to represent any room unit with negligible thermal capacity. Unlike
radiators, direct acting units can be used to heat or cool a space. Cooling is achieved by entering a
negativevaluefortheoutput(correspondingtoeitherminimumormaximumsensedsignal)intheroom
unitcontrollerdialog.
TheDirectActingHeatersdialogallowsyoutocreateasetofdirectactingheatertypesforplacementin
thebuilding.DirectactingheaterscanutilizeCHPtoprovideabaseload.


Figure265:Directactingheaterslist
Figure266:Directactingheaterdialog
2.23.1.1 Reference


2.23.1.2 RadiantFraction
Entertheradiantfractionoftheheatemitted(orcoolingeffect)fromthedevice.SeeTable13fortypical
values.
2.23.1.3 Efficiency
Enterefficiencyforthedirectactingheater.
2.23.1.4 UsesCHP?
TickthisboxtoindicatethattheheatercanacceptheatinputfromaCHPsystem(ifpresent).
2.23.1.5 Sequenceranking
Sequencerankingdeterminesthesequenceinwhichheatsourcesareswitchedintotopupanydeficit
inCHPsuppliedheat.Heatsourceswithlowvaluesofthisparameterwillbeswitchedinfirst(typicallythe
most efficient ones). If two heating sources have the same sequence ranking, they will be switched in
simultaneously,withtheCHPinputsupplyingthesamefractionoftheheatingloadforboth.
2.24 26BHotWaterRadiators
InApacheHVAC,thetermRadiatorscoversabroadrangeofhydronicheatingdevicesplaceddirectlyin
conditioned spaces. These generally include castiron radiators, radiant panel heaters, fintube
convectors, and so forth. Whether mainly radiative or purely convective heating units, the common
threadisthatallroomunitsareindependentoftheairsidenetworkandairsidecomponents;theydirectly
interactonlywiththeconditionedspaceandtheplantequipment.
Radiator room units can also be used as a hydronic loop within a heated slab zone, but care should be
takeninsuchcasestoappropriatelydefinethetypeusingparametersthatwillrepresenttheproperties
ofjustthehydronicloopwithintheslab.
Toolbariconforhotwaterradiatortypesdialog.
The Radiators (types) dialog supports defining radiator types for placement in the building. Each time a
particular type is placed within a room component, this constitutes an additional instance of that type.
Anygivenroomcanhavemorethanonetypeandcanhavemorethanoneinstanceofaparticulartype.
However, keep in mind that a separate controller is required for each instance. Therefore, it is often
worth limiting the number of instances to just one or two per zone by representing a range of grouped
setsofradiatorswithtypesthatrepresenttheircollectivecapacityandrelatedcharacteristics.
Hot water radiators use the same calculation algorithms as the chilled ceiling module. The variation of
convectiveheattransferwithradiatortemperatureismodeledusingAlamdariandHammondequations.
ApacheHVACallowsmodelingofbothTRVandmodulatedtemperaturecontrolledradiators.Theprogram
usesasimpleparametricmodelthatincludesthermalmassandconvectiveheattransfercoefficientthat
varieswithradiatortoroomtemperaturedeltaT.


Figure 267: Radiator types dialog (showing illustrative inputs for a group of convective fintube
baseboardheaters)


Figure268:Radiatoreditingdialogshowinginputsforagroupofsmallwallmountedsteelradiators.


Figure269:Radiatoreditingdialogshowinginputsforsetof8overheadradiantheatingpanels.
2.24.1.1 Reference
2.24.1.2 Orientation
Select an orientation to describe the orientation of the radiator. Standard radiators are vertically
orientated, which will tend to increase the convective heat transfer coefficient within the overall heat
transfercalculation.Youmaywanttodefinetheradiatorwithhorizontalorientationifitisbeingusedto
modelanoverheadradiantpanelorahydronicradiantheatingfloorsystem.
Entertheradiantfractionoftheheatemittedfromthedevice.SeeTable13forsometypicalvalues.
2.24.1.4 ReferenceTemperatureDifference
Manufacturersdatacommonlygivesheatoutputoftheradiatorforareferenceunitroomtemperature
difference. Enterthereference temperaturedifferenceinthis cell.Forexample,thedata maystatethat
theheatingoutputis2.5kWforatemperaturedifferenceof60C.
2.24.1.5 HeatingOutputatReferenceTemperatureDifference
Enterthereferenceheatingoutputinthiscell.Fortheexamplegivenabove,theheatingoutputis2.5kW
foratthereferencetemperaturedifferenceof60C.
Theprogramusesthisdatatocalculateaneffectiveareaforuseinthecalculationoftheconvectiveheat
transferasfollows:
A standard convective heat transfer coefficient HCIs is first calculated for the standard radiatorroom
temperaturedifference,TuusingtheAlamdariandHammondequations:
HCIs=F_HCIs(ORI,T
su
,T
sr
,CHARL)
where
T
sr
isthestandardroomtemperature(setto20C)
T
su
isthestandardunittemperature(=T
sr
+Tu)
ORI istheOrientation
CHARL isthecharacteristiclength(setto0.1m)


F_HCIs isafunctionimplementingtheequations.
Theeffectivearea,A
eff
iscalculatedas:
A
eff
=Q
std
x(1rf)
_______________
HCIsx(TbsTrs)
where
Q
std
isthestandardheatoutputatTuandrfistheradiantfraction.
Note that the Alamdari and Hammond equations are used to set up the form of the variation of the
convective heat transfer coefficient as the radiator and room temperatures vary and not to calculate
absolute values from first principles. When the radiatorroom difference is at Tu, the convective heat
outputfromtheunitisQ
std
x(1rf).
2.24.1.6 MaximumInputfromHeatSource
Enterthemaximuminputfromheatsourceservingtheradiator.Becauseofthewayinwhichheatsource
loads are calculated in the program, maximum heat source capacity cannot be specified. Instead, a
maximummustbeallocatedtoeachheatemitter,coil,etc.Thesumofthemaximumcapacitiesforallthe
devicesonaheatsourcecircuitshouldequalthemaximumcapacityoftheheatsource.
2.24.2 118BDistributionPumpConsumption
This item is included to allow for the electrical pumps on a secondary distribution circuit. Whenever the
flow rate on/off controller is on, irrespective of the actual flow rate, then the full electrical power
specifiedherewillapply.Thisallowsthemodelingofzonedcontrolofhotwaterdistributiontoradiators.
2.24.3 119BMaterial
Select the material from which the chilled ceiling panels or passive chilled beams are made (steel or
aluminum). The material is used together with the 'Total weight' and the water capacity to calculate of
thetotalthermalcapacityoftheradiator.
2.24.4 120BTotalRadiatorWeight
Enter the weight of the radiator, excluding the weight of any water in the system. This data is used to
calculatethethermalcapacityoftheradiator.
2.24.5 121BWaterCapacity
Enter the water capacity of the radiator. This data is also used to calculate the thermal capacity of the
radiator.


2.25 27BChilledCeilings
TheChilledCeilingsmoduleallowsyoutocreateasetofchilledceilingtypesforplacementinthebuilding
and then control each instance of a particular type using flow rates, set points, and other control
parametersspecifictoeachparticularzone.
ToolbariconforChilledCeilingTypeslist.
Chilled Ceiling Types may be used to model mainly radiant chilled ceiling panels, mainly convective
passivechilledbeams,oranythinginbetween.Ahydroniccoolingloopinachilledconcreteslabcanalso
be modeled using a Chilled Ceiling Type, however, care should be taken to modify the input values
accordingly.Activechilledbeamsshouldbemodeledontheairsidenetworkusingacoolingcoilandloop
forinducedairflowcontrolledinproportiontoprimaryairflow.
The chilled ceiling module allows modeling of both coldwater flow and modulated temperature
controlleddevices.Theprogramusesasimpleparametricmodelthatincludesthermalmassandvariable
heattransferwithchilledceilingtemperature.


Figure270:Chilledceiling(types)list
Figure271:Chilledceilingdialog
2.25.1.1 Reference
2.25.1.2 PanelOrientation
Select an orientation for the panels: horizontal for mainly horizontal panelsi.e. the majority of the
chilledsurfacefacesdowntowardthefloor;vertical forwallmountedpanels orthosewithsurfacearea
mainlyperpendiculartothefloorandceiling.
Vertical beams are mainly convective and horizontal beams are mainly radiative in their cooling effect.
The selected option therefore affects the default radiative fraction in the next cell. It is also used as a
parameter to the Alamdari and Hammond convective heat transfer coefficient equations in the
determination of the form of the variation of the convective heat transfer coefficient with beam
temperature.


Horizontalpanelorientation Verticalpanelorientation
Entertheradiantfractionoftheheatemittedfromthedevice.SeeTable13forsometypicalvalues.
WarningLimits 0.0to0.9
2.25.1.4 ReferenceTemperatureDifference
Manufacturers data commonly gives the cooling output of the unit at a reference temperature
difference.Enterthereferencetemperatureinthiscell.Forexample,thedatamaystatethatthecooling
outputis2.5kWforaunitroomtemperaturedifferenceof6Ki.e.,whenthecoolingsurfaceoftheunit
is6Kbelowtheroomairtemperature.Inthiscaseenter6inthiscell.
Default(C) 5
WarningLimits(C) 2.0to20.0
ErrorLimits(C) 1.0to100.0
2.25.1.5 CoolingOutputatReferenceTemperatureDifference
Manufacturersdatacommonlystatescoolingoutputforagivenunitroomtemperaturedifference.Enter
thisreferencecoolingoutputinthiscell.Forexamplethedatamaystatethatthecoolingoutputis2.5kW
foratemperaturedifferenceof6K.Inthiscaseenter2.5inthiscell.
Theprogramusesthisdatatocalculateaneffectiveareaforuseinthecalculationoftheconvectiveheat
transferasfollows:
A standard convective heat transfer coefficient HCIs is first calculated for the standard paneltoroom
temperaturedifference,TbusingtheHammondandAlamdariequations:
HCIs=F_HCIs(ORI,Tsb,Tsr,CHARL)
where
Tsr isthestandardroomtemperature(setto22C)
Tsb isthestandardbeamtemperature(=TsrTb)
ORI istheOrientation
CHARL isthecharacteristiclength(setto0.1m)
F_HCIs isafunctionimplementingtheequations
Theeffectivearea,A
eff
iscalculatedas:
A
eff
=Q
std
x(1rf)
_______________
HCIsx(TbsTrs)


where
QstdisthestandardheatoutputatTbsandrfistheradiantfraction.
Note that the Alamdari and Hammond equations are used to set up the form of the variation of the
convective heat transfer coefficient as the beam and room temperatures vary and not to calculate
absolutevaluesfromfirstprinciples.WhenthebeamisatTbsandtheroomisatTrs,theconvectiveheat
outputfromtheunitisQstdx(1rf).
2.25.1.6 MaximumCoolingfromChiller
Enter the maximum input from chiller. In an actual application, this will be limited by the water
temperature and flow rate. The parameters can also be controlled, and thus limited (see Room Unit
Controllers section), however, this parameters allows opportunity for setting a hard limit in terms of
availablecoolingcapacity.
Because of the way in which chiller loads are calculated in the program, a maximum chiller capacity
cannotbespecified.Instead,amaximumlimitmust beallocated toeachchilledceiling,coolingcoil,etc.
Exceptwhereconsiderablediversityofcoolingloadsisanticipated,thesumofallthemaximumcapacities
ofallthedevicesonacoolingcircuitshouldequalthemaximumcapacityofthechiller.
2.25.1.7 DistributionPumpConsumption
This item is included to allow for the electrical pumps on a zonelevel secondary (or tertiary) hydronic
loop. Whenever the flow rate on/off controller is on, irrespective of the actual flow rate, then the full
electrical power specified here is assumed to apply. This allows the modeling of zoned control of cold
water distribution to chilled ceilings using local constantspeed pumps. Alternatively, such when only
valves and not pumps are use at the zone loop level, pump power can be included on the secondary
chilledwaterloopatthesystemmodelinglevel.
2.25.1.8 PanelMaterial
Select the material from which the chilled ceiling panels or passive chilled beams are made (steel or
aluminum). The material is used together with the 'Total weight' and the water capacity' to calculate of
thetotalthermalcapacityofthebeam.
2.25.1.9 PanelWeight
Entertheweightofthepanels,excludingtheweightofwaterinthesystem.Thisdataisusedtocalculate
thermalcapacity.
2.25.1.10 PanelWaterCapacity
Enter the water capacity of the panels or passive chilled beams. This is used to calculate the thermal
capacity.


3 2BControllers
Controllers are used in ApacheHVAC to govern the operation of the HVAC system. Their function is to
controlairflowsandthebehaviorofdevicessuchascoils,mixingdampers,flowsplitters,energyrecovery
heatexchangers,spraychambers,andsteamhumidifiers.
Figure 31: Example of a very simple 2zone Fan Coil system with constantvolume tempered outside air
supply. The brown boxes and lines represent controllers. Those with arrowheads point to controlled
nodesforairflowsandequipment;thosewitharoundbulbattheendaresensors.Notethatthisexample
isnotmultiplexed,whichwouldeffectivelystackthesetwozoneswithallequipmentandcontrollers(like
cards) and provide far more efficient means of adding and editing controls, etc. for a larger number of
zones.Seesection6MultiplexingHVACSystemNetworks.
3.1 28BWorkingwithcontrollersontheairsideHVACnetwork
Whenyouselectacontrollerfromthetoolbaryoufirstchoosethecontrollednode.Formostcomponents
that are placed on the airside network, a controller is required and the controlled node should be the
node immediately downstream of the component. A few components, however, do not require a
controller. For airflow, and only in the case of airflow, the controlled may be any node on the system
branchtowhichthecontrolledflowrateapplies.Typicallyitwillnotbeanodeimmediatelyadjacenttoa
fancomponent.Nextyouplacethecontroller,andfinally(whereapplicable)thesensednodeornodes.
The following is asummary of considerations for placing controllers; however, there are important rules
thatdoneedtobefollowedinthecaseofmultiplexedcontrols.Theseareclearlylaidoutinthesectionon
Multiplexing.
Placementofcontrollers:
MostcomponentsControlisrequiredatthedownstreamnodeadjacenttothecomponentin
orderforthecomponenttofunction.
FansandDuctworkheatpickupThesetwocomponentshavecharacteristicperformancethat
relatestotheairflowpassingthroughthem,butneithershouldbedirectlycontrolled.


Divergent T junctions One of two downstream branches for a flowsplitting T junction
can be controlled, via the immediately downstream node on that branch, as a percentage of
the flow entering the junction. The flow on that branch cannot, however, also be otherwise
controlledbyanothercontroller.
Airflow Provide control on each branch representing a unique path for which the flow rate
cannototherwisebedetermined,butdonotoverconstrainthesystem.
Airsource heat pumps while this component is placed on the network (typically at an air
inlet)soastoreadthesourcetemperature,itdoesnotneedacontroller,asitisonlyreading
the air temperature and otherwise acting as a heat source for coils, radiators, etc. that have
theirowncontrols.
Heat recovery The heatrecovery/exchange component is unusual in that is has two
downstreamnodes.Inthiscase,eitheroneofthetwo,butnotboth,maybecontrolled.
It is not necessary to define local control loops at individual components. Indeed, it is likely to cause
controlinstabilityifyoucontrolavariableasadirectfunctionofavaluemeasuredatthesamenode.For
example,ifyouwantaheatingcoiltowarmanairstreamto25C,donotcontrolheatoutputinresponse
tothemeasuredoffcoilairtemperature.Instead,youshouldcontroltemperaturedirectly.
Ideally,allfeedbackcontrolloopsshouldhaveaslowrespondingcomponentsuchasaroomsomewhere
intheloop.Therewillbeoccasionswhenthisisnotpossible(forexamplewhentheratioofoutsideairto
returnairiscontrolledasafunctionofthemixedairtemperature);insuchcasesdampingcanbeaddedto
the proportional controller to encourage control stability, but you should check the program output
carefullytoensurethatthesystemisbehavingcorrectly.
Once controllers are in place their behavior may be modified with AND and OR connections from other
controllers.
3.1.1 122BOn/Off,Deadband,andProportionalcontrol
It is essential for users to understand the differences between On/Off, Deadband, and
Proportionalcontrol.Illustrationsofeachofthese,plusrelationshipbetween airflowandSAT
controls,areprovidedbelowinrelationtothesecontrollertypes.
3.1.2 123BMultiplecontrolofsinglevariable
It is permissible and often highly desirable to have multiple controllers vying for control of
thesamecontrolledvariableforacomponentorflowrate.
Where multiple controllers are used, whether multiplexed or manually placed, they must all
pointtoonenodeandmustallcontrolthesamevariablee.g.,itwouldnotbeacceptableto
point a target drybulb temperature control and a percentage flow control both to the
downstream node of a single mixing damper set. In the case of airflow control, while the
controllednodecanbeanywhereonabranch,multiplecontrollersmustallpointtothesame
nodesuchthattheycanvoteontheflowrateforthatbranchofthenetwork.
Thegeneralruleformultiplecontrollersisthatwhichevervotesforthevaluethatrepresent
moreoutputfromthecomponentorbranchwillwinthevote.Indeed,whilethevoteforthe
lowest leaving air temperature will always win in the case of a cooling coil, for all other
components and airflows, it is the high value that will win the votei.e., whichever
controller is asking for more heat, more air, more moister, a higher percentage, or a higher
flowratewillwin.


3.2 29BControlleroperation
Allcontrollershaveatimeswitchprofileandsometypesrespondtooneormoresensedvariables.They
outputtwotypesofcontrolsignal:switchingsignalsandnumericalcontrolsignals.Theswitchingsignalis
either ON or OFF, depending on the sensor signal and sensor parameters. The numeric control signal (if
present)willbeavariablesuchastherequiredoffcoiltemperatureofaheatingcoil.Forflowcontrollers,
the time switch profile has a special interpretation allowing it to take values intermediate between ON
andOFF.Thismodulatingfeatureforflowcontrolprovesusefulincertainsituations.Forexampleitallows
aflowratetofollowthetimevariationdefinedinaprofile.
The switching signal is used to switch equipment on and off, and may also be passed on as an input for
anothercontrollerviaanANDorORconnection.
Thenumericcontrolsignalsetsthevalueofaphysicalvariablesuchastemperatureorflowrate.Thismay
modulateunderproportionalcontrol.
Theiconsrepresentingcontrollersareasfollows:
Independentcontrollers
timeswitch
controllerwithsensor
differentialcontroller
Dependentcontrollers
timeswitch
controllerwithsensor
differentialcontroller
ANDconnection,ORconnection
Controllers are of three basic types: time switch controller, controller with sensor, and differential
controller.Eachtypehasindependentanddependentvariants:
Independent controllers directly control a component or airflow rate. They also generate a switching
signalwhichcanbeusedasaninputtoothercontrollersviaANDandORconnections.
Dependentcontrollersgenerateonlyaswitchingsignalforinputtoothercontrollers.
With the exception of ducts, passive junctions, rooms and fans, every HVAC component needs a
controller. Controllers are also required to set airflow rates, and this may be done at any node (not
necessarily at a fan). Controllers switch components on or off and govern their performance. System
variablesthatmaybecontrolledincludeairflow,heatoutput,temperatureandhumidity.
Controllers are required throughout the ApacheHVAC model to control the system components and to
moveairthroughthenetwork.Thecontrolmaybenomorethanasimpletimeswitch(onatcertainhours
of the day, off at others). In other cases it will modulate the operation of a component in response to
conditionssensedbyathermostatorothertypeofsensor.


Thefollowingcomponentswilloperate onlyifacontrolconnectionhasbeen madeto theirdownstream
node:
Heatingcoil
Coolingcoil
Sprayhumidifier
Steamhumidifier
Heatrecoverydevice
Damperset(economizer)
The downstream connection is interpreted as a connection to the component itself, and causes it to
control the condition at the controlled node. Note that Fans are not directly controlled; flow rate is
controlledanywhereonanetworkbranch(Seesection3.5Airflowcontrollers,below).
3.3 30BControllerparameters
Thefollowingparametersfeatureincontrollerspecifications:
NodeBeingSensed
VariableBeingSensed
PercentageProfileforTimeSwitch
ValueforMaximumControlSignal
ValueforMinimumControlSignal
ConstantorTimedSetpoint
Setpoint
Deadband
HighSensorInput
Logical'OR'ControlCombination
Logical'AND'ControlCombinations
VariableBeingControlled
ConstantorTimedMidband
Midband
ProportionalBandwidth
MaximumChangeperTimeStep
The selection and application of parameters differs depending on the controller type. If a controller is
required simply to hold a variable at a constant value, the controller specification need only include the
value to be maintained and the hours during which the value is to be maintained. It will act as a simple
timeswitchwiththevariableheldconstantasspecifiedforvalueformaximumcontrolsignalwhenever
the controller is the ON state. For example, to simulate a heating coil with a constant leaving air
temperaturerequiresonlyacontrollertoactivatethecoilovertherequiredperiodandtosettheoffcoil
temperature.
WhereitisrequiredtoswitchadeviceONorOFFinaccordancewiththevalueofasensedvariable,the
controller specification will include a set point and other parameters, such as a control deadband
(hysteresis).Thistypeofcontrolwouldbetypicalforathermostatcontrollingaroomheater.Itmayalso


beaugmentedbyproportionalcontrol(seebelow)if,inthisexample,theoutputoftheheaterisvariable.
The controller set point can be constant or can vary according to an absolute profile. A time varying set
point can be used to specify night setback and certain types of optimum start algorithme.g., using a
formulaprofiletovarythetimeforchangingfromnightsetbacktotheoccupiedhourssetpointaccording
totheoutdoortemperature.
Proportionalcontrolsareusedwherethereisneed forcontinuouslyvaryingthecontrolvalueinrelation
to a sensed signal. This will be typical for control of VAV boxes, demandcontrolled ventilation, bypass
dampers for heat recovery, and so forth. They can also be used very generically to control one flow in
proportiontoanother,suchasinanactivechilledbeamforwhichtheinduced airflowistobe2.5times
the primary airflow, regardless of the primary airflow rate. A similar application would be the
approximation of exfiltration through a pressurized building envelope at a rate, for example, of 1.8% of
theprimaryairflowtoeachzone.
For any controller that includes a sensor for either setpoint control or proportional control, the sensed
variablecanbeanyofthoseavailable(seelistbelow)andultimatelywilldependuponthesensorlocation.
For example room temperature, CO
2
, relative humidity, etc., outdoor variables, such as wetbulb
temperature, dewpoint temperature, etc., or relative variables, such as the difference in enthalpy
betweenreturnairandoutdoorair.
3.3.1 124BControlledvariables
This parameter, which is present for all independent controllers, specifies the variableflow rate, dry
bulb temperature, relative humidity, etc.to be controlled at the controlled node. The control variable
beingmustbeconsistentwitheachcomponent:forexample,youcannotcontrolhumiditywithaheating
coil.Thetablebelowlistsvariablesavailableforcontrolforeachtypeofcomponent.
Component
ApplicablecontrolvariablesforeachtypeofcomponentontheairsideHVACnetwork
Drybulb
Temp.
Relative
Humidity
Wetbulb
Temp.
Dewpoint
Temp.
%
Flow
Heat
Transfer
Moisture
input
Enthalpy
Flow
rate
Heatingcoil Yes No No No No Yes No No No
Coolingcoil Yes No No Yes No Yes No No No
Heatrecovery Yes No No No No No No No No
Spraychamber No Yes Yes Yes No No Yes No No
Steamhumidifier No Yes No No No No Yes No No
Mixingdamperset Yes No No No Yes No No Yes No
ReturnAirdamper n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Divergentjunction No No No No Yes No No No No
Activeduct n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Fan n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Networkbranch No No No No No No No No Yes
Table 31: Controlled variables allowed for each type of componenti.e., at the network node
immediately downstream. As an example, Percentage Flow Rate is permitted only at the outlet of a
damper set or at one outlet of a divergent (flowsplitting) junction. However, drybulbtemperature and
enthalpyarealsopermittedattheoutletofamixingdamperset,wheretheyareinterpretedastargetsto
beachieved,totheextentthiscanbedonebymixingtheavailableinletstreams.


NotethatActiveDuctcomponentsarenot controlledatall,Fancomponentsarenotdirectly controlled,
andflowratecanbecontrolledanywhereonanetworkbranch.
3.3.2 125BSensedvariables
Thefollowingvariablesareavailableforsensinginallcontrollerswithsensors:
Flowrate
Drybulbtemperature
Relativehumidity
Wetbulbtemperature
Dewpointtemperature
Enthalpy
CO
2
concentration
Ifthesensedvariableisdrybulbtemperature,thesensorradiantfractionmustalsobespecified.
Sensed CO
2
concentration in a space at any simulation time step is a function of the outdoor
concentration (assumed to be 400 ppm), CO
2
addition from occupants, and the extent to which the
mechanical system recirculates the air and/or mixes it with air from other spaces. Occupant CO
2
productionis,inturn,afunctionofthenumberofoccupantsinthespaceandtheoccupantactivitylevel
inkeepingwithcombinedsensibleandlatentgainperpersonthathasbeensetforPeopleunderInternal
Gains in the Thermal Conditions template or Room Data dialogs. CO
2
concentration is not available for
Room Unit controllers, as these control only hydronic devices that cannot influence room air CO
2
concentration.
Twoadditionalsensedvariablesareavailableforroomunitcontrollers:
Solarradiation
Surfacetemperature
ForSolarradiation,theorientationandslopeofthereceivingsurfacemustbespecified.
Errorlimitsforthethreeadditionalparameters:
RadiantFraction 0.01.0 0.01.0

Orientation(azimuth) 0.0360.0 0.0360.0
Slope(anglefromhorizontal) 0.0180.0 0.0180.0


Figure32:Addingasurfacetemperaturesensortag
Surfacetemperaturesensorsrequirearoom/zonelocationtobeselectedwithinthecontrollerdialog.For
the sensor to function, this location requires a tag to be set in Apache Thermal view indicating which
adjacencyinthezone/roomshouldhavethesensor.
Forexample,foraroomwithafloorthatoverlapsmultipleotherzones,justonesectionofthefloorcan
betaggedasthesensedsurfacewithinthatroom.
The selected adjacency can be within a nonoccupied space, such as a return or underfloor supply
plenum.Inthecaseofahydronicheatedorcooledslab,thesensorwouldgoonthefloororceilingofthe
adjacent occupied space, such that it is measuring the temperature of the thermoactive surface that
occupantscansee.
ThesurfacetemperaturesensortagisaddedbyselectingtheappropriateadjacencywhileintheApache
Thermalviewandthenrightclickingtoaccessthesurfacetemperaturesensoroption.Onceset,aredT
willbedisplayednexttotheadjacency,parentsurfaceforthatadjacency(typicallyafloororceiling),and
theroomorzonethatcontainsthatsurface.SeeFigure32,above.


3.4 31BControlsincombination
3.4.1 126BMultiplecontrollersatasinglenetworknode
Itispermissibletoattachmorethanonecontrollertoanode.Multiplecontrolsareused,forexample,to
determine an overall control signal based upon the most extreme condition occurring in a set of zones.
Requirementforusingmultiplecontrollerstodetermineanoverallcontrolsignal:
Allcontrollersmustbeattachedtothesamenode.
Allthecontrollersmustcontrolthesamevariable.
Wheretwoormorecontrollersareattachedtoonenode,theiron/offcontrolsignalsandtheircontrolled
variablevaluesarecombinedasfollows:
Thecomponent(orflow)isturnedonifany(oneormore)oftheattachedcontrollersoutputs
anONsignal.
AnycontrollerprovidinganONsignalalsooutputsavalueforthecontrolledvariable,whichis
thensubjecttoapollingprocess.
Theeffectonthecontrolledvariabledependsonthetypeofthisvariableandthecomponentitappliesto.
In the case of flow control, the flow through the node is set to the maximum of the flows calculated by
theattachedcontrollers.Inthecaseofadamperset,thisprincipleappliestotheflowcalculatedforthe
branch entering the mixing box from the left on the schematic (which often represents the outside air
intake). In the case of a heating coil, steam humidifier, spray chamber, or heat recovery device, the
controlled variable (for instance, offcoil temperature) is set to the maximum of the controlled values
output by the attached controllers. In the case of a cooling coil, the controlled variable is set to the
minimum of the controllers output values. As such, the multiple attached controllers effectively vote
ontheresultingcontrolvalue.TheresultingoutcomesdescribedabovearesummarizedTable32,below.
Component
Dominantcontrolvaluewhenmultiplecontrolspointtoasinglenetworknode
Drybulb
Temp.
Relative
Humidity
Wetbulb
Temp.
Dewpoint
Temp.
%
Flow
Heat
Transfer
Moisture
input
Enthalpy
Flow
rate
Heatingcoil Max Max
Coolingcoil Min Min Min
Heatrecovery Max
Spraychamber Max Max Max
Steamhumidifier Max Max
Mixingdamperset Max Max Max
ReturnAirdamper n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Divergentjunction Max
Activeduct n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Fan n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a
Networkbranch Max
Table32:Thedominantvaluewhenmultiplecontrollerspointtoasinglenodeorcomponent.


3.4.2 127BLinkingofcontrollersvialogicalANDandORconnections
Controllers may be linked together via AND and OR connections (further described in sections 3.5.4 and
3.5.5 below). The final control signal may be the result of a relatively complex series of logical
determinations.Thecontrolofaroomheatercould,forexample,bespecifiedasfollows:
HeatisONduringtheday,providedthattheoutsideairtemperatureisbelow15C,AND
Duringthenight,whenevertheroomtemperaturedropsbelow10C,AND
During the preheat period, starting at a time which depends on outside air temperature (i.e.
optimumstartcontrol).
3.5 32BAirflowcontrollers
Tosetthesystemairflows,isnotnecessaryordesirabletoconnectcontrolstoeverynodeinthenetwork.
Rather, it is necessary to provide just enough control to determine airflow rates for all branches.
Wheneverpossible,usersshouldletApacheHVACderivetheflow.Forexample,whenmultiplecontrolled
branchesconverge,solongasallbranchflowsaredefined,ApacheHVACshouldbelefttoderivetheflow
onthecollector/returnpath.
Theprogramdoescheckforbothoverspecificationofflowrateandfornegativeflows.Therefore,ifflow
rates are incorrectly set up, it will very likely be flagged as a error that will prevent the simulation from
running. In all such cases, flagged errors include report the node number at which the flow error is
occurring. In any case, it is best to control flow at the minimum number of points needed to define the
system.
Equipment output is determined by the parameters setting the controlled value at the minimum and
maximum control signal. The component capacity does not feature in the control provided that the
capacityequalsorexceedsthevaluesenteredforminimumandmaximumcontrolsignal.
3.6 33BControllerparametersterminologyandgeneraldiscussion
The following section describes the parameters and terminology used throughout the range of
ApacheHVAC controllers. Separate sections following this describe specific types of controllers and their
applications.
3.6.1 128BTimeSwitchorOn/OffControl
This first section of the control dialog (common to all types of controllers) determines what is being
controlled,thecontrolvalueatmaximumsensedsignal(orsimplythesetvalueifthereisnoproportional
control),andtheinclusionofaprofileorscheduletodeterminewhenthecontrollerisactive.
3.6.1.1 VariableBeingControlled
This parameter, which is present for all independent controllers, specifies the variableflow rate, dry
bulbtemperature,relativehumidity,etc.tobecontrolledatthecontrollednode.
Itisnotnecessarytodefinelocalcontrolloopsatindividualcomponentsand,indeed,itislikelytocause
control instability if you control one variable at a node as a direct function of a value measured at the
samenode.Forexample,ifyouwantaheatercoiltowarmtheairupto25C,donotcontrolheatoutput
inresponsetothemeasuredoffcoilairtemperature.Instead,youshoulddirectlycontroltemperature.


Ideally,allfeedbackcontrolloopsshouldhaveaslowrespondingcomponent(e.g.aroom)somewherein
theloop.Therewillbeoccasionswhenthisisnotpossible(e.g.whentheratioofoutsideairtoreturnair
is controlled as a function of the mixed air temperature). In such cases damping can be added to the
proportionalcontrollertoencouragecontrolstability,butyoushouldchecktheprogramoutputcarefully
toensurethatthesystemisbehavingcorrectly.
None of the 'active' components defined in the network (with the exception of fans) will perform a
function unless a controller is specified at the node immediately downstream of that component. The
controlsreactwiththecomponentsasfollows:
When the controller is OFF, a particular component will have no effect on the air passing over it. If the
airflowonanetworkbranchisOFF,therewillbenoloadplaceduponanycomponentsonthatparticular
branch. If the airflow ALL downstream network branches are OFF, there will be no load on any
componentslocatedontheupstreampaththatfeedsthem.
WhenthecontrollerisON:
If under proportional control, the condition of the air leaving the component will depend on
the value corresponding to the control signal coming from the proportional controller at any
instantintime.
If no proportional control, the condition of the air leaving the component will depend on the
controlvalueindicatedatthemaximumsensedsignal.
3.6.1.2 ValueatMaximumSignal
Thisparameterispresentforallindependentcontrollers.Ithasadifferentfunctionforon/off(setpoint)
controllersandproportionalcontrol.
Inthecaseofon/offcontrol,whichapplieswhentheProportionalControlboxisnotticked,thevaluefor
maximum signal specifies the numerical control signal. The controlled variable will take this value
whenever the switching signal is on (provided that such a value can be achieved within the physical
constraints,whichincludethemaximumdutyofthecomponent).
In the case of proportional control, which applies when the Proportional Control box is ticked, the value
formaximumsignalspecifiesthevalueofthenumericcontrolsignaloutputwhenthesensedvariableis
atorabovetheupperendoftheproportionalband.
TheresponsecharacteristicforproportionalcontrolisshowninFigure37.
Notethatifyouwanttocontrolthetemperatureoftheairfromaheatingorcoolingcoil,thisshouldbe
done directly by choosing drybulb temperature for the variable being controlled cell and the required
temperature for value for maximum control signal. ApacheHVAC will calculate the heat needed to
maintain this temperature (subject to the limit imposed by the capacity of the component). The same
principleappliestothecontrolofrelativehumidity,wetbulbanddewpointtemperaturesbycoolingcoils
andhumidifiers.
3.6.1.3 TimeSwitchProfile
Youmustspecifyapercentageprofiletoindicatethescheduleofoperationforthecontroller.
Formosttypesofcontrolledvariablethisisinterpretedasfollows.
When the profile has a value greater than 50% it will be ON, subject to other parameters that may
overridethetimeswitch.Otherwise,itisOFF.Thecontrolleroutputisalwaysoffwhentheprofilevalueis
lessthanorequalto50%.


An exception to this rule applies in the case of air and water flow controllers. Here the profile has a
modulatingratherthanjustaswitchingrole,theprofilevaluebeingappliedasafactorontheflowrate.
3.6.2 129BSensor(foron/offandproportionalcontrol)
Thesectionofthecontrollerinputsthatdeterminethesensedvariableandcharacteristicsofthesensor,
suchasradiantfraction,inthecaseoftemperaturesensors.
3.6.2.1 VariableBeingSensed
Selectthevariablethatistobemonitoredatthesensednode.Thiswillbefedintotheon/off(setpoint)
orproportionalcontrol.
3.6.2.2 Radiantfraction
Whenthesensedvariableisdrybulbtemperature,aninputfieldisavailabletosettheradiantfractionof
sensed temperature. As an example, if the radiant fraction were set to 0.5, the sensor would effectively
besensingdryresultanttemperaturei.e.,operativetemperatureinstillairconditions.
3.6.3 130BSetPoint(foron/offcontrol)
3.6.3.1 Active
Tick this box to enable on/off control. This may operate in conjunction with, or as an alternative to,
proportional control. On/off control must be enabled for direct acting heaters, radiators and chilled
beams.
3.6.3.2 SetPointVariation
Thesetpointforon/offcontrolmaybeconstantorvariable.SelectConstantorTimedasappropriate.
3.6.3.3 SetPoint
Set Point defines the behavior of the switching signal generated by the controller as a function of the
sensed variable when on/off control is used. The response characteristic for on/off control is shown in
Figure38.
A constant value for Set Point is entered as a number and a variable value by an absolute profile
specifyingthevalueofthesetpointthroughouttheyear.
Theunitsinwhichthevaluesareexpressedmustbeappropriatetothevariablebeingsensed,andwhen
thesetpointisentereddirectly,thevaluemustliewithintheappropriatewarninganderrorlimitsshown
below:
3.6.3.4 Deadband
Deadbanddefinestherangeofsensedvariablevaluesoverwhichswitchingoccursinon/offcontrol.The
responsecharacteristicforon/offcontrolisshowninFigure38.
Thedeadbandenablestheprogramtomodelswitchinghysteresis.Ifitisspecifiedaszerothecontrolwill
switchbetweentheONandOFFstateswheneverthevalueofthesensedvariablepassesthroughtheset
point. If a nonzero deadband is specified, the control will change its state as the sensed variable rises
throughtheupperendofthedeadbandorfallsthroughthelowerendofthedeadband.


3.6.3.5 HighSensorInput
Thisparameterrelatestoon/off(setpoint)controlandspecifieswhether theswitchingsignaloutputby
the controllerisONorOFFforhighvaluesofthesensedvariable.Theresponsecharacteristicforon/off
control shown in Figure 310 is drawn for the case where High Sensor Input set to OFF. When this
parameterissettoONthecharacteristicisinverted.
HeatersandhumidifiersusuallyhaveHighSensorInputsettoOFFsothatthedeviceswitchesoffathigh
values of sensed temperature or humidity. Cooling coils, whether used for cooling or dehumidification,
usuallyhaveHighSensorInputsettoON.
3.6.4 131BProportionalControl
3.6.4.1 Active
Tickthisboxtoenableproportionalcontrol.
ProportionalcontrolfeaturesarerequiredwithintheApacheHVACsystemmodeltoallowcomponentsto
mimic the operation of real controls. Proportional control usually gives a better quality of control than
on/off(setpoint)control.
All HVAC components need a controller and the versatility of the controllers means that proportional
controlisonlyrequiredforcertainfunctions.
Proportional control is used to adjust the value of a controlled variable smoothly as a function of the
value of a sensed variable. Examples of this type of control are the modulation of a VAV supply airflow
ratesandCAVsupplytemperatures.
3.6.4.2 MidbandVariation
Themidbandforproportionalcontrolmaybeconstantorvariable(timed).SelectConstantorTimedas
appropriate.
3.6.4.3 Midband
Themidbandparameterspecifiesthevalueofthesensedvariableatthecentreoftheproportionalband.
A constant value for midband is entered as a number and a variable value by an absolute profile
specifyingthevalueofthemidbandthroughouttheyear.
3.6.4.4 ProportionalBandwidth
The proportional bandwidth is the width of the band used for proportional control that is, the
movementinthesensedvariablebetweenthevaluesthatgeneratethemaximumandminimumcontrol
signals.Thisproportionalbandwidthiscenteredaboutthemidband.
By way of illustration, if a heater coil is being controlled on outside air temperature, such that at an
outside temperature of 1C requires an off heater temperature of 35C, and at 10C outside the off
heater temperature is reduced to 28C, then the midband would be 4.5K (4.511/2=10,1), and the
proportionalbandwouldbe11K(10(1)=11).Itshouldbenotedthatthevaluefortheminimumcontrol
signalwouldbe35C,andforthemaximumcontrolsignal,28C.
ApacheHVAC can model simple switching (on/off) control and ideal proportional control. Because
ApacheHVACsimplifiestheHVACsystemitcanmodelthe'ideal'translationofacontrolsignaldirectlyto


the required change in a physical quantity. In this respect, ApacheHVAC proportional control is actually
closerinrealitytorealPIDanddirectdigitalcontrolthanitistorealproportionalcontrol.
In reality, to control the heat input from a heater coil, a sensor might be positioned somewhere in the
systemandconfiguredtoadjustthepositionofavalvewhichvariestheflowofhotwaterthroughit.The
controls engineer will choose a control system which gives the most precise match of control signal
(measuredtemperature)torequiredcondition(heatinput).Inawelldesignedcontrolsystem,therewill
beaonetoonecorrespondence.
ApacheHVAC proportional controllers model this situation because a control signal can be translated
directly into heat input or offcoil temperature according to a linear relationship, without any of the lag
typicallyintroducedbythewatersideofthesystem.
3.6.4.5 MaximumChangeperTimeStep
This parameter specifies the maximum fractional change that the controller can carry out in each
simulationtimestep.ThefractioniswithrespecttotheoverallrangeofcontrolbetweenthevalueatMax
signalandthevalueatMinsignal.
Thisparameterprovidesaformofdampingandshouldbeadjustedtoalowervalueinsituationswherea
closedloop feedback between the sensor and controller may cause 'hunting'. The program will try to
automaticallycompensateforthistypeofcontrolinstability,butitisadvisabletotakestepstoavoidthe
problemarising.
Neveruseafeedbacklooptocontrolacomponentwhenopenloopcouldbeusedinstead.Whenclosed
loop feedback control is essential or valuable, there are a number of precautions that will facilitate
controlstability:
Ensurethatthecontrolledcomponentsarenotoversizedorthattherangeofcontrolledvalues
isnogreaterthanisnecessarytomeetdesignconditions;
Keepproportionalbandsaswideasisreasonableandappropriate;
If possible, include a room in the loop (the mass of air and materials in a room provides very
muchslowerresponsetimesthanothercomponents)
Specifyasmallvalueforthe'maximumchangepertimestep'(e.g.0.05to0.2)
Notethattheeffectofthemaximumchangepertimestepvalueenteredwillvarydependingonthetime
step.Thusifyouchangethetimestepyoushouldalsochangethevalueenteredhere.
3.6.4.6 ValueatMinimumSignal
The value for minimum control signal applies to proportional control only. It specifies the value of the
numericalcontrolsignaloutputwhenthesensedvariableisatorbelowthelowerendoftheproportional
band.
Example:
Acontrollerissensingtemperatureinaroomwithamidbandof22Candaproportionalbandwidthof
4K and the airflow at a node is to be controlled to 500 l/s when the room is at 20C and to 1500 l/s
whenitisat24C.Herethevalueforminimumsignalis500andthevalueformaximumsignalis1500.
Note that the distinction between a direct acting and a reverseacting proportional control is made by
exchangingthevalueatminimumsignalwiththevalueatmaximumsignal.Thevalueatminimumsignalis


generated for low values of the sensed variable and the value at maximum signal for high values of the
sensedvariable.
3.6.5 132BANDConnections
The effect of AND connections is to permit a controller to generate an ON signal only when its own
switchingsignalANDallcontrollerscoupledtoitviaANDconnectionsaregeneratingONsignals.
To attach an AND connection click on the AND connection icon and drag a line from the controller
generating the signal to the controller receiving the signal. AND connections attached to the current
controllerarelistedinthedialog,andmaybedeletedusingtheRemovebutton.
Thistypeoflogicalcombinationisuseful,forexample,whenasystemhasadifferentmodeofoperation
in summer and winter, with automatic switchover as a function of outside air temperature. The
summer/winterswitchcanbedescribedastwocontrollers;furthercontrollerscanbeANDcombinedwith
thesummerorwintercontrollers.
ThesignalsfromallORconnectionsarecomputedbeforecombiningtheresultwithsignalsfromanyAND
connections.
3.6.6 133BORConnections
The effect of an OR connection to a controller with a sensor is to make the controller generate an ON
switching signal if either its own on/off controller OR the signals from one or more other attached
controllersisON.
To attach an OR connection click on the OR connection icon and drag a line from the controller
generating the signal to the controller receiving the signal. OR connections can be applied to all
controllerswithsensors(independent,differential,ordependent),butnottimeswitchcontrollers.
ORconnectionsdonotoverridetheTimeSwitchProfileforthecontroller.WhentheTimeSwitchProfileis
OFFtheswitchingsignalisOFF.
ThesignalsfromallORconnectionsarecomputedbeforecombiningtheresultwithsignalsfromanyAND
connections.
OR connections are less commonly used than AND connections. One application is in frost protection,
where they can be used to detect when any one of a set of rooms falls below a given temperature
threshold.
OR connections attached to the current controller are listed in the dialog, and may be deleted using the
Removebutton.
3.7 34BControllerAlgorithm
Shown below is a flow chart illustrating the decision making process followed by a controller. Not all
controllersuseeverystepoftheprocess.Forexample,atimeswitchcontrollerdoesnotuseasensorand
willproceeddirectlytothetimeswitchprofiledecision.
The independent controller with sensor and independent differential controller have tick boxes for set
pointandproportionalcontrol.Atleastoneoftheseboxesmustbetickedtoprovidesomefeedbackfor
thecontroller.Ifonlysetpointistickedthenthecontrolledcomponentwillattempttomaintainthevalue
at maximum control signal when the controller is ON and no control will be maintained when the


controller is OFF. If we assume a controller is being used to control airflow and both the set point and
proportionalcheckboxesaretickedthen:
WhenthecontrollerisOFF,flowatthisnodeiszero.
WhenthecontrollerisON:
o If under proportional control, the flow rate at this node will depend on the value
corresponding to the control signal coming from the proportional controller at any
instantintime.
o If not under proportional control, the flow rate at this node will depend on the value
specifiedforthemaximumcontrolsignal.
Normallytheonlyreasonforusingboththesetpointandproportionaltickboxesonthesamecontroller
is in order to allow the signal for the set point to be modified by AND or OR connection. However, an
exception applies in the case of radiators and chilled ceilings. If proportional control is used for these
componentsthecontrollermusthavethesetpointboxticked,anditscontrolparametersmustbesuchas
togiveanONsignalwhenthedeviceisscheduledtooperate.
Start
Vauleof variable
being sensed
Does thesensed variablein conjunction
with theset point return an ON signal?
Arethereany referenced OR controllers
currently in an ON state?
Does thecurrent timefall within the
TimeSwitch Profile?
NO YES (or no Set Point)
OFF Control Signal
NO
Arethereany referenced AND
controllers currently in an OFF state?
YES
ON Control Signal
YES
NO
NO
YES
Figure33:OnOffcontrollogic


3.8 35BAirflowcontrol
Inthecaseofairflowcontrol,thenodewheretheflowiscontrolledmaybeanywhereinthenetwork;itis
notnecessarytomakeanycontrolconnectionsatthefaninordertoestablishsystemairflowrates.Asan
exampleofcontrolsmoregenerally,thecontrolsaffecttheairflowasfollows:
A flow controller, in common with controllers of other system variables, has an on/off state that is a
governedbyitsprofileandanyANDorORconnectionsattachedtoit.
WhenthecontrollerisOFF,theflowatthecontrollednodeiszero.
Whentheon/offcontrollerisON:
Ifproportionalcontrolisset,theflowrateatthenodewilldependonthevaluecorresponding
tothecontrolsignalgeneratedbytheproportionalcontroller.
Ifproportionalcontrolisnotset,theflowrateatthenodewilldependonthevaluespecified
forthemaximumcontrolsignal.
Flowrateissubjecttoafurthertypeofcontrolthatdoesnotapplytoothercontrolledvariables.Flowrate
is not only switched between on and off states by the control profile it is modulated by it. Thus if the
percentage flow controller has a value of 70% at a particular time, the flow value calculated from the
control parameters will be multiplied by 0.7. This feature has been introduced to provide additional
flexibilityinflowspecification.
For other controlled variables, the Time Switch profile is interpreted as an on/off switch, being on when
the profile has a value greater than 50% and off otherwise. This principle applies whether or not
proportionalcontrolisused.
Onceacontrollerhasbeenusedtoestablishtheflowrateatanode,theprogramfeedsthatinformation
forwardsandbackwardsalongtheairdistributionpathuntilitreachesajunction(i.e.itassumestheflow
rate into any component equals the flow rate out, except at junctions). At junctions, the program must
knowtheflowratesatalltheconnectednodesexceptone.Itcanthencalculatetheunknownflowfrom
the known ones. In this way the program can calculate the flow rates at every point in the system,
providedtherearesufficientcontrollersappropriatelypositioned.
It is usually sufficient to place flow controllers only at those nodes which are immediately upstream of
rooms,andatoneothernodetoestablishtheratioofoutsidetorecirculatedair.Fromthis,theprogram
can work backwards through the system network calculating the flow rates elsewhere by addition and
subtractionatjunctions.
In constant volume systems the ratio of outside air can be controlled without the use of a damper
component by simply specifying the absolute value of flow rate at the outside air inlet. In variable air
volume systems it is typically necessary to use a Damper set component in the fresh air inlet to control
the percentage of outside air. At the node immediately downstream of a damper set, either percentage
flowcontrolfortheoutsideairbranchoratargetdrybulbtemperatureforthemixedairmustbeusedto
controltheoutsideairventilationrate(inasmuchasitexceedstheminimumsettinginthedamper).
In some systems for example dual duct systems additional flow controllers are required to specify
flowsinthesystembranches.
Ifflowratescannotbecalculatedatallnodes,anerrorwillbereported.Forthefullsetofrulesonsetting
flowratesseeAppendixA:Rulesforairflowspecification.


3.9 36BIndependentTimeSwitchController
Figure34:IndependentTimeSwitchControllers(withoutandwithanANDconnection)
This is the simplest type of controller. It controls a variable at a constant value at prescribed times
(subject to physical feasibility and the optional addition of AND connections). When it is attached
immediatelydownstreamofacomponentsuchasaheatingcoilitcontrolsthecoilinsuchawayastoset
the offcoil temperature, provided this is feasible given the oncoil condition, the airflow rate and the
coilscapacity.
Thetermindependentisusedtodenotethatthecontrollerfeedsitssignaldirectlyintoacomponent(in
thiscaseapreheatcoilandamixingdamperset).Independentcontrollersgeneratetwotypesofsignal:a
switchingsignalandanumericalsignal.Theswitchingsignalturnsthecontrolleddeviceonoroffandthe
numericalsignalindicatesthevaluetobesetforthecontrolledvariable.
The switching signal is ON when the time switch profile is ON (subject to provisos detailed below). The
numerical signal is the value of the parameter V at maximum signal, where V denotes the controlled
variable.
ANDandORconnectionsattachedasoutputsfromthecontrollermaybeusedtofeeditsswitchingsignal
intoothercontrollers.
IfANDconnectionsareinputtoanindependenttimeswitchcontrollertheyaffecttheswitchingsignalin
thefollowingway.
ThecontrollergivesanONsignalwhen,andonlywhen:
thetimeswitchprofileisON
and
alltheinputANDconnections(ifanyarepresent)areON
ANDandORconnectionsonlyconveyaswitchingsignal,notanumericalsignal.


Figure35:ExampleparametersforTimeSwitchController
In the example shown in Figure 34 the switching signal will be ON at all times, provided the switching
signal from the controller named Mixedair < 53 F = OFF (2 F deadband), which is coupled by an AND
connection,isalsoON.Thenumericcontrolsignalwillthenbe53F.
The independent time switch controller has been illustrated here first using temperature control as an
example. When the controlled variable is airflow rate, as in Figure 35, below) two special conditions
apply.


Figure36:IndependentControllerwithSensor
First, an airflow rate controller may be attached to any duct, where it will have the effect of setting the
flowtothenumericalcontrolsignal.
Second,thetimeswitchprofilehasaspecialfunctioninairflowcontrol.Ratherthanbeinginterpretedas
ON(asdenotedbyavaluegreaterthan50%)orOFF(othervalues),theprofileistreatedasamodulating
functionmultiplyingthenumericalcontrolsignal.Thisfeaturecanproveusefulasameansofsettingtime
varyingflowrates.
3.10 37BIndependentControllerwithSensor
This type of controller responds to a variable sensed at a system node. It includes a time switch and
options for both ON/OFF setpoint control and proportional control. These options can be used in
combination,ifdesired.
Figure37:IndependentControllerwithSensor
Thistypeofcontrollerrespondstoavariablesensedatasystemnode.InthecaseillustratedinFigure37,
thecontrollermonitorsroomtemperatureandfeedsitssignalintoaheatingcoilontheprimaryairsupply
totheroom.
After placing the controller, select the controlled node (indicated by an arrow), followed by the sensed
node.
The control parameters shown in Figure 38 are set up to provide proportional control. When the Time
Switch Profile is on, the offcoil temperature is adjusted between 28C and 14C the values set for the
parameters Drybulb temperature at minimum signal and Drybulb temperature at maximum signal as
the room air temperature varies over a proportional band centered on 20C (the midband) and with a
widthof2K(theproportionalbandwidth).
ThecontrolcharacteristicforproportionalcontrolisshowngraphicallyinFigure39.


Figure38ExampleparametersforIndependentControllerwithSensor
Figure39:Proportionalcontrolcharacteristic
Midband
Value at
minimum signal
Sensed
variable
Proportional
bandwidth
Value at
maximum signal
Controlled
variable


In the preceding example the setpoint control has been turned off in favor of proportional control. Set
point (on/off) control is an alternative to proportional control in which the signal fed into the controlled
device can take only two values: ON or OFF. The control characteristic for on/off control is shown in
Figure310.
Figure310:On/off(setpoint)controlcharacteristic
Thestateoftheon/offcontrollerswitchesbetweenONandOFFasthesensedvariablerisesthroughthe
upper limit or falls through the lower limit of the deadband. Within the deadband the signal retains its
current value. The characteristic gives rise to hysteresis: the value of the control signal in the deadband
dependsonthehistoryofthesensedvariableaswellasitscurrentvalue.
Theoverallshapeoftheon/offcharacteristicissetbytheparameterHighSensorInput.IfthisisOFF(asin
theFigure)thesignalisOFFathighvaluesofthesensedvariable.IfitisONthecharacteristicisinverted.
The on/off logical control signal is subject to modification by optional AND and OR connections feeding
intoit. Theseconnections alsogoverntheoperationofthecontrollerwhenproportionalcontrolisused.
ThecontrollergivesanONsignal(andoperatesinproportionalcontrolmode)when,andonlywhen:
thetimeswitchprofileisON
and
theon/offcontrolsignal,oratleastoneORconnection,isON,or
theon/off(setpoint)controlisnotticked
and
alltheinputANDconnections(ifanyarepresent)areON
ANDandORconnectionsattachedasoutputsfromthecontrollermaybeusedtofeeditsswitchingsignal
intoothercontrollers.
Set point Sensed
variable
Deadband
OFF
ON
Characteristic
illustrated for
High Sensor
Input =OFF
On/off control
signal


3.10.1 134BProportionalcontrolssequencing
Coordinationofzonecoolingairflowandcoolingsupplyairtemperature(SAT)resetatthesystemcooling
coil according to zone demand provides an instructive example of how and why controls should be
sequenced.Figures311,312,and313showfirstagraphplottingthefunctionsofthesecontrollerswith
respect to the room temperature and then the controller input dialogs for typical VAV cooling airflow
control and SAT reset. To keep the visualization clear, the nighttime setback and fan cycling for
unoccupiedhoursviatimedmidbandshavebeenomittedfromthegraphshownhere(seethesectionson
PrototypeSystemsandSystemSizingtowardtheendofthisuserguideformoreinformation).Thegraph
showsonlyhowthetwocontrollerswouldfunctionduringoccupiedhours.
Figure311:PlotoftypicalVAVcoolingairflowcontrolandSATreset.


Figure312:ControllerinputsfortypicalVAVcoolingairflowcontrol.
Figure313:ControllerinputsfortypicalVAVheatingairflowcontrol.


3.11 38BIndependentDifferentialController
Figure314:IndependentDifferentialController
Theindependentdifferentialcontrollertakesasitsinputthedifferencebetweenvariablessensedattwo
systemnodes.Inotherrespectsitbehaveslikeanindependentcontrollerwithsensor.
After placing the controller, select the controlled node (indicated by an arrow), followed by the two
sensed nodes. The order of selecting the sensed nodes is important: the input signal is the value at the
nodeselectedfirstminusthevalueatthenodeselectedsecond.Onthegraphicthefirstselectednodeis
shownattachingtothecontrolboxbelowthesecondselectednode.
Thistypeofcontrollerisusedlessoftenthanthedependentdifferentialcontroller.Inthecaseillustrated
inFigures314and315,itsensesthedifferencebetweenflowssensedintwonetworkbranchesandsets
athirdflowequaltothisdifferencewhenitispositive.


Figure315:ExampleparametersforIndependentDifferentialController
3.12 39BDependentTimeSwitchController
Figure 316: Dependent Time Switch Controller (shown with both with input AND connection and
outputORconnection)
This controller operates like the independent time switch controller, but is not directly attached to a
component.Itspurposeistogenerateaswitchingsignaltobefedintooneormoreothercontrollersvia
ANDandORconnections.ThecontrolsignalisafunctionoftheprofileandanyinputANDconnections.


3.13 40BDependentControllerwithSensor
Figure317:DependentControllerwithSensor(withoutputANDconnection)
This controller operates like an independent controller with sensor but is not directly attached to a
component.Itspurposeistogenerateaswitchingsignaltobefedintooneormoreothercontrollersvia
AND and OR connections. The switching signal is a function of the profile, the sensed variable any input
AND or OR connections. Proportional control is not an option with this type of controller, as it does not
generateanumericcontrolsignal.


Figure318:ExampleparametersforDependentControllerwithSensor
IntheexampleshowninFigure318,thecontrollermonitorsoutsidedewpointtemperatureandgivesan
ON signal when it exceeds 56F. In this case, there is no deadband, as the control will not influence the
outdooraircondition,andthustherewillbenopossibilityofafeedbackloop.
3.14 41BDependentDifferentialController
Figure319:DependentDifferentialController(withoutputANDconnection)
The dependent differential controller takes as its input the difference between variables sensed at two
systemnodes.Inotherrespectsitbehaveslikeadependentcontrollerwithsensor.Acommonuseforthis
type of controller is to detect whether fresh air is warmer or cooler than return air as the basis for
recirculationdecisions.
Afterplacingthecontroller,selectthetwosensednodes.
The order of selecting the sensed nodes is important: The input signal is given by the value at the first
nodeselectedminusthevalueatthesecondnodeselected.InFigure319,thefirstsensednodeisshown
attaching to the control box below the second sensed node. This will always be true, regardless of the
lefthandvs.righthandorientationofthedifferentialcontrollerbox.
In the case illustrated in Figure 319 and the first of the two example control dialogs in Figure 320, the
controllersensesthedifferencebetweentemperaturesinthereturnandfreshairinletductsandreturns
an ON signal if the return air enthalpy is greater than the outside air enthalpy. This signal is fed, via an
ANDconnection,intothedampersetcontrollingoutsideairintake.


Figure 320: Example parameters for Dependent Differential Controllers: The first (top) generates an ON
signalifEnthalpySensor1EnthalpySensor2=positivevaluegreaterthan0.01.Thisistypicalofdamper
controlsintendedtointroducemorethantheminimumoutsideaironlywhenithasalowerenthalpythan
the return air. The second (bottom) example generates an ON signal if the value at the outdoor air
Temperature Sensor is greater than or equal to the value at a room temperature sensor 3 F. This is a
typical control for mechanical fan systems in mixedmode building that are intended to operate only


whentheconditionsareunfavorablefornaturalventilation(e.g.,whentheoutsideairisnotatleast3F
cooler than the room air). This second example also includes OR connections to dependent controllers
withsensorsmeanttooverrideit(providinganONsignalwhenthiscontrollerwouldotherwisenotdoso)
ifeithertheroomtemperatureexceedsanelevatedsetpointoraCO2threshold,ineithercasesuggesting
that the windows are not open when they should be or that, despite favorable outdoor temperatures,
thereisnotenoughairmovementtomeetcoolingorventilationdemandviatheoperablewindows.
Note thatwhiletheSetpointvalue whensensingtemperature(DBT,WBT,or DPT) will beexpressed
inK(indicatingadifferential)wheninmetricunitsmode,inIPunitsthedifferentialwillbeexpressed
inF,asthereisnodifferentialIPunitfortemperature.


4 3BRoomUnitControllers
Figure41:Roomcomponentdialog,includingfacilitiesforselectingdefinedRoomUnitsandexamples
ofunittypes(notethatthisisforillustrationonly,asitwouldbeveryunusualtoplaceroomunitsfrom
allthreecategoriesinasinglespacewithinthemodel).
Room unit Types are initially placed in the Room component dialog and must be defined before this
action will be available for a given category of room unit. The room component can represent any
occupied or unoccupied 3D space in the model, including normal rooms or thermal zones as well as
heated or cooled ceiling or floor slabs. The userdefined types are effectively components sitting on a
shelf, but not active until placed in a room component. Each time a room unit type is placed within a
roomcomponent,anadditionalinstanceofthattypeiscreated.Theroomunitcontrollersbelowarethus
specifictoeachseparateinstanceofaparticularroomunittype.
The room unit controllers provide control over the particular device or unit instance with which theyre
associated. In the case of radiators and chilled ceilings, controls include scheduling of on/off


operation by timeswitch profiles, on/off control according to sensed variables, and proportional control
ofwatertemperatureand/orflowrateaccordingtosensedvariables.Asinglesurfacetemperaturesensor
per zone, as described above under sensed variables, is available for use with any room unit on/off or
proportionalcontrol.
4.1 42BHotWaterRadiatorControl
InApacheHVAC,thetermRadiatorscoversabroadrangeofhydronicheatingdevicesplaceddirectlyin
conditioned spaces. These generally include castiron radiators, radiant panel heaters, fintube
convectors,andsoforth.Radiatorscanalsobeusedasahydronicloopwithinaheatedslabzone,butcare
shouldbetakeninsuchcasestoappropriatelydefinethethetypeusingparametersthatwillrepresent
thepropertiesofjustthehydronicloopwithintheslab.
Figure42:Radiatorcontroldialogwithillustrativeinputsforafintubehydronicbaseboardheaterusing
setpointandsetbacktemperaturesforthermostaticon/offcontrolinoccupiedandunoccupiedhours,a
fixed supply water temperature, and proportional control of water flow rate to modulate the output of
the device. In this case sensors have been located in the local room, however, they can be located in
otherspacesoroutsideofthebuilding.


4.1.1.1 Reference
Enter a description of the controller. The reference is limited to 100 characters. It is for your use when
4.1.1.2 Radiatortypereference
Selectaradiatordeviceforplacementintheroomfromthelistofpreviouslydefinedtypes.
4.1.1.3 Heatsource
Selectthereferenceofthepreviouslydefinedheatsourcefromlist,whichwillservetheradiatorplacedin
theroomfromtheradiatorslist.
4.1.2 135BOn/offandsetpointcontrols
4.1.2.1 FlowforMaximumControlSignal
Entertheflowratethatcorrespondstothemaximumcontrolsignalfromthecontroller.Ifnoproportional
controlistobeused,entertheflowratethatoccurswheneverthisradiatorison.Notethatforreverse
acting proportional control where the sensed variable is room temperature (typical for heating devises),
thisvalueislowerthanthatinthewatertemperatureatminimumcontrolsignal.
4.1.2.2 WaterTemperatureforMaximumControlSignal
Enterthewatertemperaturewhichcorrespondstothemaximumcontrolsignalfromthecontroller.Ifno
proportional control was specified, enter the temperature of the radiator supply water. Note that for
reverseacting proportional control where the sensed variable is room temperature (typical for heating
devises),thisvalueislowerthanthatinthewatertemperatureatminimumcontrolsignal.
WarningLimits(C) 30.0to85.0
ErrorLimits(C) 0.0to250.0


4.1.2.3 Timeswitchprofile
4.1.2.4 Sensorlocation
4.1.2.5 Sensedvariable
4.1.2.8 Setpointvariation
4.1.2.9 Setpointorvariationprofile
4.1.2.10 Deadband
4.1.2.11 Highsensorinput(resultingon/offaction)
4.1.3 136BProportionalControllerforHotWaterFlowRate
4.1.3.1 ProportionalTemperatureController
Ticktheboxnexttothisitemtouseproportionalcontrolofthewatertemperatureintheradiator.Then
click on the item to enter and edit parameters for the proportional controller. If proportional control of
water temperature is not used, the water temperature will be fixed at the value given in the Temp at
MaxControlSignalinput.
4.1.3.4 Midbandvariation
4.1.3.5 Midbandorvariationprofile
4.1.3.6 Proportionalbandwidth
4.1.3.7 Maximumchangepertimestep
4.1.3.8 TemperatureforMinimumControlSignal
Enterthewatertemperaturethatcorrespondstotheminimumsignalfromtheproportionalcontroller.If
noproportionalcontrollerwasspecified,thevalueenteredherewillbeignored.Notethattheminimum
controlsignalisgeneratedwhenthesensedvalueisatorbelowthemidbandminushalftheproportional
band.
4.1.3.9 Radiantfraction(forsensor)
4.1.3.10 ANDReferences
4.1.3.11 ORReferences


4.2 ChilledCeilingControl
Enterdetailsofthecoldwaterflowratecontrolonthefirstline ofdataanddetailsforthesupplywater
temperaturecontrolonthesecondline.
Youcanmodellocalthermostaticallycontrolledunitsbyvaryingtheflowthroughtheunitaccordingtoan
on/off proportional controller combination sensing temperature in that room and fixing the water
temperatureonthesecondlineofdata.
Figure43:ChilledCeilingcontroldialogwithillustrativeinputs
4.2.1.1 ChilledCeilingTypeReference
Selectachilledceilingdeviceforplacementintheroomfromthelistofpreviouslydefinedtypes.
4.2.1.2 Chiller
Selectthechilledwaterloopthatwillservethechilledceilingdevice.


4.2.2 137BOn/offandsetpointcontrols
4.2.2.1 FlowforMaximumControlSignal
Entertheflowratethatcorrespondstothemaximumcontrolsignalfromthecontroller.Ifnoproportional
controlistobeused,entertheflowratethatoccurswheneverthischilledceilingdeviceison.Notethat
fordirectactingproportionalcontrolwherethesensedvariableisroomtemperature(typicalforacooling
device), this value is higher than that in the water temperature at minimum control signal, and for
reverseactingcontrol,itislower.
4.2.2.2 ChilledCeilingWaterTemperatureforMaximumControlSignal
Enter the water temperature that corresponds to the maximum control signal from the proportional
controller.Ifnoproportionalcontrollerwasspecified,enterthetemperatureofthechilledceilingsupply
water. Note that for direct acting proportional control where the sensed variable is room temperature
(typicalforacoolingdevice),thisvalueishigherthanthatinthewatertemperatureatminimumcontrol
signal,andforreverseactingcontrol,itislower.
4.2.2.3 Timeswitchprofile
4.2.2.8 Setpointvariation
4.2.2.9 Setpointorvariationprofile
4.2.2.10 Deadband
4.2.2.11 Highsensorinput(resultingon/offaction)
4.2.3 138BProportionalControllerforColdWaterFlowRate
Enterthereferenceofapreviouslydefined proportionalcontroller,ifapplicable.Leavethisfieldblankif
proportional control of flow rate is not used. In this case the flow through the chilled ceiling is taken as
thevalueinthe'Flowformaximumcontrolsignal'cellwhenevertheon/offcontrollerison.
4.2.3.1 FlowforMinimumControlSignal
Enter the water flow rate through the chilled ceiling that corresponds to the minimum signal from the
proportionalcontrollerspecifiedinthepreviouscell.Ifnoproportionalcontrollerwasspecified,anyvalue
enteredherewillbeignored.Notethattheminimumcontrolsignalisgeneratedwhenthevaluesensed
by the proportional controller is at or below the midband minus half the proportional band. Thus, a


reverseactingproportionalcontrolwouldhavealargervalueherethaninthe'Flowformaximumcontrol
signal'cell.
4.2.4 139BProportionalTemperatureController
Tickthebox nexttothisitemto useproportionalcontrolofthe watertemperatureinthe chilledceiling
unit. Then click on the item to enter and edit parameters for the proportional controller. If proportional
control of water temperature is not used, the water temperature will be fixed at the value given in the
TempatMaxControlSignalinput.
4.2.4.3 Midbandvariation
4.2.4.4 Midbandorvariationprofile
4.2.4.5 Proportionalbandwidth
4.2.4.6 Maximumchangepertimestep
4.2.4.7 TemperatureforMinimumControlSignal
Enterthewatertemperaturethatcorrespondstotheminimumsignalfromtheproportionalcontroller.If
noproportionalcontrollerwasspecified,thevalueenteredherewillbeignored.Notethattheminimum
controlsignalisgeneratedwhenthesensedvalueisatorbelowthemidbandminushalftheproportional
band.
4.2.4.8 Radiantfraction(forsensor)
4.2.4.9 ANDReferences
4.2.4.10 ORReferences
4.3 43BDirectActingRoomHeaterController
4.3.1.1 Reference
Enter a description of the controller. The reference is limited to 100 characters. It is for your use when


4.3.1.2 Heater
Select the reference of a previously defined direct acting heater for placement in the room from the
directactingheaterslist.
Figure44:Directactingheater/coolercontrol(proportionalcontrolbandrangesfromheatingoperation
atMinsignaltocoolingoperationatMaxsignal;SetpointcontroliseffectivelyforcedtoONsothatthe
TimeSwitchscheduleandtheProportionalControlwilldeterminetheoperation).
4.3.1.3 HeatOutputforMaximumControlSignal
Enter the heat (or cooling, as a negative value) output that corresponds to the maximum control signal
fromthecontroller.Note thatfordirectactingproportionalcontrolthisvalueisgreaterthanthatinthe
'Directheateroutputforminimumcontrolsignal'cell,andforreverseactingitissmaller.
4.3.1.4 SensorLocation
Thesensormaybeinternal(containedinaroom)orexternal.Anexternalsensorwouldbetheequivalent
ofaweathercompensatedsystem.Severaldirectactingheatersmayusethesameinternalroomsensor
e.g.allroomsonthewestofabuildingmaybecontrolledbyasinglesensor.


5 4BHVACWizard
5.1 44BHVACWizardInterface
TheHVACwizardenablestheusertoviewrecentlymodifiedsystemsorquicklycreateanumberofsimple
predefined ApacheHVAC models. The creation of the models assumes typical sizes for heat sources,
chillers, radiators, chilled surfaces, direct acting heater, heating coils, cooling coils and also sensible set
points for the controllers. These sensible defaults will need to be amended to the project specific
requirements.
While this facility has been made largely obsolete with the provision of considerably more detailed
prototype systems (see that section later in this user guide) and the advent of multiplexing (see that
sectionfollowingthisone),theverybasicHVACWizardsystemscanstillbeofuseforsimplifiedanalyses,
particularlyinbuildingswithveryfewrooms.
5.1.1 140BHVACWizarddialog
Figure51:HVACWizardpage1
5.1.1.1 CreateNewSystem
Selectthistocreateanewsystem


5.1.1.2 OpenRecentSystem
Selecttoopenarecentdocument
5.1.1.3 Next
SelecttoviewnextpageintheHVACWizard
5.1.1.4 Cancel
SelecttoexitfromtheHVACWizardwithoutopeningorcreatingaHVACsystem
5.1.2 141BHVACWizard:CreateNewSystem
Figure52:HVACWizardNewsystempage2
Selecttypeofsystemrequiredfromthelistofavailablesystems.


5.1.3 142BPage3oftheHVACWizard(CreateNewSystem)
Figure53:HVACWizard:NewSystempage3
5.1.3.1 AddZone
ClicktoaddroomstotheHVACsystem.Choosetherequiredroomfromthedropdownlist.
Notethatthisapproachshouldnotbeusedforsystemsthatwillbemultiplexed:Themultiplexstructure
provides stacked duplicates of all components and controllers on the original base layer in the
multiplexedregionoftheHVACnetwork(seesection6.MultiplexingHVACSystemNetworks).
5.1.3.2 Reset
ClicktoresettheHVACsystemtothestartingsinglezonesystem
5.1.3.3 Finish
ClicktocreatetheHVACsystem


5.1.4 143BHVACWizard:OpenRecentSystem
Figure54:RecentSystemsviewwithintheHVACWizard.
This dialog shows recently used, modified, or opened system models in the order in which they were
accessed. These files may be in any combination of currently available folders. Select a system to open
and click Finish. If the system selected is from a previous project or is to be significantly modified, it is
advisabletoproceedfromheretoSaveAsbeforemakinganychanges.


6 5BMultiplexingHVACSystemNetworks
Multiplexing allows users to more efficiently create, populate, modify, and edit large ApacheHVAC
networks, considerably reducing the project workload. Multiplexing gives users the ability to condense
anyApacheHVACnetworktoamoremanageableformat.
MultiplexToolbarbutton
The multiplex feature can be used on a total system level, just at the zone level, or for nearly any other
subsetofasystem(seerulesformultiplexes,below).Theexamplebelowisa4zonenetworkwithfancoil
units for each zone and a common outside air system. Figure 61 shows the network setup without the
multiplexfeature;figure62showstheequivalentmultiplexednetwork.
Figure61:NonmultiplexedApacheHVACnetwork
Figure 62: Equivalent ApacheHVAC network with Multiplex. The image on the right is depicting the
additionallayersthatareeffectivelyhiddenunderthecurrentlyselectedDisplayLayer.


6.1 45BCreatingaMultiplexOverview
AmultiplexiscreatedbyselectingtheMultiplexbuttonin the main toolbar & dragging the
greenmultiplexboxfromthebottomlefttothetoprightcornerofthedesiredmultiplexregion.Rulesfor
multiplexesandmultiplexedcontrollersareprovidedbelow,followingtheillustrationofbasicsteps.
Step 1: Position the green multiplex box at the bottom left corner of the area of network that you
wishtomultiplex.
Step2:Holdingdowntheleftmousebuttondragthegreenmultiplexboxfromthebottomlefttothe
toprightofthedesiredmultiplexregionandreleasethebutton.


Step3:Oncetherectangularboundaryforthemultiplexregionofthesystemhasbeendraggedoverthe
networkcomponents,theCreateMultiplexdialogwillappear.
Rooms or thermal zones in the model are assigned to multiplex layers either by adding layers and manually
selectingthespacesfromthePrincipalRoomdropdownlistoneachlayerorbyusingtheAssignfromRoom
Groupfeature.ThesearedescribedinmoredetailunderCreateMultiplex,below.


Step 4: Once a multiplex has been created, the network components and controllers can be populated with
input values appropriate to the zones and desired control functions on each layer. Calculated flow rates, set
points, cooling coil capacities, reference formula profiles, etc. can be entered into the network controllers
layerbylayer(Localediting),inallcurrentlyselectedlayers(Globalediting),orpastedfromaspreadsheetinto
a range of selected layers via a tabular Data Table edit view (Global editing). For autosizing of values within
multiplexedcomponentsandcontrollers,seetheSystemPrototypes&SizingsectionofthisUserGuide.


6.1.1 144BRulesforMultiplexesandcontrollerswithinthem
Whendefiningthemultiplexregion,somerulesmustbefollowed:
Themultiplexedregionofthenetworkmustcontainatleastoneroomcomponent.
Amultiplexboundarymustnotabutoroverlapanexistingmultiplex.
Itmustsatisfytherulesforcontrollersinamultiplex,asfollows;
1. Acontrollerisinamultiplexifitscontrolboxisinsidethemultiplexboundary.
2. Anycontrolleroutsideamultiplexmayonlysenseorcontrolnonmultiplexednodes.
3. A controller inside a multiplex can sense and control any nodes inside or outside the
multiplex.
4. Acontrollerinsideamultiplexmaynotsenseandcontrolnodesinanothermultiplex.
5. AND or OR connections cannot connect a controller in one multiplex to a controller in
anothermultiplex.
A multiplex must not contain any sections of a network that consist only of connectors (see
Figure63below).
Any connection between multiplexes must contain at least one component or junction so that
nodescanbegenerated(seeFigure63below).
Figure63:Disalloweduseofconnectorsegmentsthroughamultiplexandbetweenmultiplexes:
Figure63providesexamplesofnetworkbranchesconsistingsolelyofconnectingsegmentsthatarenot
permitted within a multiplex. In cases such as that shown on the left, either reroute the connectors
around the anticipated multiplex region or move the controller box downwards so that the multiplex
with not overlap the upper path. Direct connections between multiplexes consisting solely of
connecting segments (straight or elbow), such as illustrated on the right-hand side of this figure,
are not permitted. The network must be revised so that there is a junction or other component
between the multiplexes.


Note: It will be common to have multiplelayer instances of a controller pointing to one component
control node. In such cases, the controller will compete for or vote on the value of the controlled
variableateverysimulationtimestep.Thevaluethatprevailsdependsuponthecontrolledvariableand
typeof component being controlled.Forexample, while thehighesttemperaturewillprevailin thecase
ofaheatingcoil,thelowesttemperaturewillprevailforacoolingcoil.
Warning: Where multiple airflow controls are present on one branch, these must all point to the same
nodeif their operationwillevercompeteforcontrol.Anattempt tosimultaneouslycontrolairflowfrom
twodifferentnodesonasinglebranchwillresultinanoverconstrainedflow.
6.2 46BCreateMultiplex
When a new multiplex is created by defining its boundary, the Create Multiplex dialog is displayed. The
nameanddescriptionofthemultiplex,thenumberoflayerscontainedinthemultiplex,andtheprincipal
roomassignmenttoeachlayerareenteredhere.
6.2.1 145BDescription
Enter a name and description here to make it easier to identify the multiplex and manage complex
systems.
6.2.2 146BEditingMode
Editparameterswithincomponentsandcontrollersononelayeratatime(Localediting)oraselectionof
layers(Globalediting).


6.2.3 147BLayers
Assign from Room Group, as described the section dedicated to that below, is the most efficient way to
add and populate the correct number of layers in a system multiplex. Alternatively, simply select the
number of layers to be added to or inserted into the multiplex, then click Insert Layer (new layers are
insertedattheselectedlayer)orAddLayer(layersareappendedtothebottomofthelist).
Select layers then click Delete Layers to remove them from the list (note it is not possible to delete all
layersfromamultiplex)
The Ctrl and Shift keys are used to add or remove individual layers to or from the current selection set
andtoholdtheviewfromscrollingwhentherearemorelayersthancanbeviewedatonce.
6.2.3.1 LockLayerSelection
When multiple layers are selected (selection must be set while in Global Edit mode) tick Lock Layer
Selectiontoavoidaccidentallyeditinganunselectedlayere.g.,afterswitchinglayersonthetoolbar.The
lockedstateappliestobothGlobalandLocaleditmodes.


6.2.4 148BPrincipalRooms
The first room in the multiplex network is nominated as the Principal Room and
indicatedasagreenroomcomponentonthenetwork.
EachlayerinthemultiplexisassignedaPrincipalRoomtohelpidentifythelayer.
DoubleclickthePrincipalRoomcolumnforanyLayertoselectthePrincipalroom
fromthelistofroomsinthemodel.
Each layer in a multiplex can have more than one Room component on it. All
layers, however, must include the same number of Room components. Three
examplesofthisareprovidedbelow.
Room components can have duplicate assignments across multiple layers. This is
mosttypicallyusedfornonprincipalrooms(seeexamples1and3below).
Nonprincipal room components can remain unused on selected layers. This requires only that they are
setviatheirRoomassignmenttoactasanAdiabaticduct,ratherthanbeingassociatedwitharoomor
zoneinthe3Dmodel(seeexamples1and2below).
To change a room component on the network from a nonprincipal room (blue outline) for all layers to
thePrincipalRoomforalllayers,doubleclickthedesiredroomcomponentandthenticktheboxnextto
Principal Room within the Room dialog. As this is equivalent to adding or deleting a component, the
determination of the component that is the Principal Room must be consistent across all layers in a
multiplex.
Whenincludingmorethanoneroomcomponentoneachmultiplexlayer,theprincipalRoomistypically
theoccupiedspacewithwhichathermostatorothersensorsandcontrolsareassociated.
Example 1: It is common to have a return air (RA) plenum void in commercial spaces. This should be
modeledasaseparatethermalzoneovertopofallofthezonesitserves.Theremay,forexample,beone
plenumforeachfloorofthebuilding.TheseRAplenumswouldberepresentedbyanonprincipalroom
component directly downstream of the occupied space on all multiplex layers. However, the Principal
Room component on each layer will typically be assigned a different space in the model. Therefore, if
there were one RA plenum for entire 1
st
floor, it would need to be associated with all occupied thermal
zonesonthatfloor,andthusthesameRAplenumspaceinthemodelshouldbeassignedtotheplenum
roomcomponentsoneachofthelayersthatcontainaroomonthefirstfloorthathasareturnairgrill.
Iftherearespacesonthefirstfloorinthisexamplethathavesupplyairandeitheraductedreturnorno
return(perhapstheyareexhausted),theywouldnotbecoupledwiththeRAplenum.Forlayersassigned
tothesespaces,theRAplenumcomponentshouldbesetasanAdiabaticduct.


Example2:Theremaybeaprincipalroomthatcontainsathermostat(sensors
andcontrollers)andanadjacentroom,suchasalavatory,thatdrawstransfer
airfromtheprincipalroomandhasnothermostatorothersensorsassociated
withit.Theremust,however,bemeansofdeterminingtheairflowthroughit,
even if the flow is intentionally set to zero. Typically, such rooms will have a
path to either an exhaust fan or a return fan. This will draw air from an
adjacentspace,asinthelavatoryintheillustrationtotheright.
As it is very unlikely that there would be a lavatory or similar space drawing
transfer air adjacent to the Principal Room on every layer, this nonprincipal
roomcomponentwouldbesetasanAdiabaticductonalllayersforwhichitis
toremainunused.
Example 3: In the case of an underfloor air distribution
(UFAD) system, each layer would typically include the
UFADsupplyplenum,anoccupiedzone,astratifiedzone,
and possibly also a returnair (RA) plenum. The occupied
spaces would normally be the Principal Room on each
layer. As the UFAD plenum would be before this on the
network, the component representing the occupied zone
on the network would need to be changed from a non
principal room to the Principal Room for all layers, as
describedabove.
As with the RA plenum in Example 1, each UFAD supply
plenumservingmorethanonezonewouldbeassignedto
the designated UFAD plenum component on more
multiple layers (the same layers as the occupied zones it
serves).
For occupied zones served by the UFAD plenum, there
would be a corresponding stratified zone assigned to a
nonprincipal room component downstream of the
Principal Room. If there is an RA plenum, this would be
yet another nonprincipal room downstream of the
stratifiedzone.
If there are spaces receiving supply air from the same
airside system but not via the UFAD plenum, the UFAD
plenum would be set to Adiabatic on those layers.
Similarly, if those or other spaces were to be fully mixed
zones using overhead diffusers, the stratified zone room
componentwouldbesettoAdiabaticonthoselayers.


6.2.5 149BAssignfromRoomGroup
The Assign from Room Group tool canbe used to assign rooms to selected layers. It can also be used to
automaticallyaddlayerstothemultiplexforeachroominaselectedroomgroupi.e.,tocreateexactly
thenumberofadditionallayersthatwillberequiredforallroomsorthermalzonesinthegroup.
WheninGlobalEditingmode,clicktheAssignfromRoomGroupbutton.ThisopenstheAssignfromRoom
GroupdialogshowingtheGroupingSchemesintheproject.
SelectaGroupingSchemeandRoomGroupthenclicktheOKbuttontoassigneachroomorthermalzone
intheselectedGroupasaPrincipalRoomonamultiplexlayer.
Iftherearemoreroomsinthegroupthanlayersinthemultiplex,theoptionisgiventocreatelayersfor
eachadditionalroom.Thisisanefficientwaytoaddlayers.
ClickYestoaddtherequirednumberoflayers.Thisisanefficientwaytoaddlayerstoamultiplex.Click
Notoassigntheroomsfromthegrouptojusttheexistinglayersinthemultiplex.
When the OK button is clicked to complete multiplex creation, the Editing mode and layer selection will
bereflectedinthemultiplextoolbarandsubsequentedits.


Room(s)assignedThecolumnofcheckboxesattherighthandsideoftheCreate/EditMultiplexdialog
indicateswhetherornotallRoomcomponentsonagivenmultiplexlayerhavebeenassigned.Thecheck
boxes are not usereditable, but will include a check mark when assignments are complete for a layer.
AssigninganAdiabaticductratherthananactualspaceinthemodeltoaRoomcomponentdoescountas
anassignment.
6.3 47BEditMultiplex
6.3.1 150BMultiplexToolbar
Whenanycellinamultiplexregionisselectedtheotherwisegreenmultiplexboundaryiscoloredredand
themultiplextoolbarisactive.
6.3.1.1 EditMultiplex
ThisbuttonopenstheEditMultiplexdialog.
6.3.1.2 DisplayLayer
Thecurrentlyactivelayerisdisplayedhere.Thiscanbeidentifiedbylayernumberandprincipalroom.Itis
thelayerthatonecanbealteredinLocalEditmodeandisthelayerthatwillbeviewedandservesasthe
Global Edit interface (prior to entering the Data Table edit view) when in Global Edit mode. Toggle
throughlayersusingthearrowbuttonsorexpandthedropdowntoselectalayerfromthelist.
Thecurrentdisplaylayercanbechangedwhilearoom,component,orcontrollerdialogisactive,andthe
contentsofthatdialogwillupdatetoreflectthenewlyselectedlayer.
6.3.1.3 EditMode
ChoosebetweenLocalorGlobalEditing.
LocalEditModeeditsapplyonlytothecurrentDisplayLayer.
Global Edit Mode edits apply to all currently selected layers, as shown in the Create/Edit multiplex
dialogandonthemultiplextoolbar.
6.3.2 151BEditMultiplexDialog
When the Edit Multiplex button is clicked the Edit Multiplex dialog is displayed. This is used to add or
remove layers, assign principal rooms, and select layers for editing in the same way as the Create
Multiplexdialogdescribedearlier.
6.3.2.1 LockLayerSelection
When multiple layers are selected (selection must be set while in Global Edit mode) tick Lock Layer
Selectiontoavoidaccidentallyeditinganunselectedlayer.ThelockedstatewillapplytobothGlobaland
Localeditmodes.
When cycling through layers on the multiplex toolbar while the selection is locked, a warning will be
displayed if any locked layer is selected. The user has the option to unlock that layer or revert to the
previouslyselectedcurrentdisplaylayer.


6.4 48BEditingComponentsandControllersinmultiplex
Once a multiplex has been created, the components and controllers within it can be edited in much the
samewayasthoseonanyotherpartofthenetwork.
Clickonceinsidethemultiplexregionoronanycomponentwithinittomakeitactive.Thiswillupdatethe
toolbar with information regarding the current display layer, selection set, and editing mode for that
multiplex. It is then possible to edit the components, controllers, and connectors within the multiplex
much as is done outside a multiplex; however, edits are applied according to the layer selection set and
edit mode. Select Local or Global Edit mode from the multiplex toolbar then edit properties of the
networkcomponents.
Note:Itisimportanttobeawarewheneditingwithinamultiplexthat,atleastpresently,changescannot
beundone.
Note: Because all layers must contain the same set of components, controllers, and connectors in the
same layout (though not with the same settings, profiles, etc.), moving, copying, and deleting any item
withinthemultiplexregionmustbedoneinGlobalEditmodewithalllayersselected.
In Local edit mode the properties for the controller or component on the current Display layer are
displayedandcanbemodified.
ThepropertiesdisplayedwillbeupdatedifadifferentDisplayLayerisselectedfromthemultiplextoolbar
viaeitherthedropdownlistorup/downarrows.
In Global edit mode, changes to controller or component parameters that are made in the normal (non
tabularedit)dialogareappliedtoalllayersinthecurrentselection.Globaleditsapplymorebroadlyinthe
caseofRoomUnitcontrollers(seenextsectionbelow).
6.4.1 152BTabularEditing
WheninGlobalEditmode,clickthebutton containingthenameorlabelforanyvariableinputfieldin a
component or controller dialog to use the tabular editing Data Table view to efficiently view and edit
valuesonmultiplelayers(seetheTabularEditingsectionbelowformoreinformation).
6.4.2 153BTouchEdits
When editing a controller or component in Global edit mode, doubleclicking in any variable input field
willupdatethatvariableinallotherlayerstomatchthevalueinthedisplaylayer.Thevariableinputfield
will be colored orange to indicate that a Touch Edit has been completed. Clicking OK applies all Touch
Editsmadeinthecurrentdialog(thesecanbeverifiedintheDataTableeditview).Cancelingoneormore
TouchEditsinacomponentorcontrollerdialogisdonebyCancellingoutofthedialog.
6.4.3 154BEditRoomComponentInstancesandRoomUnitControllers
RoomUnitcomponentinstances(Radiators,DirectActingHeaters,ChilledCeilings)andtheircontrollers,
as located within multiplexed rooms, can be edited locally or globally. Room Unit controllers should
generallybeeditedinLocalEditmode,exceptwhenreplicatingacontrollerandALLofitssettings.Thelist
ofroomunitsinanygivenroomissortedfirstbyUnitType,withmultipleinstancesofaRoomUnitType
groupedtogether.
Globaleditstoroomunitswithinamultiplexapplytothecurrentlyselectedroomunitandthoseinother
selectedlayersthatareofthesametypeandpositionwithintheorderedlistofunitsofthattype(ifsucha


roomunitexistsintheroomsontheotherlayers).ClickingOKin aRoomUnit controllerwheninGlobal
Edit mode will apply not only newly edited values but ALL inputs and settings in that dialog to all
correspondingroomunitcontrollers.
IntheRoom dialog,the columntotheleftoftheroomunitsdescriptionindicatestheunittypeforeach
particular room unit instance in that room. This type plays an important role: Whenever a room unit is
selectedforeditingordeletingwhileinGlobalEditmode,itisassociatedwithcorrespondingroomunits
in each of the other selected layers by means of its type and position within the ordered list of units of
thattype.Forexample,editingthesecondinstanceofradiatortypeRad1_14kWintheprincipalroom
onthedisplaylayerwouldresultintheeditsbeingappliedtothesecondradiatoroftypeRad1_14kW
withintheprincipalroomoneachcurrentlyselectedlayerinthemultiplex.
6.4.3.1 Copyingonlymodifiedparameters
Asofversion6.3,onlythoseparametersjustmodifiedonthedisplaylayertobecopied tothematching
Roomunits(ifany)inallselectedlayerswhenOKisclicked.
155B
Figure64:InGlobalEditmodetherearetwoOKbuttonsformultiplexedRoomunitcontrollerdialogs,
as shown here. OK & Copy All replicates the data in all the controller fields on the display layer to
controllersforcorrespondingroomunitsonothercurrentlyselectedlayers,whereasOKreplicatesonly
thedatathathasjustbeenmodifiedandnotyetsaved.
6.5 49BTabularEditing
TabularEditingallowsinputvaluesforcomponentsandcontrollersonalllayerstobereviewedoredited
inadatatableformat.WheninGlobalEditmodewithmorethanonelayercurrentlyselected,openthe
properties dialog of any controller or component then select the variable to be edited. This is not yet
supportedforRoomUnitcontrollers.
6.5.1.1 MultipleEdit
To select multiple variables for tabular editing, hold the Shift key and select the desired variables; then
click the Multiple Edit button. This opens a data table displaying the values for the selected
parameter(s)and/orvariable(s)ofthecomponentorcontrolleroneachselectedlayer.


Figure65:IllustrationofMultipleEditfunctioninthedialogofamultiplexedcomponentorcontroller


6.5.2 156BPastetoDataTableusingtabulareditview
Values froma spreadsheet or commaseparated value (CSV) file can be pasted directly into aData Table
columnintabulareditview.Youcanthusupdateuniquevaluesforaselectedvariableonmultiplelayers.
Selectandcopysourcedatafromacolumnorrow,thenselecttheuppermostvariablecellyouwouldlike
toeditintheDataTableandclickthePastebuttontotherightofthetable.Thepastewillbeginwiththe
selected cell and continue downwards, entering new values on each layer up to the total number of
valuespresentinthecopiedselectionset.


Figure66:Illustrationofusingcopy&pastefromaspreadsheettotabulareditview
Figure67:Copy&pastefromaCSVfiletotabulareditview
Note:IfthePasteisperformedwithoutfirstclickingonanycellintheDataTable,andmultiplevariables
have been selected for inclusion in the Data Table view, the copied values will be assigned to the last
variable column (at the right side of the table). The paste will begin with the current Display Layer (row
highlightedinyellow)andcontinuedownwards,enteringnewvaluesoneachlayeruptothetotalnumber
ofvaluespresentinthecopiedselectionset.
Note:Itispossibletopastenumericortextcharacters.However,anypastedtextmustexactlymatchthe
availableoptionsforthatinput(e.g.,Profilenamesmustexactlymatchthenamesofavailableprofilesin
theApProdatabase;BoilernamesmustexactlymatchthosedefinedintheHeatSourcesdialog;etc.).
Note:TabularEditingofRoomUnitcontrollerparametersandinputdataisnotyetsupported.RoomUnit
controllersshouldbeeditedinLocalEditmodewithjustoneexception:UseGlobalEditmodewhenthe
intent is to apply ALL settings within a particular Room Unit controller to ALL other controllers for that
unitTypewithinthecurrentlyselectedRooms.


6.6 50BNodeNumbering
Attheboundaryofamultiplexanextranodenumberisgenerated.Thisishidden,asiteffectivelyincludes
both a node on the outside of the boundary (corresponding to the last labeled node outside the
multiplex) and another node for each layer on the inside of the boundary, corresponding to the nearest
labeled node on the inside. Together, these hidden nodes form a junction where the network branches
intolayersi.e.,fromlayerzeroontheoutsidetoeachthenumberedlayersofthemultiplex.
Intheexamplebelow,themultiplexjunctionexistsbetweennodes4and13andbetweennodes14and7:
Figure68:Nodenumberinginamultiplexedsystem
Node numbers are not always sequential across multiplex boundaries. This is merely an artifact of how
themultiplexednetworkishandledbythesoftware,andmaychangeinfutureversions.
AsviewedeitherinVistaResultsorinanerrormessage,nodenumberswithinamultiplexedApacheHVAC
networkarenumbered1,2,3,asinanormalnetwork,butwiththelayernumberappendedtoindicate
the layere.g., the nodes on layer zero are 1/0, 2/0, 3/0, and on layer 1 are 1/1, 2/1. 3/1, and on
layer2are1/2,2/2,3/2,.andsoforth.
Note: Some nonmultiplexed nodes may be numbered 1/ , with layer zero being assumed. This is most
likelytobeseeninamessageregardinginsufficientflowdefinition,overconstrainedflow,orsimilar.


6.7 51BDeleteMultiplex
A multiplex can be demultiplexed (collapsed to just the current display layer) or deleted by selecting
anycellinthemultiplexregiononthenetworkdiagramthenclickingtheDeletebutton(trashcan)onthe
toolbar.
Figure 69: When demultiplexing or deleting a multiplex, a popup dialog requires a choice between
deletingtheentiremultiplexandallitemswithinit,orsimplydemultiplexing.
6.7.1.1 Deletemultiplex
Themultiplexisremovedandallcomponentsandcontrollerswithinthemultiplexarecompletelydeleted
fromthenetwork.
6.7.1.2 Demultiplex
The multiplex is removed but the current Display Layer is retained in the network (on layer zero). This is
the default action. Prior to demultiplexing, check the currently selected layer if you intend to retain a
layercontainingaparticularsetofinputstocomponentsandcontrollers.


7 6BSystemLoads,Ventilation,andAutosizing
7.1 52BOverview
PredefinedprototypeApacheHVACsystemscanbeimportedandautosizedatboththezoneandsystem
levels.Thesetwolevelsofloadsanalysisandautosizingcanalsobeappliedsuccessfullytoabroadrange
of usermodified variants of the predefined prototype systems. And, all systems, including any user
definedcustomconfiguration,canbeautosizedwithrespecttomostsystemandplantequipment.
Forpredefinedsystemsandvariantsthereof,theprocesssizesabroadrangeofsystemelementsintwo
stagesfirst at the room/zone level, then at the system/plant levelwith opportunity for user
intervention between the two. ASHRAE Loads calculations are linked to target ApacheHVAC systems for
bothstagesofthesizingprocess:
Zonelevel loads and sizing must be completed either manually or through the autosizing
procedure described below. The resulting values for airflows and other controller settings
mustbeassignedtotheHVACsysteminorderforthespacestobeadequatelyconditioned.
Systemlevel loads and sizing, which applies to coils, fans, chillers, DX cooling, boilers, heat
pumps,andotherheatsources,mustbecompletedinordertoappropriatelyscaleequipment
capacitiesandperformancedatatoobtainappropriateperformanceandenergyconsumption.
7.2 53BZonelevelloadsandsizing
The zonelevel autosizing process (Room Load Calculations step in the System Prototypes & Sizing
navigator,associatedLoadsdataspreadsheet,andAssignSystemParametersandRoomSizingDatastep
inthenavigator)isfocusedonsettingairsidecontrolinputsforthefollowingparameters,dependingupon
thespecificsystemtype:
zonelevelairflowforVAVboxes,fancoilunits,fanpoweredboxes,activechilledbeams,etc.
outsideairventilationratesaswellasCO2sensorcontrolthresholds,whereDCVisemployed
exhaustfansandinterzonaltransferairflows(typicallyasmakeupairforexhaustedspaces)
outsideaireconomizerdamperminimumflowratesanddrybulbtemperaturehighlimits
energyrecoveryengagement,sensibleandlatenteffectiveness,andenergyconsumption
coilleavingairtemperatures,temperatureresets,andzonehumiditycontrol
Forprototypesystems,thisprocessalsoprovidesmeansofengagingordisengagingsystemfeatures,such
asoutsideaireconomizersandairsideenergyrecovery,fromwithinsystemleveldialogs,inaadditionto
manually changing these within the Loads Data spreadsheet for each system or within the ApacheHVAC
airsidenetworkitself.Thecontrollersinpredefinedsystemsalsousepredefinedcontrolprofiles(which
you may also use as you see fit). This allows systemoperating schemes for unoccupied hourse.g.,
temperaturesetbackonly,setbackwithfancycling,orsetbackwithfancyclingbutnooutsideairtobe
selectedalongwithsystemschedulesandsetpoints.Whiletheseparametersandoperatingschemescan
bemanuallychanged,thedialogsprovideadegreeofautomationforpredefinedsystems.
WhileotherwiseaccessibletoanyApacheHVACuser,theASHRAE90.1PerformanceRatingMethod(PRM)
Navigator in the VE provides additional interface dialogs and tools for ASHRAE 62.1 ventilation rates,
PLEASE NOTE: This section of the ApacheHVAC User Guide is presently still
under construction. Please be sure to check for updates, which will be posted
approximately weekly until the VE 6.3 update of the user guide is complete.


exhaustairflowsettings,andapplicationofPRMBaselinefancurveinputs.ThePRMNavigatorinterfaceis
describedinaseparateuserguide.Themoremanualapproachtotheseparametersisdescribedbelow.
IMPORTANT: Through version 6.3, the automated zonelevel sizing procedure requires that the target
ApacheHVACsystemfileisnamedproposed.asp.ThisfilenamemustbeinplacepriortotheRoomLoad
Calculations step in the System Prototypes & Sizing navigator. If not, the sizing process will not populate
the Loads Data spreadsheet according to the rooms or zones assigned to the correct target system. The
targetsystemnameofproposed.aspmustalsoremaininplace(orbereinstated)fortheAssignsystem
parameters and room sizing data action in the sizing navigator. The ApacheHVAC file name can be
subsequentlychangedwithoutconsequence.Forversion6.4anonward,thisnamingconventionwillnot
berequired,norisitrequiredfortheSystemlevelloadsandsizingprocessdescribedbelow.
7.3 54BSystemlevelloadsandsizing
System autosizingthe second sizing stageruns the selected ApacheHVAC system for the rooms or
zonestowhichitisassignedusingthecontrollersettingpresentlyinplacetodeterminedesignsizingfor
systemandplantequipment.Thisincludesheatingandcoolingcoils,fans,boilers,chillers,DXcooling,air
sourceheatpumps,andsimilarheating&coolingsources.
System load calculations and sizing can be run either directly from ASHRAE Loads dialog or from the
SystemloadcalculationsactionitemintheSystemPrototypes&Sizingnavigator.Ineithercase,theuser
isrequiredtoselectatargetsystemandprovidedtheoptionofreportingresultsandupdatingthetarget
systemequipmentsizing(thisisthedefaultoutcome)orjustreportingthesystemsloadsresults.Further
description is provided in the System load calculations subtopic of the System Prototypes & Sizing
workflownavigatorsectionbelow.
This stage of the sizing process can be applied to systemlevel equipment for any (predefined or user
defined) ApacheHVAC system. Unlike the zonelevel loads & sizing process, systemlevel sizing does not
requireaspecifictargetfilename.
Figure71:ApacheHVACsystemloadsanalysistypeinASHRAELoadsdialog


7.4 55BSystemPrototypes&Sizingworkflownavigator
TheSystemPrototypes&SizingNavigatorwalksusersthroughtheprocessofApacheHVACsystemsetup
and sizing. It facilitates acquiring prototype systems, selecting among them, assigning rooms/zones, and
then entering schedules of operation, control set points, setback control strategies, and other common
design parameters. As with all other VE workflow navigators, this navigator supports entering notes for
laterreferenceandtrackingthecompletionofeachstep.
System Prototypes & Sizing Navigator provides a twostage (room/zone level then system/plant level)
autosizing process that includes tools for calculating ASHRAE 62.1 ventilation rates, numerous
opportunities for user intervention, and ultimately system sizing reports. System performance can then
beanalyzedusingthefullarrayofVEsimulationtools.Predefinedsystemscanalsobefurthermodifiedin
ApacheHVACandresizedatoneorbothlevels,asneeded.Thisfacilitatesmoreefficientexplorationand
comparisonofsystemalternativesinallstagesofdesign.
Figure72:SystemPrototypes&SizingNavigator
7.4.1 157BSystemPrototypes&Sizingworkflowsummary
The navigators provide a stepbystep process to guide the user through load calculations, sizing, and
generating system sizing reports in preparation for simulation. The summary of this process below is
followedbymoredetaileddescriptionsofeachstep.
Acquire prototype systems: The user is provided a set of detailed prototype HVAC system
modelstochoosefrom,andeachofthesecanbecopiedandmodified.Whilecustomsystems
can be created from scratch, autosized systems taking advantage of this process must either
beaprototypesystemorbebasedupononeoftheprototypesystemsprovided.Theextentof
modifications to a system that can be made without disabling the autosizing capability is
significantanddependsmainlyuponthelevelofuserexperiencewithApacheHVAC.


Modelpreparation:Havingdefinedinternalgains,assignedconstructions,andselecteddesign
weatherdata,theusersetsuproomorzonegroupsinModelIT,usingagroupingschemethat
organizesspacesinthemodelaccordingtothesystemsthatwillservethem.Groupingspaces
according to system assignment facilitates efficient addition and assignment of zones to
systemsinApacheHVAC.Whenprototypesystemsareacquiredviathenavigator,asetofpre
defined grouping schemes, a couple of typical thermal templates with internal gains,
ventilation rates, and infiltration, required HVAC operating profiles, related formula profiles,
andtheblankLoadsDataspreadsheetareprovidedasastartingpoint.
Prototype system: Clicking this link opens the acquired set of prototype systems in
ApacheHVACwiththefilenamesettoproposed.asp,asisrequiredforthezonelevelsizing
processinVE6.3(for6.4andonward,theusersimplyselectsatargetsystem).Inmostcases,
the user will delete unwanted systems at this stage; however, it is possible to retain unused
systems in the ApacheHVAC file, as described below. In version 6.4 onward, however, this is
notnecessary,assystemsareindividuallyloadedintotheApacheHVACfilefromalibrary.
Assignrooms/zones:TheuserusestheEditMultiplexfacilityinApacheHVACtoassignrooms
orzonesfromgroupsinthemodeltoselectedpredefinedsystemsorcopiesthereof.
Systemschedules:Thisdialogisprovidesinputsforsystemoperatingschedulesandsetpoints
in terms of occupied and unoccupied times, setback temperatures, daily pre and post
occupancy space conditioning, and afterhours system operating schemes. It also establishes
setpointsandplantoperatingprofilesforcheckingunmetloadhours(viaVistaResultsforany
project;includedinautomaticallygeneratedreportsifusingthe90.1PRMNavigator).
Room/zonelevel load calculations: After assigning zones to a system or systems, the user
clicks this link to initiate zonelevel loads calculation using the ASHRAE heatbalance method.
Thisrunsasimulationofthemodelwiththedesignweathercondition.Thesimulationisquasi
dynamicwithrespecttoheatingloads(theoutdoordesigntemperatureisheldconstant)and
fully dynamic with respect to cooling loads. It uses an ideal system with unlimited capacity
and simplified controls that meets the space temperature setpoints under all conditions.
Selecting Room Load Calculations within the System Prototypes & Sizing Navigator runs the
ASHRAE Loads analysis much the same as can otherwise be done from ApacheThermal,
however a separate editable spreadsheet will be generated for each ApacheHVAC system in
theproposed.aspfile.Thesetofsystemspecificloadsandventilationdataspreadsheetsare
populatedwithzonelevelloadresultsandsavedwithintheprojectdirectory.
System parameters: Systemlevel parameters, such as coil leavingairtemperature settings,
operation as a 100% outsideair system, inclusion of energy recovery, and related inputs can
bechangedusingtheSystemParameterdialog.
AccessloadsdataspreadsheetandASHRAE62.1ventilation:Thislinkopentheprojectfolder
of spreadsheets just created and updated by the last two steps for each system in the
proposed.asp file (or selected HVAC file after version 6.3). The Loads Data spreadsheet is
used to determine zonelevel airflows and ventilation requirements. It is also a repository for
othervaluesthatcanbeeditedandlaterassignedtosystemscomponentsandcontrollers.The
spreadsheet includes essential user inputs for oversizing factors, manipulating coderequired
minimum primary airchange rates, transfer airflow rates, basis for calculating maximum VAV
turndown, and other similar parameters. Editable values also include zone and system
specificinputstoASHRAE62.1outdoorairventilationcalculationsusingtheTable6.3method.
Assignsystemparametersroom/zonelevelsizingdata:Afterchanges(ifany)withintheloads
data spreadsheet for each system, this assigns component and controller inputs from the
spreadsheettotheirrespectiveApacheHVACsystemsintheproposed.aspfile.


Having assigned the system parameters and zonelevel sizing data to the systems, the user
remains free to open individual HVAC components and controllers or selected sets of
componentsandcontrollerswithinApacheHVACformanualeditingofcontrolparametersand
inputs. System, component, and controller configurations can also be substantially modified
without breaking the autosizing functionality. The user may thus resize the systems after
changes to either the building model or the HVAC systems. So long as individual autosized
values are manually overridden only within the spreadsheet, these overrides can be
maintainedinfuturesizingrunsandsizingdataassignments.
System/plantloadscalculationandsizing:Theidealizedsystemwithunlimitedcapacitythat
runs for the zonelevel load calculations and sizing is replaced by the fully detailed system(s)
withintheselectedApacheHVACfile(thiscanbeanyHVACnetworkfile).Systemsrunasthey
have been set up within ApacheHVAC. This step populates systemlevel information in each
system spreadsheet, generates system loads and sizing reports, and directly updates sizing
relatedsystemlevelandplantequipmentinputswithintheselectedApacheHVACfile.
Sizing reports: The action generates and displays reports for specific sizing runs. The reports
includesizingresultsforthesystemplant,systemequipment,andprimary
ASHRAE 62.1 report: This action opens a report of ventilation rates and indicates whether
these meet or exceed ASHRAE 62.1 requirements (so long as appropriate space occupancy
typeshavebeenindicatedinthe62.1CalcstabofthespreadsheetorviathePRMnavigator).
Assign SystemLevel Sizing Data: Prior to assigning the System & Plant sizing to the system
equipment, the user has the option to modify the sizing values generated by the ASHRAE
Loadstoolforindividualfans,chillers,boilers,coils,etc.withinthespreadsheet.Afterchanges
(if any) are completed within each system spreadsheet, equipmentsizing inputs are then
assigned to the designated set of ApacheHVAC systems from within the navigator using the
Assign system sizing data function. All system and zonelevel sizing information can be
adjusted and reapplied as needed or applied to alternate or modified systems. The
spreadsheets can also be copied and renamed so as to link to new, additional, or alternate
copiesofpreviouslysizedsystems.
Finally,theuserreturnstotheApacheThermalviewtosimulatethebuildingandsystems,withinteraction
betweentheseateachsimulationtimestep.Simulationscanbecarriedoutfortheentirebuildingproject
or just a small subset of it, as might be desirable when setting up and optimizing system configurations
and zonelevel controls. Having optimized the system using a small number of select zones and select
dates or conditions from the simulation weather file, the user can assign additional zones to the
ApacheHVACsystems,repeatthezonelevelsizingrun,andthenperformsystemlevelsizingforcoilloads,
plant equipment, and so forth. Because systems within ApacheHVAC are created or modified
independentlyofthethermalmodel,theVEallowsuserstocreatemultiplesystemsthatcanberunwith
thethermalmodelfromApacheSim.
This is facilitated by the System Prototypes & Sizing workflow navigator. The same functionality is also
providedwithintheASHRAE90.1AppendixGPerformanceRatingMethod(PRM)workflownavigator.
SystemPrototype&SizingnavigatorandtheASHRAE90.1PRMnavigator.Thenavigatorsprovideastep
bystepprocesstoguidetheuserthroughloadcalculations,sizing,andsimulation.Thefollowingoverview
describesthisprocessasitwouldbecompletedusingtheSystemPrototype&Sizingnavigator


7.4.2 158BDesignsizingconditions
Before proceeding through the sizing steps, ensure that all geometry, shading devices, internal gains,
envelope constructions, and design climate conditions are set as you intend them. If you are sizing
systemsinthecontextofthe90.1PRM,ensurethatthecoolingdesignpercentageisconsistentwiththe
requirementsofthe90.1versionyouareusing(settingsfor90.112007areillustratedbelow).
Figure73:ApLocatedesignandsimulationweatherdataselectionwizard.
7.4.3 159BAcquirePrototypeSystems
ThisstepimportsthePrototypeApacheHVACsystems.ForVE6.3,thesearebroughtinasacompleteset.
Youdecidewhichsystemsyouwanttouseinthecurrentprojectandthendeletetheremainingsystems.
ForVE6.4andonward,however,predefinedsystemseitherasconfiguredbyIESorbytheusercanbe
loadedindividuallyfromalibrary.Thelibraryfacilitatessaving,adding,andreplacingsystemsatanytime.


SystemPrototypesbuttoninApacheHVAC
Use the System Prototypes button to import only the full set of 22 prototype systems (all at once in 6.3
andindividuallyfromtheprototypesystemlibraryin6.4onward),alongwithjusttheprofilesneededto
runthesystemsandtheenergyendusedesignationsforthefuelcodestheyreference.Thisisincontrast
totheSystemPrototypes&SizingnavigatorAcquireprototypeHVACsystemsactionthatimportsallof
thefollowingitemsfromtheSystemPrototypesPlusdatamodel:
22prototypesystems
DefaultLoadsDataspreadsheet(requiredforzonelevelHVACsizingand62.1ventilationrates)
HVACcontrolprofilesusedforautomatingsetupofsystemsetpointsandoperatingschedules
Examplecontrolprofilesfornaturalventilation,daylightdimming,etc.
ExamplegroupingschemesforHVACzones
Examplethermaltemplateswithsetpoints,ventilationrates,internalgains,andinfiltrationrates
fortypicalofficespacesandrestrooms
Energyendusedesignationsforthefuelcodesreferencedinprototypesystemcomponents
In version 6.3, loading the prototype systems via the S button requires that the ApacheHVAC view is
blanki.e., as it is before opening a file or after clicking the New button. Once the set of prototypes
systemsareloaded,userswillnormallythendeletethesystemstheywillnotneedbeforecompletingthe
processofpopulating,sizing,and/ormodifyingthedesiredsystems.Inversion6.4andonward,however,
the system library can be used at any time to save, select, and import individual systems to a new or
existingApacheHVACfile.
Figure74:TheSystemPrototypes&SizingnavigatorAcquireprototypeHVACsystemsactionisusedto
open the dialog above and select the System Prototypes Plus to import the 22 prototype systems,
essentialcontrollerprofilesassociatedHVACcontrolzoneloadsdataspreadsheet,xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx.


Figure75:xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
From the predefined systems in the System_Prototypes.asp file that is loaded by clicking this navigator
linkinVE6.3,determinethepredefinedsystemsorconfigurationsyouwishtouse.
UntilVE6.4,ifthereisasystemtypethatyoumaywishtouseinconjunctionwithoratthesametimeas
thesystemyouarepresentlysettingupforthecurrentproject,youwillwanttoretainthissystemtypeas
well.InthecontextofVE6.3,itisimportantthatyounotdeletesystemtypesthatyouwilllaterwantto
haveinthesame.aspfile,asthisversionrequiresthattheybemanuallyreconstructedifyouwanttoadd
them back into an existing .asp file. For example, if you have five VAV systems in your project and
anticipatelaterreplacingoneortwo,butnotall,ofthesesystemswithfancoilsystems,youwouldwant
toretainthefancoilsystemtypeinthesame.aspfile.However,beselectiveinwhatyouchosetoretain,
asthereareafewthingsyoullneedtodo(explainedbelow)tokeeptheseunusedsystemsfromgetting
inthewayofthesizingprocess.
Deletesystemsthatwillnotbeneeded.
Insubsequentstepsyouwillassignrooms,schedules,andsoforth,priortosizing.
7.4.4 160BPrototypeSystemsSelectionandModification
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx.
7.4.5 161BAssignSpacesorZonestoRoomComponents


7.4.6 162BSystemSchedulesHoursofoperationandsetpoints


7.4.7 163BRoomLoadsCalculations
First the room loads calculation is run via the ASHRAE Loads application, using an idealized system
(unlimitedcapacity,simplifiedcontrols)anddefinedmodelinputs,suchasheatingandcoolingsetpoints.
TheASHRAELoadsanalysisusestheASHRAEHeatBalancemethod(describedintheASHRAEHandbookof
Fundamentals)
Whenthezonelevelloadsarecalculated,aspreadsheetisgeneratedforeachApacheHVACsysteminthe
proposed.aspfile,andeachspreadsheetispopulatedwiththeseresults.Thespreadsheetisusedtosize
airflowsandothercontrolinputsfortheHVACsystemsandisfullyeditablei.e.,usershavetheoptionto
editanydataasrequired,suchasoversizingfactors,primaryairchangerates,transferairflowrates,etc.
IMPORTANT: Through version 6.3, the automated zonelevel sizing procedure requires that the target
ApacheHVACsystemfileisnamedproposed.asp.ThisfilenamemustbeinplacepriortotheRoomLoad
Calculations step in the System Prototypes & Sizing navigator. If not, the sizing process will not populate
the Loads Data spreadsheet according to the rooms or zones assigned to the correct target system. The


targetsystemnameofproposed.aspmustalsoremaininplace(orbereinstated)fortheAssignsystem
parameters and room sizing data action in the sizing navigator. The ApacheHVAC file name can be
subsequentlychangedwithoutconsequence.Forversion6.4anonward,thisnamingconventionwillnot
berequired,norisitrequiredfortheSystemlevelloadsandsizingprocessdescribedbelow.
7.4.8 164BAccessLoadsDataspreadsheetsandASHRAE62.1Ventilation
The Loads data spreadsheet is used for three purposes, the first two of which are important in this
workflow,andthesecondtwoofwhichareoptional:
SettingHeatingandCoolingoversizingfactorsforzonelevelloads
SpecifyingandsettingupASHRAE62.1ventilation(optional)
Additionalinputsformodifyingsystemparameters(optional)
The Loads Data spreadsheet itself will, however, eventually be optional, as the VE will incorporate all
parametersfromitwithinasetofdialogs.


7.4.8.1 OversizingFactorsforZoneLoadsandSizing
The default oversizing factors for zonelevel loads are set to values required for baseline systems in the
ASHRAE90.1PRM,asfollows:
Heating=1.25
Cooling=1.15
These factors are used to adjust the actual loads in the space such that subsequent calculations of zone
airflows, etc., will be calculated based upon the oversized loads. While similar defaults are used, the
oversizing factors that must be entered in dialogs for system and plant equipment, such as coils, fans,
boilers,andchillersareseparatefromtheoversizingzonelevelloads;however,theyarenotredundant.
NOTE:OversizingfactorsarenotappliedtoresultsintheSystemLoadsReportprovidedwithintheVE.
To revised the default oversizing factors, begin by clicking the Access Loads Data spreadsheets and
ASHRAE 62.1 Ventilation link in the navigator and then opening the Loads Data spreadsheet with the
nameforthesystemyouwishtoeditfirst.Untilresavedwithadifferentsheetopen,thespreadsheetwill
openshowingtheRoomDesignAirflowstab.TheOversizingfactorsareingreenhighlightedcellsatthe
topofthesheet.
7.4.8.2 ASHRAE62.1ventilation
Bydefault,thespreadsheetissetuptousetheventilationratesspecifiedinRoomdataforeachspaceor
the System tab of the Thermal Template applied to each space. In these locations, users can specify
ventilationratesincfm,cfm/ft2,cfm/person,orACH.Therefore,theASHRAE62.1ventilationcalculation
isanoptionalstepinthesystemloadsandsizingprocess(unless,ofcourse,requiredbycode).
The link in the Navigator opens a folder containing the Loads Data spreadsheets, which, for VE 6.3,
include a sheet for determining ASHRAE 62.1 ventilation rates according to the Table 6.3 method (the
AppendixAmethodwillbeintroducedinasubsequentversionoftheVE).
Note:ForusersofthePRMNavigator,itisnotnecessarytoaccessthisspreadsheetdirectly,asaninput
dialogforASHRAE62.1ventilationisprovidedaspartofthatworkflownavigator.
To use ASHRAE 62.1 ventilation rates, begin by opening the spreadsheet with the name for the system
you wish to edit first. Once in the spreadsheet, switch to the 62.1 OA Calcs sheet and, at the top of the
sheet,replacetheYwithNtoindicatethatyoudonotwishtoallowthedefaulttotheOAratessetin
the VE (Templates or Room Data). You must complete two further steps in order to use 62.1 ventilation
rates:
Set the 62.1 occupancy category for each space using the dropdown selector built into the
input fields in that column (click then use down arrow and scroll bar). If you wish to have
severalroomswiththesameoccupancytype,setthefirstofthem,selectit,anddrag/copythe
selectiondowntosettheothersthesameasthefirst.


Set zone Air Distribution Effectiveness (Ez) for both heating and cooling modes (default is for
overheadsupplyandreturn).
At the top of column AA, indicate the Total system population (maximum number of people
that will simultaneously occupy all rooms served by the system at one same time). This field
defaults to the sum total of all zone peak occupancy values (sum of values in column E).
However,becauseofdiversity,thistypicallyshouldbereducedtotheactualnumberofpeople
collectivelyoccupyingthespacesonthesystem.
Immediately below that, indicate if the system is a 100% Outside Air system (this will be
automatically set to Y if you are sizing a type 09 prototype system or one based upon that
prototype).Thisdeterminesthemethodofcalculatingthetotalsystemoutsideairrate.
Set exhausted space type and, if selecting one of the toilets types, then you must also
indicatethenumberofunitsincolumnAV(forthoseusingthePRMNavigator,thisisdonevia
aninputdialog;nonPRMuserwillthereforebeoverwritingtheformulaswithmanualinputs,
thusbreakingthelinktothatdialog).
Notethatthe62.1Referencetabimmediatelytotherightofthe62.1OACalcstabprovidesinformation
regardingthefollowing:
flowratesforeachoccupancytype
zoneairdistributioneffectivenessvaluesforcommonconfigurations
systemventilationefficiencyvalues
minimumexhaustrates
RepeatthesestepsfortheLoadsDataspreadsheetassociatedwitheachsystem.
Before proceeding to the next step in the System Prototypes & Sizing Navigator, ensure that all of the
LoadsDataspreadsheetshavebeenclosed,astheVEwillneedtoaccesstheseinthebackground.
7.4.9 165BAHUSystemParameters


7.4.10 166BAssignSystemParametersandRoomSizingData
Thisstepappliesthebasicsystemparametersettings(above)androom/zonelevelautosizedvalues,such
as VAV airflows, to components and controllers in the system in the target ApacheHVAC file
(proposed.asp). When the values have been autosized, the letter A and the input values change from
blacktogreen.
**IMPORTANTNOTES**
1) The system parameter settings (above) and room/zonelevel autosized values will be applied only to
mappedcomponentsandcontrollersinthetargetApacheHVAC(.asp)file,andthistargetfilemustbe
namedproposed.aspinorderforthistowork.
2) Apart from systemlevel components, (boilers, chillers, and other heating and cooling sources), all
input values in ApacheHVAC components and controllers that have a capital letter A next to the
inputfieldwillbeoverwrittenbyautosizedvalueswhenthisstepisexecuted.
Updating plant equipment sizes via the subsequent System Loads Calculation step will overwrite all
inputvaluesinApacheHVACboilers,chillers,otherheating&coolingsources,heating&coolingcoils,
andfansforwhichthereisacapitalletterAnexttotheinputfield.


To allow for future updates using this facility, manual changes should be made to the values on the
appropriatetabinthespreadsheetassociatedwitheachparticularsystemthatisbeingsized.
Projectfolder>LoadsData>Proposed>systemspecificspreadsheet.
Valuesinthecomponentsandcontrollerscanalsobeediteddirectly.However,ifthereisaletterA
next to the input field, these manual inputs will be overwritten if/when the assignment of AHU
parametersandautosizedroom/zonelevelvaluesisrepeated.
AllowingafutureupdateofallotherAHUparametersandroom/zonelevelautosizedvalueswithout
affecting those in a particular controller can be achieved by at least temporarily breaking the
autosizinglink.Tointentionallybreaktheautosizinglinkforaparticularcontroller,simplydelete the
mappingdesignation(e.g.,MC4:)fromthereferencename.
7.4.11 167BSystemandPlantLoadsCalculation
WhentheRoomLoadsdatahasbeenusedtoupdatetheHVACSystemsanASHRAELoadscalculationcan
berunandlinkedtotheApacheHVACsystem.
On the ASHRAE Loads settings dialog the Analysis Type is set to ApacheHVAC System Loads and the
ApacheHVAClinkistickedwiththeApacheHVACSystemspecified


7.4.12 168BSystemandPlantEquipmentSizing
Plant equipment, such as boiler, heat pumps, chillers, DX cooling, and other heating and cooling sources
plussystemlevelcomponents,suchascoilsandfans,aresizedbytheSystemandPlantLoadsCalculation
withintheASHRAELoadsdialog.
7.4.12.1 UpdateApacheHVACsystemsizes?
Whenthisoptionisticked,systemandplantequipmentintheselectedApacheHVACnetworkisupdated
withsystemlevelsizingresults(asadjustedbyanyoversizingfactorspresentintheequipmentdialogs).
Figure720:Theoptionisprovidedtocompletethesystemloadsanalysisandgenerateareportwithout
updatingthesystemitself.Tosizethesystemequipment,usersmustselectatargetApacheHVACsystem
forsizingandensurethattheUpdateApacheHVACsystemsizes?boxisticked(asitisbydefault).
Itisnotrequiredthattheautosizingprocessbeusedforzonelevelsizingpriortosystemlevelsizing:itis
possible to perform the System & Plant Loads calculation for an ApacheHVAC system that has had all
zonelevel sizing information entered manually, and therefore does not have an associate Loads Data
spreadsheet (or at least, not one that has been automatically populated and updated). This step writes
separatefilestostoresystemsizinginformationintheeventthatthespreadsheetsarenotpresent.
Notethatsizingandperformanceinputsforairsourceheatpumpsrequireaddedattentioninthecaseof
ASHRAE 90.1PRM Baseline systems. More information regarding these considerations is provided with
respecttoPRMBaselineSystems2and4inthePreDefinedPrototypeHVACsystemssection,below.
7.4.13 169BSystemandPlantSizingReport
When the calculations are complete, the user can generate a detailed system sizing loads report with
results for the Room Level and System level loads. This is presented in the IES reportage format. Please
note that presently (in version 6.3), this report must be generated via the System Prototypes & Sizing
workflownavigatororthesamestepintheASHRAE90.1PRMworkflow.
The System Loads results files have extension *.htn (heating) and *.cln (cooling). These can be read in
Vista like normal ASHRAE Loads results (standard room and apache system loads results files have
extension*.htgand*.clg).
NOTE:OversizingfactorsenteredintheLoadsDataspreadsheetforzoneairflowsizingorintheplantand
system equipment dialogs apply only the sizing of the equipment within the systems themselves.
OversizingfactorsarenotappliedtoresultsintheSystemLoadsReportprovidedwithintheVE.




8 7BPrototypeHVACSystems
This section describes the predefine prototype systems, the parameters within them that can be set by
the user directly (independent of the dialogs in the System Prototypes & Sizing navigator), and the
approachtomodifyingtheirconfigurationsandcontrolswithoutdisablingtheautosizingfunctionality.
ApacheHVACincludesarangeofpredefinedsystemsforwhichnumerousparameters(controllerinputs,
flowrates,coilsizes,temperatureresets,fansizes,heatingand coolingplantequipmentcapacities,etc.)
can be autosized with respect to setpoints, design loads, ventilation rates, operating schemes, and so
forth.Therealsocapabilityforautosizingcoils,fans,andheating&coolingequipmentinfullycustombuilt
systems.Section 7: System Loads, Ventilation, and Autosizing, describes the autosizing process,
opportunities for user intervention, and the setting of associated system schedules, operating schemes
forunoccupiedhours,economizeroperation,andothersystemparameters.
IMPORTANT:Whilethepredefinedprototypesystemswillrunasprovided,withonlytheassignmentof
rooms or zones having been completed, appropriate results depend upon completion of sizing at two
levels.Thissizingprocess,asdescribedintheprevioussection,iscompletedintwoseparatestages:
Zonelevelsizingforairflowcontrollersandothersimilarsystemelementsmustbecompleted
eithermanuallyorthroughthelargelyautomatedprocessdescribedintheprevioussection,in
orderforthespacestobeadequatelyventilatedandconditioned.
Systemlevel loads calculation and sizing, which applies to coils, fans, chillers, DX cooling,
boilers, heat pumps, etc., must be completed in order to appropriately scale this equipment
capacities and performance curves and thus to obtain performance and energy consumption
results that reflect realworld applications. While rooms may be adequately conditioned with
only the first stage of sizing completed, energy consumption for grossly over or undersized
equipment will be far from what is should be. This will be particularly true in the case of
performance for grossly oversized hotwater boilers and aircooled or watercooled chillers
usingpredefinedbiquadraticperformancecurves.
PLEASENOTE:ThissectionoftheApacheHVACUserGuideispresentlystillunderconstruction.Pleasebe
suretocheckforupdates,whichwillbepostedapproximatelyweeklyuntiltheVE6.3updateoftheuser
guideiscomplete.


8.1 PredefinedprototypeHVACsystems:Commonfeatures
The predefined prototype systems in ApacheHVAC provide autosizing capability, examples of various
system configurations, and a starting point for users who wish to create custom configurationseither
fromoneoftheprototypesorusingtheseasanexample.

CoolingcoilSATreset
perzonetemperature
CoolingcoilSATreset
perzone%humidity
CoolingVAVairflow
HeatingVAVairflow
CoolingcoilSATreset
perzonetemperature


8.2 PredefinedprototypeHVACsystems:Systemtypesandconfigurations
ThefullsetofpredefinedHVACsystemsinVE6.3includesthefollowing:
All eight systems required by the ASHRAE 90.1 Performance Rating Method (PRM) with all
default equipment, component, and control inputs (including air and water supply
temperature resets, etc.) set to 90.1PRM Baseline values. These systems, which are generic
andcanbeusedoutsidethecontextofthePRM,include:
o PackagedTerminalAirConditioning(PTAC)
o PackagedTerminalHeatPump(PTHP)
o Singlezoneairconditioningsystemwithfurnace(PSZAC)
o Singlezoneheatpumpsystem(PSZHP)
o VAVreheatusingDXCoolingandHWboiler
o VAVusingDXCoolingandparallelfanpoweredboxeswithelectricheat
o VAVreheatusingwatercooledchillerandHWboiler
o VAVusingwatercooledchillerandparallelfanpoweredboxeswithelectricheat
These systems meet all ASHRAE 90.12007 PRM requirements for baseline systems modeling, including
detailed systemspecific requirements. Where equipment performance standards vary with sized
equipmentcapacityordesignairflowrates,suchvaluesarerevisedaccordingtoPRMrequirementsatthe
time of autosizing if the system application is a PRM baseline model (there are a small number of
exceptionsthatstillrequiremanualintervention).Forexample,multiplepredefinedDXcoolingtypesare
providedforeachstandardloadrangeandassociatedCOP/EERforDXcoolinginsystems36.Whileusers
can manually select these DX types, in the case of a PRM baseline model, the DX cooling type will be
automaticallyreassignedtomatchtheCOP/EERtotheloadrangeasrequiredbyASHRAE.
Dedicatedoutsideairsystem(DOAS)withfourpipefancoilunits,EWCchillerandHWboiler.
Indirectdirect evaporative cooling version of VAVreheat system 5 above with backup DX
coolingandzonelevelCO2baseddemandcontrolledventilation(DCV).
VAVreheat with differentialenthalpy economizer set up for the public areas of a hotel or
similar building with PTAC systems for individual guest/resident rooms drawing air from an
atriumzoneonthemainVAVsystem.
Mixedmode natural ventilation and VAVreheat with zone temperature and zone CO2
overrides for natvent when it is insufficient (e.g., when not enough cooling or ventilation is
providedviaoperablewindows,inspiteoffavorableindooroutdoorthermalconditions).
Singlefandualductandwithzonelevelmixingboxes.
Dualfandualductwithzonelevelmixingboxes.
Underfloorairdistributionwithparallelfanpoweredboxesforperimeterzones,leakagepath,
and remixing of PFPb zones when theyre in heating mode. Can also be used for thermal
displacement ventilation by simply omitting the PFPbs, UFAD plenum, leakage path, and re
mixinginheatingmode.
UFAD/DV system as above, plus heat pipe or runaround coil in AHU for free reheat of sub
cooled(dehumidified)airaftertheAHUcoolingcoil.
Active chilled beams and DOAS for ventilation, both using electric watercooled chiller with
waterside economizer and condenser heat recovery; recovered heat and HW boiler for DOAS
heatingcoilandzonebaseboardfintubeconvectors.


Radiant heating and cooling panels (i.e., fourpipe system), plus DOAS with airside energy
recoveryandDCV.
RadiantpanelsandDOASasabovewithheatpipeorrunaroundcoilinAHUforfreereheatof
subcooled(i.e.,dehumidified)airaftertheAHUcoolingcoil.
While some autosizing features are constrained to particular component and controller applications or
configurations, all of the predefined systems can be extensively modified. This includes combining
features from multiple systems into one, directly coupling systems, or adding custom component and
control configurations. For example, the predefined DCV controls, heat pipes, or controllers for mixed
modeoperationcouldbedrag&dropcopiedfromotherpredefinedsystemstotheActivechilledbeams
system.Theairsupplyforthesystemcouldbedrawnfromanatriumorotherspaceonanothersystem.
The heat recovery could then be modified to model a desiccant wheel regenerated by heat recovered
from the condenser loop on the electric watercooled chiller, which can also me set to use a waterside
economizer (waterside free cooling). There are also special features for advanced modeling, such as
surfacetemperature(e.g.,ceilingorfloorslab)sensorsforcontrolofhydroniccomponents.
Airsidecomponentscoils,mixingdampers,spraychambers,heatexchangers,fans,flowsplitters,etc.
sensors and controllers can be arranged as needed to model custom configurations, such as an earth
tube or subterranean labyrinth for preconditioning intake air, series or dualmode rather than parallel
fanpoweredboxes,aDXcoolinganddehumidificationsystemwithdesiccantwheelregeneratedbywaste
heat from the DX condenser coil, staged dualmax and triplemax VAV controls, specialized temperature
resets,oralaboratorywithexhaustairchangesmadeupbya combinationofsupplyairandtransferair
fromadjacentspaces.
There are detailed models for chillers, boilers, DX cooling, etc. with editable predefined performance
curves, models for cooling towers and both primary and secondary loop pumps, and basic sequencing
optionsformatchedpairsofboilersandchillers(allincludedasof6.1.1).Thepending6.3releaseincludes
morealongtheselines,suchasdetailedchilledwatercoolingcoilmodelswithautosizeanddesignsizing
modes, expanded modeling of chilled water loops, and flexible sequencing of separately defined chillers
andothercustomsourcesofchilledwater.
Partloaddatamatricesareprovidedformodelingnonstandardheatingandcoolingsources.Forthistype
ofcoolingsource,COPcanvarybothwithloadandoutdoorconditions.Partloadcoolingsourcescanalso
usethechilledwaterloopmodelandassociatepumpmodeling,butdonotsharethedetailedcondenser
waterloopandcoolingtowermodelsusedbythefullelectricwatercooledchillermodel.Likehotwater
boilers, partload heat source models can use recovered chiller condenser heat must presently still
modulate associated pump power according to heating load. Any heat source can serve space heating
and/or domestic hot water loads, and a solar thermal hot water model with storage tank is available to
useasthefirstsourceofheatfordomestichotwater.
Presently,mappingofresultsforany givennodein the HVACsystemonapsychrometric chartmuststill
be done by transferring state points to a separate psychrometric chart tool. However, this data is
available for every simulation time step and the Vista Results view supports graphing selected zone and
systemlevel node variables on the same graph. Room conditions and outdoor variables can similarly be
added to the same graph. Anything that can be graphed can also be viewed, copied, and exported to
othertoolsasatableofresultsdataforeachtimestep.
The predefined systems added in 6.3 include versions of systems 1 & 2 using the more detailed Unitary
Cooling System Model, a more advanced configuration of system 5 with enthalpy economizer and directly
coupled copies of system 1 for residence/hotel rooms, and a range of eight more advanced non
conventionalsystems.Theseincludethefollowing:


PackagedterminalairconditioningusingthedetailedUnitaryCoolingSystem(UCS)model
(appropriateforsmallsinglezoneunitswithfixedspeedfansthatcycleonandoff,suchas
throughthewallAC),withahotwaterheatingcoilcoupledtoacentralboiler.
PackagedterminalheatpumpusingthedetailedUnitaryCoolingSystem(UCS)model(appropriate
forsmallsinglezoneunitswithfixedspeedfansthatcycleonandoff,suchasthroughthewallAC)
incoolingmodeandanairsourceheatpumpinheatingmode,withelectricresistancebackup
heatingcoil.
IndirectdirectevaporativecoolingVAVreheatsystemwithbackupDXcoolingcoil,dewpoint
temperatureOAeconomizerhighlimitcontrol,zonelevelhumidityhighlimitcontrol,andCO2
baseddemandcontrolledventilation(DCV)usingzonelevelsensorstofirstforceindividualVAV
boxesfurtheropenandtherequestadditionaloutsideairatthesystemlevel.
VAVreheatwithdifferentialenthalpyeconomizersetupforthepublicareasofahotel,dormitory,
orsimilarbuildingwithPTACsystemsforindividualroomsdrawingairfromandatriumzoneprior
tothereturnpathofthemainVAVsystem.
MixedmodenaturalventilationandVAVreheatwithzonetemperatureandzoneCO2overridesto
reintroducesystemairsupplywhennatventmodeisinsufficient(e.g.,whentheroomoccupancy
isveryhighorwinddrivenpressuredifferentialsaretoolow)inspiteofindooroutdoorthermal
conditionsthatareappropriateforventilationandcoolingviaoperableopenings.
DualfandualductsystemwithdewpointtemperatureOAeconomizerhighlimitcontroland
zonelevelmixingboxes(reducesfanenergyandavoidstheneedforreheat,butrequiressecond
setofducts).
Underfloorairdistributionwithparallelfanpoweredboxes(PFPbs)forperimeterzones,leakage
path,andremixingofotherwisethermallystratifiedPFPbzoneswheninheatingmode.
Underfloorairdistributionasabove,plusheatpipeorrunaroundcoilintheAHUforfreereheat
ofsubcooled(i.e.,dehumidified)airaftertheAHUcoolingcoil,andaccountingforaddedstatic
pressureseenbythesupplyfanwhenairflowpassesthroughtheheatpipe/coil(i.e.,whenitisnot
bypassed).
Activechilledbeams(zonelevelinductionunitswithcoolingcoilsandinducedflowinproportionto
theprimaryairflow)andaDedicatedOutsideAirSystem(DOAS)fortemperateventilationair.
Radiantheating&coolingpanels(multipletwopipeorfourpipeunitscanbeplacedineachzone;2
typesarepredefinedforbothheatingandcoolingasexamples),plusDOASwithzoneCO2based
DCV.
RadiantpanelsandDOASasabovewithheatpipeorrunaroundcoilinAHUforfreereheatof
subcooled(i.e.,dehumidified)airaftertheAHUcoolingcoil,accountingforaddedstaticpressure
seenbythesupplyfanwhenairflowpassesthroughtheheatpipe/coil(i.e.,whenitisnot
bypassed).
All22predefinedsystemswillnowloadviatheSystemPrototypesSbuttoninApacheHVACandtheSystem
Prototypes & Sizing Navigator. When the tabbed views have been provided in ApacheHVAC, users will load
thesepredefinedsystemsindividually,asneeded.


8.3 56BWorkingwithprototypesystems
Allpredefinedcontrollers,configurations,defaultvalues,andautosizedvaluesaremeanttobeastarting
point.ThisstartingpointprovidesdefaultsforASHRAEbaselinesystems,ameansoffacilitatingtherapid
useofsystemswithoutexcessivesetupeffort,andanexampleofhowthesystemareintendedtobeset
up.Inotherwords,thepredefinedconfigurations,defaultvalues,andtheirrelationshipsaremeanttobe
instructiveandillustrative,butnotsetinstone.ExceptinthecaseofautosizedASHRAEbaselinesystems
inthecontextofthe90.1PRM,itisrecommendedthatusersmodifyinputsandconfigurationsasneeded
toaccuratelyrepresentthesystemsineachactualproject.
8.3.1 170BLoading,saving,andretrievingprototypesystems
8.3.1.1 Predefinedanduserdefinedprototypesystems
8.3.1.2 Maintainingconnectiontoreferencedschedulesandprofiles
8.3.2 171BSelecting,moving,copying,andnamingsystems
8.3.2.1 Maintainingautosizingcapability
8.3.3 172BModifyingpredefineprototypesystems
8.3.3.1 Maintainingautosizingcapabilityforcomponentswithautosizedparameters
8.3.3.2 Maintainingautosizingcapabilityforcontrollerswithautosizedparameters
8.3.3.3 Maintainingconnectiontoreferencedschedulesandprofiles
8.4 57BCommonelementsusedinpredefineprototypesystems
8.4.1 173BEnergyrecoveryandbypassdampersection
This system element is common to all of the predefined multizone systems, and provides for recovery
andheatingandcoolingenergyforpreconditioningofoutsideairwhenitisenabled.
Autosizingvaluesintheenergyrecoverydeviceandbypassdampercontrollersaredeterminedasfollows:
Midband for damper modulation and set point for changeover from heating to cooling mode for
energyrecoverytargetarethemidpointbetweentheaverageheatingtocoolingroomtemperature
setpointsforallzonesonthesystem.Iftheaverageheatingandcoolingsetpointsforthezoneson
the system are 68 F and 76 F, respectively, then the midband/setpoint value returned to these
controllerswillbe72F.
For the Energy Recovery mode controls, this is the return air temperature, subject to a
deadbandorhysteresis,aboveorbelowwhichthedefaultconfigurationassumesthemajority
of zones on the system are in heating vs. cooling mode. The majority, in this case, is with
respect to total conditioned/ventilation air volume on the system, as the sensors for these


controls see only the combined return air temperature. If the RA temperature is below the
threshold minus half the deadband (e.g., 71 F for the example above with a 2 F deadband),
thezonesare,onaverage,assumedtobeinheatingmode,andtheheatingmodetemperature
target in SC5 applies. If the RA temperatures is above the threshold plus half the deadband
(e.g.,73F),thezonesare,onaverage,assumedtobeincoolingmode,andthecoolingmode
temperaturetargetinSC4applies.
For the Energy recovery bypass damper SAT target, the same value, is the midband for
proportional control of the mixedair target temperature downstream of continuously
modulatedbypassdamper.Asthereturnairgetswarmer,indicatingthezonesarecollectively
warmer, the temperature target for damper modulation is steadily reduced over the
bandwidthofsensedvalues.Forthe72Ftheexampleabovewitha4Fdefaultsbandwidth,
thebypasstemperaturetargetwillbeatitsmaximumvaluewhenthesensedRAtemperature
is 70 F and will be at its minimum value when the sensed RA temperature is 74 F, thus
minimizing undesirable heating or cooling load associated with outside air while maximizing
feecoolingwhenawarmerRAtemperatureindicatesthezonesareonaverage(byvolume)74
Forwarmer(i.e.,theyareincoolingmode).
Target temperatures for the energy recovery bypass damper and for the heating and cooling for
modesoftheenergyrecoverydevicearebasedupontheleavingairtemperature(LAT)setforthe
AHU Heating Coil. Normally, this leaving air temperature is the minimum temperature that the
system is permitted to deliver to the zonese.g., 55 to 65 F or a similar cooltoneutral value
(heat,aboveandbeyondthistempering,ismosttypicallyprovidedatthezonelevel).IftheLATat
theAHUHeatingCoilissetto55F,forexample,thetargetvalueswillbeasfollows
50F(simply555)fortheenergyrecoveryincoolingmode
70F(simply(555)+20)fortheenergyrecoveryinheatingmode
50FatMaxsignal(whentheRAiswarmer)and70FatMinsignal(whentheRAiscooler)for
thebypassdamperproportionalcontrol.
Note that the energy recovery heating and cooling mode target temperatures are intended to be
unattainable targets, just beyond the reach of the capability of the device to preheat or precool the
incoming outdoor air with recovered heat or coolth. For the example above, when in heating mode
(baseduponasensedRAtemperatureof71Forless)theenergyrecoverywouldnotbeexpectedtobe
abletoheattheoutsideairallthewayto70Fwithheatrecoveredfromreturn/exhaustairthatisitself
71Forcooler.Similarly,theenergyrecoverywouldcertainlynotbeexpectedtocooltheoutsideairall
thewayto50Fbyrejectingheatfromittothereturn/exhaustairthatisitself73Forwarmer.
SC5 uses the same values at Min and Max signal as the energy recovery targets in SC4 and SC5. For the
controllersontheenergyrecoverydevice,SC4andSC5,thetargetscouldbemoreextremewithnoeffect,
astheyarealmostcertainlyunattainable.However,ifthetargettemperaturesatthehighandlowendsof


theproportionalcontrolbandforthebypassdamperaresettooverlyextremevalues,thiswillhavethe
effect of making the useful part of the proportional band ramp very quick (over a nary range of sensed
values)fromthelowesttothehighestattainablevalues,orviceversa.
The most important number in these three controllers is the setpoint in the energy recovery mode
controlsandmidbandvaluefortheproportionalcontrolinthebypassandthebypassdampercontrol,as
it determines the changeover from heating to cooling logic for energy recovery based upon the RA
temperature.
Note that,apart from the energyintensive intentional reheat after subcooling to dehumidify the intake
air,itisunlikelyyouwouldsettheLATfortheAHUheatingcoilinapredefinedsystemconfigurationtoa
valuewarmerthanthelowestLATforthecoolingcoilimmediatelyupstreamofit(e.g.,55F):Ifsettoa
warmerLAT,theheatingcoilwillsimplyconsumeenergyreheatingtheairjustcooledbythecoolingcoil.
If,however,youchosetoreplacethefixedtemperaturecontrollerontheAHUheatingcoilwithonethat,
for example, used a sensor to reset the SAT according to zone temperatures, etc., then you would
replacetheautosizedcontrollerwithoneofyourown.
Thefollowinggraphofintakeairflowrateandtemperaturesoneithersideoftheenergyrecoverydevice
onahotsummerday.
Teal=outsideair(node21)
Blue=intakeairaftertheenergyrecoverydevice(node22)
Purple=return/exhaustair(node40)
Red=exhaustairafterreceivingrejectedheatfromtheintakeair(node41)
Gold=intakeairflowrate(node21)
Itcanbeseenthattheintakeairmatchestheoutsideairtemperatureuntilthepointatwhichtheoutside
airisactuallywarmerthantheexhaustairfromthebuilding.Atthiscrossoverpoint,theenergyrecovery
devicebegins,byvirtualofthistemperaturedifferential,totransferheatfromtheincomingoutdoorairto
the outgoing exhaust air. The effect increases with the deltaT in keeping with the heat exchanger
effectivenessinput.Thisrejectionofunwantedheatcontinuesuntilthesystemairflowisreducedtozero
attheendoftheday.Itcanalsobeseenthatintheearlyeveningthetemperatureoftheintakeairrises
withariseinthetemperatureofthereturn/exhaustair,andthusalsoadropinusefuldeltaTandtherate
ofheatrejectiontotheexhaust.


8.4.2 174BVAVairflowcontrols
Profilesforproportionalcontrolmidbands
Timedvariationofvaluesprovidesnighttimesetback/setup.


8.5 58BPrototypesystems:Systemspecificdescriptionsandguidance
8.5.1 175BPackagedTerminalAirConditioning(PTAC)
8.5.2 176BPackagedTerminalHeatPump(PTHP)
8.5.3 177BSinglezoneairconditioningsystemwithfurnace(PSZAC)
8.5.4 178BSinglezoneheatpumpsystem(PSZHP)
8.5.5 179BVAVreheatusingDXCoolingandHWboiler
8.5.6 180BVAVusingDXCoolingandparallelfanpoweredboxeswithelectricheat
8.5.7 181BVAVreheatusingwatercooledchillerandHWboiler
8.5.8 182BVAVusingwatercooledchillerandparallelfanpoweredboxeswithelectricheat
8.5.9 183BDedicatedoutsideairsystem(DOAS)withfourpipefancoilunits,EWCchillerandHW
boiler.
8.5.10 184BIndirectdirectevaporativecoolingversionofVAVreheatsystem5abovewithbackupDX
coolingandzonelevelCO2baseddemandcontrolledventilation(DCV).
8.5.11 185BVAVreheatwithdifferentialenthalpyeconomizersetupforthepublicareasofahotelor
similarbuildingwithPTACsystemsforindividualguest/residentroomsdrawingairfroman
atriumzoneonthemainVAVsystem.
8.5.12 186BMixedmodenaturalventilationandVAVreheatwithzonetemperatureandzoneCO2
overridesfornatventwhenitisinsufficient
8.5.12.1 TemperatureandCO2basedoverrideswhennotenoughcoolingorventilationisprovidedvia
operablewindows,inspiteoffavorableindooroutdoorthermalconditions
8.5.13 187BSinglefandualductandwithzonelevelmixingboxes.
8.5.14 188BDualfandualductwithzonelevelmixingboxes.
8.5.15 189BUnderfloorairdistributionwithparallelfanpoweredboxesforperimeterzones,leakage
path,andheatingmoderemixingofPFPbzones.


8.5.15.1 CanbeusedforthermaldisplacementventilationbysimplyomittingthePFPbs,UFADplenum,
leakagepath,andremixinginheatingmode.
8.5.16 190BUFAD/DVsystemasabove,plusheatpipeorrunaroundcoilinAHUforfreereheatofsub
cooled(dehumidified)airaftertheAHUcoolingcoil.
8.5.17 191BActivechilledbeamsandDOASforventilationusingelectricwatercooledchillerwith
watersideeconomizerandcondenserheatrecovery;HWboilerandrecoveredheatfor
DOASandzonebaseboardfintubeconvectors.
8.5.18 192BRadiantheatingandcoolingpanels(i.e.,fourpipesystem),plusDOASwithairsideenergy
recoveryandDCV.
8.5.19 193BRadiantpanelsandDOASasabovewithheatpipeorrunaroundcoilinAHUforfreereheat
ofsubcooled(i.e.,dehumidified)airaftertheAHUcoolingcoil.
guideiscomplete.


9 8BReferences
ASHRAE 1402004 Standard Method of Test for the Evaluation of Building Energy Analysis Computer
Programs.ASHRAE2004.ISSN10412336.
ASHRAE 1402007 Standard Method of Test for the Evaluation of Building Energy Analysis Computer
Programs.ASHRAE2007.ISSN10412336.
ASHRAE 90.12007 Energy Standard for Buildings Except LowRise Residential Buildings. ASHRAE 2007.
ISSN10412336
ASHRAEHandbookofFundamentals,HeatBalanceMethod


10 9BAppendixA.RulesforAirFlowSpecification
It is important to specify airflows in the system completely and consistently. The rules for airflow
specificationaresetoutbelow.
Airflowsmaybespecifiedbythefollowingmechanisms:
Withaflowratecontroller.Airflowisspecifiedatanypointinthesystemwhereacontrollerwith
itscontrolledvariablesettoflowrateisattachedtotheductwork.
With a percentage flow control controller. Airflow may be specified by a controller with its
controlled variable set to percentage flow control. Such a controller may only be attached to the
outletofadampersetcomponent.Inthiscase,theflowenteringtheleftbranchofthedamperset
(oftentheoutsideairintake)willbesetasapercentageoftheflowleavingtotheright.
By the assumption of continuity across air handling components. The program will deduce the
airflow at all points along a chain of air handling components given the flow at any point in the
chain, on the assumption of flow continuity. This rule is subject to a qualification in the case of
roomcomponents,asexplainedbelow.
By addition or subtraction at a junction. At a junction where all but one of the flows are known,
the program will deduce the unknown flow by addition or subtraction. You must ensure that,
whereaflowistobededucedbysubtraction,theresultis nevernegative.Ifthissituation arises,
thenegativeflowissettozero.
Forthecurrentiterationscheme,everyroutethroughthesystemmustpassthroughatleastone
room. To satisfy this requirement, a room component must have an actual space in the model
assignedtoiti.e.,itcannotsatisfythisruleifitremainssetasanadiabaticduct.
Importantnote:Airflowisnotsetbythefansorbyanyothertypeofcomponent.
Youshould checkbeforesimulatingasystemthatallflowsinthesystem can bedeterminedbyapplying
these rules. Overspecification of flows is tolerated, but there should be no inconsistencies in the
numericalvaluesofflows.
Inthecaseofrooms,theassumptionofflowcontinuityisqualifiedbyadditionalrulesintroducedtoallow
ApacheHVACtointeractwithMacroFlo.
If MacroFlo is running in tandem with ApacheHVAC, it will detect any imbalance between the system
flows entering and leaving each room, and make up the surplus or deficit with air flowing through the
building through openings in the fabric (provided that suitable openings exist). In order to allow such
imbalances to be set up, the following additional rules are applied relating to the assumption of flow
continuityacrossrooms:
In a first pass, ApacheHVAC makes no assumption about flow continuity across rooms. Within this
constraint,allpossibleflowdeductionsaremade.
Ifsomesystemairflowsremainundeterminedatthisstage,asecondpassismadeinwhichtheprogram
allows room outflow to be set equal to room inflow. All possible flow deductions are then made under
thisassumption.


Ifsomesystemairflowsstillremainundetermined,athirdpassismadeinwhichtheprogramallowsroom
inflowtobesetequaltoroomoutflow,orroomoutflowtobesetequaltoroominflow.Allpossibleflow
deductionsareagainmade.
Afterthisprocess,allairflowsshouldbedeterminedforawellspecifiedsystem.Ifthisisnotthecase,an
errormessageisdisplayed.
Bydelayingtheapplicationoftheroomflowcontinuityassumption,theserulesallowflowimbalancesto
besetuptosimulateavarietyofmechanicalventilationandmixedmoderegimes.
WhenusingApacheHVACandMacroFlointandem,itisimportanttonotethatApacheHVACcansetflows
inMacroFlo,butnotviceversa.AllApacheHVACflowsmustbesetwithinApacheHVAC.
ThereareinstanceswhenroomflowimbalancesmaymeaningfullybesetupwithoutinvokingMacroFlo.
Ifthesupplyrateforaroomisgreaterthantheextractrate,thedeficitwilltacitlybeassumedtobelost
to outside. Note, however, that if the extract rate is greater than the supply, the deficit will not be
assumed to be made up with air from elsewhere unless MacroFlo is running and suitable openings are
present.


11 10BAppendixB.HVACSystemsModelingGuidanceSpecificto
ASHRAEStandard90.12007
This section provides only supplemental information where added guidance was deemed necessary for
modelingparticular HVAC systemsin thecontextof theASHRAE Standard90.1AppendixGPerformance
RatingMethod(PRM).InformationregardingsystemsmodelingthatisnotspecifictothePRMisprovided
inprevioussectionsofthisdocument.
guideiscomplete.
11.1.1 194BBaselinesystems2and4PackagedTerminalHeatPump(PTHP)andPackagedSingleZone
HeatPump(PSZHP)
Default autosizing for predefined Heat Pumps in ApacheHVAC sets the heating capacity at ARI rating
conditionof47FequaltothefullheatingloadassignedtotheHPintheHeatingDesignSizingrun.Using
the default performance curves, the capacity actually available from the HP alone at the design heating
outdoorconditionwillbesignificantlyless(ontheorderof30to60%oftheratedcapacity,dependingon
climate, etc.). The remaining load will be met by the backup heat source, which, by default, is electric
resistanceheatingwithinfinitecapacity.
For ASHRAE 90.1 PRM Baseline Systems, check that the default autosized capacity does not significantly
conflictwiththefollowingconsiderations:
Generally, the ASHP heating capacity should be within about +/ 10 to 20% of the cooling capacity to
mimicthebehaviorofactualequipment.Heatingcapacityforactualequipmentisoften,butnotalways,
ontheorderof15%lessthancoolingcapacity.Usingthisasaguideline,ratherthanexactlymatchingthe
sizes or sizing the heating capacity larger to meet more of the winter heating load without backup (as
such equipment can be selected), will cause the electric resistance heat to begin sharing the load at a
temperatureclosertothe40Foutdoormaximumpermittedforelectricbackupoperation.
ForASHRAE90.1PRMBaselineSystems,theASHPheatingcapacityshouldmustbesufficienttomaintain
the space heating setpoint without solar or internal gains when the outdoor temperature is 40 F, such
thatthebackupelectricheatneversupplementstheheatpumpwhentheoutdoortemperatureis40For
higher.
If the required heating capacity to maintain the 40 F upper limit for backup heat source operation is
significantlygreaterthanthecoolingcapacity(e.g.,),thecoolingcapacityshouldbeincreasedsothatthe
heating and cooling capacities are more fairly representative of actual equipment. This will cause the
simulated DX cooling mode to operate at a lower partload fraction and may require revision of the
cooling mode COP if the cooling capacity is shifted to a higher range with respect to ASHRAE 90.12007
tables6.8.1Band6.8.1D.
Foractualapplications,thiswilltypicallybeafunctionoftheequipmentselectionandsizingoften,but
notalways,prioritizedforDesignCoolingLoadswiththeheatingandcoolingcapacitybothdetermined
by sizing at 100 to 125% of the cooling load. However, for heating, the NRCAN recommended outdoor
temperature balance point (OA temp at which capacity equals spaceconditioning load) should be in the
rangeof23to32F(5to0C).


To maintain dehumidification capability in humid climates, and thus consistency with industry best
practice,heatpumpcoolingcapacityshouldbeoversizednomorethan125%.
As noted in the more general section describing these predefined ApacheHVAC systems, the 90.1 PRM
requirements for sizing and operation of airsource heat pumps (ASHPs) are based in part upon DOE2
parameters and default inputs to eQuest rather than standard industry practice for sizing and operation
ofASHPs.Thesedefaultsandthesizingapproachthattheyimplycanleadtounrealisticsimulationresults,
regardless of what simulation tool is being used. The following considerations are therefore essential to
usingthesepredefinedsystemsinthecontextofthePRMbaselinerequirements.
ThisdiscussionaddressesthefollowingsectionG3.1.3.1textfromASHRAE90.1:
Heat Pumps (Systems 2 and 4). Electric airsource heat pumps shall be modeled with electric auxiliary
heat.Thesystemsshallbecontrolledwithmultistagespacethermostatsandanoutdoorairthermostat
wiredtoenergizeauxiliaryheatonlyonthelastthermostatstageandwhenoutdoorairtemperatureis
lessthan40F.
IEShasprovidedanewsetofdefaultvaluesfortheAirSourceHeatPump(ASHP)componentasofVE6.3
(default values are shown in the figure below); however, in light of the complications with ASHRAE
requirements vs. both realworld and simulationbased sizing considerations detailed below, fully
automating the sizing and performance curve inputs to meet the ASHRAE90.1 PRM requirements for
ASHPs in PRM baseline systems 2 and 4 will come in future versions. The current method therefore
combinesautosizingwithmanualinputstosizebaselineASHPswithinthecurrentversionoftheVE.


ThesizingprocessfortheASHPshouldbeasfollows(ifneeded,seefurtherexplanationbelow):
Forthesesystems,theASHPcomponentandDXcoolingprovidetheheatingandcoolingmodesof
thereversibleheatpump.Theelectricresistancebackupheatsourcehasunlimitedcapacity.
Completethestandarddesignsizingrunsforspacesandthenforthesystem(s)withtheoversizing
factorssettotheirdefaultvaluesof1.15forcoolingequipmentand1.25forheatingequipment,
asrequiredbythe90.1PRM.ThiswillautosizethecapacityASHPandDXcoolingtomeetthefull
extentoftheoversizedloadsattherespectivedesignconditions.
For each zone with an ASHP, compare the autosized capacity for the ASHP component in the
rangeoftypicalbalancepointtemperatures(e.g.,25to40F,dependingontheclimate)withthe
sizedcapacityofthecorrespondingDXcoolingcoil.ThesecapacitiesareshownintheHeatPump
componentdialogor,formanyzonesatonce,intabulareditviewthereof,andintheCoolingCoil
dialog or tabular edit view thereof. Note that the connected DX Cooling type covers a range of
possible baseline sizes having a common COP, and therefore the capacity indicated in the type
dialogmaybeoverriddenbyautosizingforeachinstanceofthattype(ifpermitted).
If the ASHP capacity within the range of typical balance points does not and DX cooling coil
capacitiesdonotdiffersignificantly*(e.g.,by20%ormore),adjustasindicatedbelow.


IftheASHPcomponentandDXcoolingcoilcapacitiesdiffersignificantly*(e.g.,by20%ormore),
adjustasindicatedbelow.
o IftheautosizedcoolingcoilcapacityissignificantlygreaterthantheASHPcapacity,adjust
theASHPcapacityupwardtomatchthecoolingcapacity.IftheASHPiswithin20%ofthe
DXcooling,itisprobablynotworthmakinganadjustment,asthisservesonlytoscalethe
ASHPperformancecurvewithrespecttoefficiency.
If the heating design day outdoor temperature is 40 F or higher, check the simulation results to
ensurethatthebackupelectric
System heating Capacity from sizing runs, modified as required to accommodate the following
considerations:
Foractualapplications,thiswilltypicallybeafunctionoftheequipmentsizingasprioritizedforDesign
CoolingLoads,withtheheatingandcoolingcapacitybothdeterminedbysizingat100to125%ofthe
coolingload.However,forheating,theNRCANrecommendedoutdoortemperaturebalancepoint(OA
tempatwhichcapacityequalsspaceconditioningload)shouldbeintherangeof23to32F(5to0C).
ForASHRAE90.1PRMBaselineSystems,inordertohavetheelectricresistanceheatsharetheloadat
a temperature closer to the 40 F outdoor maximum for electric backup operation, the ASHP heating
capacityshouldbethrgreatof:
A)thesizedcoolingcapacity
B) sufficient to maintain the space heating setpoint without solar or internal gains when the
outdoortemperatureis40F.
IftheheatingdesigndayOAtempissignificantlybelow30F,andadditionaldesignsizingrunwithOA
temperature between30and40FmaybejustifiedtodetermineanASHPcapacityandbalancepoint
that will engage the electric backup below the design temperature when internal and solar gains are
notpresent.
IftherequiredheatingcapacitytosatisfyBisgreaterthanthecoolingcapacity,A,thecoolingcapacity
shouldbeincreasedup
Tomaintainconsistencywithindustrybestpractice,thecoolingcapacityshouldbeoversizednomore
than 125%, unless this is required to match sizing of heating capacity in a PRM baseline system to
avoidoperationofthebackupelectricheatwhentheOAtemperatureisabove40F.
ThesizingprocessforASHPstendstodiffersignificantlyfromthatofotherHVACequipment.TheASHRAE
PRM specification is unfortunately unclear with respect to the sizing this type of equipment for baseline
systems(moreonthisbelow).Thusthereisadegreeofinterpretationrequiredhere,andyouarefreeto
reinterpret this as you see fit. The numbers you are seeing in the ASHP component dialog are simply a
startingpoint,andwillrequiremodification.
IftheASHPweresizedfortypicaldesignheatingindoorconditions(zerosolarandinternalgains)andan
outdoortemperaturebetween23and40F,thiswouldbeconsistentwithboth.However,iftheoutdoor
conditionfortheheatingdesigndayissignificantlybelow32F,heatingthisisinconsistentwiththewayin
which equipment is normally sized in a simulation environmenti.e., its a departure from the standard
procedure of sizing of heating equipment to meet heating loads at the standard design heating
conditions.
The90.1PRMrequiresadequatelysizingtheASHPplusbackupheatsourcetoavoidexcessiveunmetload
hours, and does not permit any electric backup heat when the outdoor temperature is 40 F or higher.


Thus the balance point (the outdoor temperature at which the full output of the ASHP just meets the
spaceheatingload)needstobebelow40Funderallcircumstancesofvaryinginternalgains,solargains,
etc. The PRM goes on to specify that the electric backup should be the last resort with respect to
maintainingthedesiredroomtemperaturewhentheairsourceheatpumpcantfullymeettheload.The
specified incrementally lower thermostat setpoint for engaging the backup heat is but one means of
accomplishing this. Addressing these together requires a bit of a sizing balancing act. And, the 40 F
ASHRAEisreferringtoisverydifferentthantheMinimumsourcetemperatureintheASHPdialog.Bothof
theseareexplainedbelow.
ItisimportantnottobemisledbythePRMreferenceto40Fasthemaximumoutdoortemperaturefor
operation of the backup electric resistance heating. The PRM is not saying that the ASHP should be off
below this temperature, only that the electric resistance heat should be off at above it. Assuming the
former, which may be implied by the combination of the PRM language regarding the and the eQuest
default for Minimum HP Heat Temp in the eQuest Supplemental Heat dialog (see below), can
significantlyskewresultsforthemodel.
Thefollowingbargraphshowsannualenergyconsumptionbyenduseforautosizedheatingandcooling
as predicted by eQuest version 3.63 with location set to Minneapolis, MN and HVAC system type set to
PTACandheatsourcesettoheatpump(i.e.,systemtypeisPTHP).Allotherinputs,includingthebuilding
geometry,remainedatpresetversion3.63defaultvalues.


In this particular illustration of how the default eQuest version 3.63 ASHP input values can lead to
unrealistic results for a baseline system, the default building in Minneapolis, MN used 75 times as much
energy(390MBTUvs.5.2MBTU)forsupplementalelectricresistancespaceheatingasitdidforheating
viathespecifiedPTHPsystems.
ThescreencapturesaboveshowhowthedefaultMinimumHPHeatTemphasbeenreducedto10Fto
avoid this particular problem. Because we have found no justification for cutting the heat pump off at
even10Fwhenthebackupheatsourceiselectricresistance,thedefaultvalueinApAcheHVACasofVE
6.3is0F.


For one particular zone (the top floor core zone of the default 2story office building), the default ASHP
inputs and sizing beget particularly skewed results, as indicated by the annual load served by the
Supplemental heat source vs. that served by the total load on the Heat pump unit in the SSQ report
above.
MinimumsourcetemperaturesettingfortheASHPcomponent
The minimum source temperature is the temperature below which the ASHP will switch off completely
andallowthebackupheatsourcetotakeovercompletely,ratherthanjustsupplementtheASHPoutput.
WhenthebackupheatsourceiselectricresistanceheatingandboththeASHPheatandbackupheatare
deliveredbyacommonfan,etc.(i.e.,whenthereisnosignificantdifferencebetweenthesewithrespect
to heating system or parasitic loads), it makes sense to switch the ASHP off completely only when low
outdoortemperaturesdrivetheCOPtoavalueoflessthan1.0.Thisisbecausebothrunonelectricityand
the electric resistance heating has an effective COP of 1.0. In such cases, the thermal and economic
balancepointsforthishandoffshouldbeessentiallythesame.
Because the PRM Baseline systems with ASHPs are required to use electric resistance as the backup
heatingsource,wemustassumethishasaneffectiveCOPof1.0.AsthedefaultASHPcurvehasaCOPof
betterthan1.0downto0F,wehaveused2FasthedefaultminimumsourcetemperatureasofVE6.3.
This is also consistent with industry best practice, which might set this between 0 and 10F for a system
with electric resistance backup, depending upon the equipment, climate, and so forth. Some recently
offerASHPtechnologies,however,havebeendevelopedwithagreateremphasisonheatingperformance
andarecapableofoperatingefficientlywellbelow0F.
When the backupheatsource usesadifferent energysource,hasrelativelyhighefficiency,orhaslesser
associated system/parasitic loads, the economic balance point may be higher with respect to the heat
pump COP. The economic balance point is the outdoor temperature below which it is cheaper to heat
with the supplementary heat source rather than the heat pump. In such cases, it often makes sense to
restrict ASHP operation, operating only the backup heat source below a specified outdoor temperature.


Anoutdoortemperaturesensorisusedtoshutofftheheatpumpwhenthetemperaturefallsbelowthe
presetlimit. Onlythesupplementaryheatsourceoperatesbelowthistemperature.Thisisthe Minimum
sourcetemperaturesettingfortheASHPcomponentinApacheHVAC.
Note: While realworld ASHP applications do sometimes, as noted above, restrict operation of the ASHP
belowaspecifiedtemperature,itisveryunusualtorestrictthebackupheatsourceoperationinbuilding
forwhichtheASHRAE90.1PRMisapplicable.Whileanindividualhomeownermaybegiventheoptionto
preventtheuseofthebackupheataboveasetoutdoortemperature,theoccupantsofheatedspacesin
largerbuildingsgenerallyexpecttheheatingsetpointtobemetbywhatevermeansisavailabletodoso,
regardlessoftheparticularoutdoortemperatureatthetime.
ASHPsizing
For actual applications, ASHP sizing and selection is a combined function of design cooling Loads and
heatingbalancepoint.Thecoolingloadsareusuallythepriorityinaclimatewithsignificantcoolingload,
especially if it is a humid climate. On the other hand, the preferred heating balance point (the lowest
outdoor temperature at which the ASHP meets the entire heating load) is typically in the 22 to 32 F
range.Ifdrivenpurelybycoolingrequirements,bothheatingandcoolingcapacitywouldbesizedatabout
100 to 110% of the cooling load. This approach is meant to provide efficient cooling operation and
effective dehumidification. In climates with mild winters, this may provide ample capacity to meet all
heating loads. In colder climates, however, this approach to sizing will tend to address some significant
fraction of the heating load, but not all of it. The rest will be addressed by a backup heat source. To
minimize dependence on the backup heat source, a somewhat larger unit may be selected in order to
providealowerheatingbalancepointwithrespecttooutdoortemperature.However,wheretheclimate
is not all that cold, oversizing with respect to heating to achieve a low balance point temperature may
reduce seasonal heating efficiency if it leads to a majority of operating hours at low partload fractions,
which is significantly less efficient than operating the heat pump at or near full load. Furthermore, part
loadoperationatlowoutdoortemperaturesisdoublyinefficient:atanoutdoortemperatureof37F,the
COP for a typical heat pump can drop below 1.0 if the load is less than about 30%. Finally, if
dehumidificationisanticipatedwhenincoolingmode(i.e.,inall butnotablydryclimates), bestpractice,
even when seeking a lower heating balance point, is to avoid sizing the unit greater than 125% of the
coolingload.Gettingthisrightrequiresasomewhatsophisticatebitoflogic.


Maybe best to simply size ASHP capacity at 47 F OA source temp to equal required heating capacity at
design heatingcondition. Untilwebuildsomeorallofthislogic intothesoftware,userinterventionwill
be required to determine appropriate sizing of the ASHP component in ApacheHVAC. As of VE 6.4, the
ASHP capacity at 47 F outdoor temperature will, for systems 2 & 4 when used in an ASHRAE 90.1 PRM
Baselinemodelorwhenrequested bytheuser,besetequaltotheDXcoolingcapacity.However,inthe
rare case of spaces with both moderate cooling loads and substantial heating loads occurring when
outdoor temperatures are above 40 F, it will be incumbent upon the user to check that these heating
loads are not exceeding the ASHP capacity and causing use of backup heat when outdoor temperatures
are greater than 40 F. The reason forthis is that the backup heating for ASHPs in ApacheHVAC does not
includeanarbitraryhighlimitinputforthebackupheatsource.Rather,thebackupsupplementstheASHP
whenthelattercannotfullymeettheload.
A further refinement will extend this logic as follows, using an additional specialpurpose heating design
sizingrunwiththeoutdoortemperatureforcedto40F.
FortruePRMBaselinesystems(i.e.,onlywhensuchsystemareusedinPRMBaselinemodels),inorder
to have the electric resistance heat share the load at a temperature closer to the 40 F outdoor
maximumforbackoperation,theASHPheatingcapacityshouldbethegreaterofthefollowing:
1) theassociatedcoolingcapacity
2) heating capacity sufficient to maintain the space heating setpoint without solar or internal
gainswhentheoutdoortemperatureis40F
Whentheheatingcapacitymustgreaterthanthedesiredcoolingcapacitysuchthatthebackupsource
will never be required when the outdoor temperature is above 40 F (#2 above), the associated DX
coolingcapacitywillneedtobeincreasedtomatchtheheatingcapacity.Thisscalestheperformance
curvesintheDXcoolingdialogsothatthepartloadefficienciesarecorrect.
The ASHRAE PRM specification includes the very clear statement regarding controls to prevent backup
electricheatoperationaboveoutdoortemperaturesof40F;however,thisappliesonlytosoftwarethatis
incapable of modeling a true back heat source that is used only when the primary (ASHP) heat source is
unabletomeettheloadasafunctionofoutdoorconditionsand/orindoorheatingloads.
47 F Design
temp
25 to
35 F ?
HP
Cap
Heat
load


ThePRMisalsounclearwithrespecttotheactualsizingofheatpumpequipmentforbaselinesystems.If,
for example, ASHP is required by ASHRAE to be 25% oversized beyond that required just to meet the
spaceconditioningloadatthedesigncondition
Backupelectricresistanceheat
Letssaythedesignconditionisa10Foutdoortemperaturejustbeforesunrise(nosun)withnointernal
gains in the space, and maintaining the room at say a 70F setpoint under these conditions results in a
quasistaticloadof464kBtu/h.Multiplythisby1.25andweget580kBtu/h.
If sized according to ASHRAE requirements for baseline building equipment, the ASHP has to have a
capacity of 580 kBtu/h, and we assume this should be at the rated condition (this is where ASHRAE is
more than just a bit unclear). If we then go and look at the rating conditions for an ASHP in a baseline
system (EER tables at the end of 90.1 chapter 6), we see that the ARI rating condition is an outdoor
temperature of 17 F. Thus, following this logic, our baseline ASHP should be capable of providing 580
kBtu/hat17Foutdoortemperature.Iftheloadisgreaterortheoutdoortemperatureislower,itmaynot
actuallymeettheload.However,asthedesignloadwasdeterminedat10Foutdoortemperatureandthe
equipment must be 25% oversized, this probably will never by a limiting factor for a baseline ASHP
system. There will, however, be another very significant limiting factor: The ASHP probably will have a
lowerlimit,suchas17F,belowwhichitwillprovidenousefulheat


12 11BAppendixC.ModelingVRV/VRFsystems
While work has begun on this, the VE does not yet include an explicit model for Variable Refrigerant
Volume (VRV) or Variable Refrigerant Flow (VRF) systems. However, as of VE 6.1, a relatively simple
condenser heat recovery approach can be used to reasonable approximate the thermodynamic
performance of such systems in ApacheHVAC. This method assumes that the VRV/VRF system is
configuredandcontrolledthemoveheat,viaacommonrefrigerantloop,fromzonesincoolingmodeto
thoseinheatingmodewhenthesemodesoverlap.
1. Useapartloadcurvechillermodelforthecoolingmodeandapartloadcurveheatingsourceforthe
heatingmode.
2. In the cooling source, you can specify COP values dependent upon both load and OA drybulb
conditions. The curve generator spreadsheet I had sent you can be useful for this. Ive attached the
latestversion(7),tobesureyourenotworkingwithanolderone.
3. Intheheatingsource,theCOPvalueswillbeexpressedasefficiencyvalues(e.g.,350%ratherthan3.5)
andthesewillvaryonlywiththeload.
4. The Condenser Heat Recovery percentage in the Cooling source dialog should be 100% (suggesting
that all of the heat extracted from zones in cooling can be rejected to zones in heating) and the CHR
recipientshouldpointtotheheatsourceyouhavesetupfortheheatingmode.
5. In the heating source dialog, leave the tick box for Use water source heat pump? unticked, as you
will already have determined the electrical energy needed to extract this recovered heat on the
cooling side. Set the Heating plant type to Other heating plant to keep energy consumption results
separatefromboilersorDHWheatsourcesinthemodel.
6. Thiswillaccountforthebenefitsofmovingheatfromonezonetoanother,andvariationofCOPwith
loadand,onthecoolingside,withoutdoorconditions.ItwillnotaccountforthedegradationofCOP
orheatingcapacitywithlowoutdoortemperatures.
7. UntilwecanpermittheASHPcomponenttobeaCHRrecipient,accountingforthedegradationofCOP
orheatingcapacitywithlowoutdoortemperatureswillrequirepostprocessingasfollows:
a. Copy hourly outdoor drybulb temperatures and results for both the heatsource load
electricityusetoaspreadsheet.
b. Inthespreadsheet,createaformulathatreferencestheOAtemperatureateachhourlytime
step and multiplies the heating energy consumption for that hour by a degradation factor to
reasonablyapproximatethedropinCOPatlowerOAtemperatures.
c. Create another formula that references the OA temperature at each hourly time step and
returnsavaluefortheapproximatecapacityoftheheatingmodeatthatOAtemperature.
d. Create a formula that subtracts the degraded heating capacity from the load on the heat
source at each time step and returns a value for remaining load, if any, that would not have
beenmetbytheheatsourceatthatOAtemperature.
e. Multiply the remaining load, if any, by the efficiency of a backup heat source or simply total
the remainder values if the backup is local electricresistance heating, as this is effectively
100%efficient.Addtheelectricityusedforbackupheatingtothatusedbytheheatingmodeof
theVRVequipmentasdeterminedbytheformulainstepb.


Inmildtowarmclimates,step7aewillbeoflittlebenefitandmaybeoverkill.Incoldclimates,itmaybe
importanttoaccountforthedegradationinbothCOPandcapacityatlowoutdoortemperatures.
Thegraphbelowshowsresultsforamodest25zoneofficebuildingonaday whereheatingand cooling

loads overlap. There is one airsource heat pump (ASHP) acting as the heating mode of the VRV system
and one DX unit modeled via the partloadcurve chiller dialog as the cooling mode of the VRV. These
components within ApacheHVAC are permitted to serve multiple heating and cooling coils, as would be
thecaseinaVRVsystem.
In the illustrated example, the ASHP and DX cooling sources are coupled to a multiplexed stack of 25
packaged singlezone systems for the individual zones. With the exception of the added condenser heat
recovery, these are essentially ASHRAE 90.1 PRM Baseline system 4, as provided in predefined
configurationamongtheprototypesystemsavailableasofVE6.1.
The condenser heat recovery (CHR) acts as the common refrigerant loop to pass heat from the zones in
coolingmodetothoserequiringheat.TheASHPandCHRbothpointtoanelectricresistancebackupheat
source, which is thus 3rd in line as a source of heat after the CHR and ASHP capacity are fully used.
Because the backup heat source is required and will always have an infinitely expandable capacity, any
limitation of heating capacity needs to be specified in terms of capacity for each heating coil. Cooling
capacityissimilarlylimitedbythecapacityspecifiedforeachcoolingcoil.
The ASHP has heating capacity and COP varying with the source temperature (this should most often be
outdoor temperature so that the system is correctly represented when heat demand exceeds the
available heat extracted from zones that are in cooling mode). The DX cooling using the partloadcurve
chillermodelhasCOPvaryingwithloadandoutdoor(condenser)conditions.WhiletheCOPatanygiven
timestepfortheDXcoolingwillbeafunctionofoutdoorconditionsandloadratherthan strictlyindoor
conditions, as would be the case when transferring heat from one location to another in commonloop
VRF/VRV system operation, this method should provide a reasonable approximation of the system
performance.
If desired, postprocessing of heating energy consumption results can provide an added degree of
accuracy
AlthoughtheCHRfacilitydoesallowformodelingenergyconsumptionaccordingtoaCOPassociatedwith
upgradingheatfromacondenserlooptoaheatingloop(e.g.,asinaWSHP),thisisnotnecessaryinthis
case,astheheating coilswilleffectivelyoperateasthecondenserfortheDXcoolingwhenheatisbeing
transferredviaCHR.Thereisalsoaninputwithinthepartloadcurvechillerdialogforthepercentageof
condenser heat available for recovery. Because there is no heat exchanger required, and thus no
exchanger effectiveness to model, and no alternate means of rejecting condenser heat when it is being
routed to condenser coils that are directly heating spaces, the available CHR percentage ought to be
approaching 100%. The compressor COP should account for losses associated with compressor heat
rejection directly to the surrounding air. As a small amount of heat will be lost in the distribution of
refrigerant to coils in heat rejection (heating) mode, an appropriate value for available CHR percentage
mightbe95%,dependingonthesystemcomponents,configuration,andinstallation.
Thegraphbelowshowstherecoveredheatfromthecoolingside(greenline)takingprecedenceoverthe
ASHP.Italsoshowsthatthecoolingsystemisaccountingfortheenergyrequiredtoextractthisheatfrom
an evaporator coil in zones where cooling is taking place and then providing it to the heating side. Thus
theelectricalenergyconsumptionforthisextractionofheatfromzonesincoolingmodedoesnotneedto
becountedseparatelyontheheatingside.


In working out the these methods, our observation is that for many building types and configurations, if
the systems are suitably controlled, there should be very little temporal overlap of heating and cooling
modes in a building effectively served by a large number of singlezone systems sharing a common
outdoor component. It would therefore appear that, in many applications, much of the efficiency (or
perhapsbetterreferredtoasefficacy)ofVRV/VRF systemsstemsfromtheir avoidanceof theonesize
fitsallplusreheatoutcometypicalofamultizonepackagedVAVsystem.Inotherwords,thecommon
loopaspectoftheconfigurationoftenseemstobesecondarytootheraspectsofVRV,suchasobviating
theneedforreheat,intermsofprovidingreducedenergyconsumption.
AsofVE6.1.1,therewill beadedicatedDXCoolingmodel usingperformancecurvesand accountingfor
theenteringairWBTattheDXevaporatorcoils.However,thiswillinitiallybesetuptorunonlywithone
DXevaporatorcoilperDXcoolingsourceandwithoutanyformofCHRtobepassedtoanASHP.

Apache Hvac

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Apache Hvac

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ApacheHVACUserGuide

Figure22: Heatsourceslistforselecting,adding,copying,andremoving bothpartloadcurveand hot

Enter the rated hot water flow rate. V

Enter the design hot water flow rate. V

Enter the design condenser water temperature difference T

DefaultValues 200.00kW 682.43kBTU/h

DefaultValues 9438.95l/s 20000.00CFM

DefaultValues 26.67C 80.00F

DefaultValues 19.44C 67.00F

DefaultValues 6.67C 44.00F

DefaultValues 6.67K 12.00F

RadiantFraction 0.01.0 0.01.0

Thegraphbelowshowsresultsforamodest25zoneofficebuildingonaday whereheatingand cooling

You might also like